Home

Green Kenue

1. 36 Manipulating 36 status bar ceccccccceceeeeeeeees 35 2 dimensio al tasa 40 coordinate systems 40 display properties 42 manipulating aaaaaaaasaasaaas 41 status bar oc eeccecccccccceceeeeeeeees 41 3 dimensional aaa anas 43 display properties 45 Manipulating ascesa 44 status bar AA 43 adding data items to 5 MOTI ATION PN 61 Base Maps ccccccceeeseeeeeeeees 60 0 S21 6 ee 33 CIECOPALIONS saanman asaan 53 LoL mma ee 37 COOICINALES sceicscencedecasteenertenees 38 display properties 39 manipulating 38 sas DAE ama Asahan 38 RODS OS edia 33 properties dialog eee 34 PEINOY 112 sccssacrosecsnsncnmanationcennenens 33 removing data items from 5 io 9 0 ae eee ee eee ee 49 manipulating eee 51 Index page setup properties S2 SUAS PAENG 49 gi AA 53 DOOM AE AAP 50 spherical AA insni 46 display properties 48 manipulating u s 47 JUAN 47 synchroniZing eniri 63 troubleshooting ccccccceeeeeee 66 W Watershed AA ioves ieardess 135 algorithms 00 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 138 A eee eee 138 USING AA 138 BAI 149 GIG APA 141 COMPONENtS a 135 137 CAN ee nee ee een 136 DEM ae 140 EO aaa E TO E 308 format ASCII aaa 310 BINAY ae 310 headers ccccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeees 308 HOW pat
2. a 110 1 6 6 6 Computing an Integral a 110 e To compute the integral of a TimeSeries 00008 111 1 6 6 7 Computing a Distribution 0 0 0 0 a 111 e To create a distribution 0 0 00 ee 111 1 6 7 Create Vector Field 0 0 0 ee es 112 e To create a vector grid or mesh 0 cee eee 112 1 6 8 Mapping Objects 0 0 ees 113 e To map objects a 114 ipon ae c8 llo AA AA 115 1 6 9 1 The Calculator for Data Items 0 0 0 0 eee 115 a To use the calculator 0 srai euid adai aa ee 115 1 6 9 2 The Calculator for Gridded Objects 116 e To use the calculator 0 0 ee eee 116 1 6 9 3 The Calculator for Time Series Objects 118 e To use the calculator ee eee 118 1 6 9 4 The Calculator Expressions 0 AA AA 120 1 7 HOW TO HINTS AND TRICKS 22222222 anuna es 122 1 7 1 Draping a 3D Image Onto a DEM 122 e To drape an image 1 a 122 1 7 2 Extracting Cross Sections from Gridded Data 123 e To create a cross section or 3D polyline 123 1 7 3 Extracting Cross Sections from Points and Line Data 124 e To create a cross section or 3D polyline from points or line data 124 1 7 4 Displaying Two Features of an Object Simultaneously 124 1 7 5 Displaying Isoline Outlined F
3. 00000 cee eee 232 4 2 1 5 9 Removing a Cross Section 0 0 00 233 e TO remove a cross section aaa 233 4 2 1 5 10Cross Section Properties 0 0 eee ee eee 233 e To view the properties of a cross section 233 4 2 2 Running the GEN1D Model 005 234 XV Green KenueSeptember 2010 e Torun a GEN1D simulation 00 0 0000 00000000 8 234 4 2 3 Displaying Simulation Output 0 2 0005 234 4 2 3 1 Creating a Hot Start From an Output 235 e To extract a Hot Start from a GEN1D model run 235 5 THE HBV EC MODEL 0 00 cee ee ees 237 5 1 GENERAL BACKGROUND 2222 2a as 237 5 1 1 Background and History of the Model 237 5 1 2 Algorithms Specific to the Model 237 5 1 2 1 Climate Zones 00 aa 238 5 1 2 2 Snow Melt Factor Variation with Terrain Aspect and Slope 238 5 1 2 3 Watershed Routing a 238 5 1 3 References sateen banaag crass Da AAEEGEA LUAD WK 238 5 2 THE HBV EC INTERFACE 222 255m ee 238 5 2 1 The EnSim WaterShed Panel 0 0000 eee 239 e To identify an alternate basin object 2 0 00 eee eee 241 5 2 2 The Basin Panel 0 00 0 ee ee 242 5 2 2 1 The ClimateTab 000 es 243 5 2 2 2 The Elevation Tab 0 0 eee 243 5 2 2 3 The Land U
4. 129 HYDAT CC ESSMNO casi scses E E 193 file locations 193 loading a station 195 OVETVIEW occecccccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 193 stations ACCESSING seei n T 195 Metal a EA 198 IA 196 HYDEX aa 199 MUNA as 200 PODET GS aise 198 SCOS aoe 201 SUNOS CUS sapra 201 Hydrologic EnSim Uu Hypsographic Curve 159 Index Hypsometric Curve See Hypsographic Curve ICONS saa 3 4 CONAN AA 4 g o TIFF ana 4 line set AA corre tet re ore 4 OLD AA AA 4 IG UWOLIG apee G DA 4 POME Cham AA AG 4 rectangular grid SALAT PNR 4 NGGLOD paaa AA NAA oon 4 TAO Me E ES 4 time series O srecactserae E A E AN 4 O AA 4 triangular mesh SCALE n ee eoaonetiess 4 51 27 6 0 Ee nner on noe re ANA 4 Moy OD AA 4 Images copying to clipboard 66 digitizing from an imported 128 PEMA ANAN 66 Kae BR sieneen EE 65 saving and copying u s 65 Independent Legends 56 Integrals computing ou eeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 110 DAG ANN 103 AA AA GAG AA 7 Isoline Outlined Filled Contours ODEV a a EA 125 K Kamphuis ccccccccceeeeeeeeeees 215 Konte aa aan 1 ii AA 135 307 September 2010 L Labeb ee AA 59 Legends Independent cceeecceccceeeeeeees 56 Legends Colour Scale 54 Line Data extracting cross sections from 124 Line Set scradectecchncecentosensieetaesescnene
5. Properties of NewGEN1DRun 1 xX Simulation Channel Down Boundary Up Boundary Tupe water Level Constant T 0 Node ID Sener FileName Sample Down Boundary t31 A Display Data Meta Data M Visibl EH Colour Styles Lines Solid bd Fonts Fill Square OF Apply Cancel Figure 4 11 The Down Boundary tab defines the downstream boundary of the channel 17 Line width s Point Size There are five ways to describe the downstream boundary e Type Use this box to select the general type of boundary at the downstream node e Water Level Constant If the downstream boundary is constant enter the water level in metres in the text box e Water Level Series If the downstream boundary varies over time click Bi to select and load a scalar time series ts1 file that describes the changes in its water level e Discharge Constant If the downstream boundary has a constant discharge enter the value in m s in the text box e Discharge Series If the downstream boundary has a discharge that varies over time click El to select and load a scalar time series ts1 file that describes the changes e Free Flow If the downstream boundary has an effectively unlimited rate of discharge select this option e Node ID The downstream boundary is always considered to be Node 1 of the network e Series Click FA to select and load a scalar time series that describes the changes in
6. Properties of new HBV EC Parameter Set x WaterShed Basin simulation Climate Elevation Land Use Slope Aspect Zones Display Spatial Meta Data Show Legend Ok Apply Cancel Figure 5 5 This HBV EC panel has not yet been activated Initially this panel is inactive To activate the Basin panel click the Generate Basin Data from Watershed button This will generate initial values for the spatial data corresponding to the watershed object Note If there 1s more than one basin object contained in the watershed you must select the basin that is to be used in the WorkSpace panel To exclude basins that are internal to the watershed that is to generate data for only the selected basin clear the Include Internal Basins checkbox before clicking the Generate Basin data from Watershed button If there is only one basin object in the watershed this option is disregarded The Basin panel contains five tabs each of which corresponds to a 2D Triangular Scalar Mesh object shown as a child of the basin object within the HBV EC Parameter Set object The triangular mesh objects can be displayed in a 3D view window 242 Section 5 2 The HBV EC Interface September 2010 5 2 2 1 The Climate Tab The Climate tab indicates how the basin is divided into climate zones Smaller watersheds will usually be contained entirely within a single zone but larger areas may require multiple sets of climate data
7. Figure 1 99 This object is being displayed as a coloured surface and a black monochrome mesh simultaneously If the object is being displayed for editing purposes be careful to highlight the appropriate object in the WorkSpace to ensure that the correct object is being edited Also remember that EnSim considers the objects to be independent of each other Be careful to edit only one of the objects Remember that all attributes of an object not just the one being displayed can be edited with the Edit command in the shortcut menu Also remember the following e Ifyou are displaying the objects in a 3D view ensure that the Scale of both is the same e Ifyou are displaying isolines and filled contours ensure that the colour scale attributes 1 e min max interval style levels etc of all objects is the same Even though an object may be displayed in monochrome the colour scale defines the values of the isolines 1 7 5 Displaying Isoline Outlined Filled Contours To display an object as filled contours and isolines in the same view the object need not be opened and displayed twice Isolines can be extracted from the grid or mesh making a new independent object To do this highlight the grid or mesh object in the WorkSpace select Tools Extract Isolines Multiple Isolines The new line set object will appear in the WorkSpace as a child of the grid or mesh It can be displayed in the same view as the grid or mesh 125 E
8. ASCII Parcel files that contain data that does not vary over time are stored in ASCII format The data is organized into n 2 columns where n is the total number of data attributes possessed by each point The two extra columns are used to store the x and y coordinates of the points The information for each point begins on a new line The first value on a line is the x coordinate and the second is the y coordinate Data attributes follow on the same line in the same order as they appear in the header Binary Parcel files containing data that varies over time are stored in binary format Each time step 1s contained in a separate record that describes the location and attributes of each point at that particular time step The first item in each record is the record header See Binary Files on p 268 for more information on record headers After the record header is an integer indicating the number of points or parcels present at the particular time step That number is followed by the x coordinates of all of the points which is followed by the y coordinates for all of the points After the coordinates the data attributes are listed Each attribute is contained within a subrecord which contains all of the values for that attribute at that time step The listing of attribute values is followed by a repetition of the number of points in the time step which ends the record Points or parcels can appear in any order as long as t
9. Ordinate v Maximum 0 5905 Minimum Units Probability Percentile Calculation Kean 0 637128 5 a 0 00754194 Std Dev 1 3513 Cancel Figure 1 88 The Data tab shows some information about the distribution e Abscissa X axis e Intervals This is the total number of intervals of data represented on the curve e Maximum This is the maximum value found within the time series e Minimum This is the minimum value found within the time series e Units This is the units of measure used for the data in the time series e Ordinate Y axis e Maximum This is the probability of the most probable value in the time series e Minimum This is the probability of the least probable value in the time series e Units Units of probability are dimensionless This value is always defined as probability e Mean This is the mean value over the time series e Std Dev This is the standard deviation from the mean over the time series e Percentile Calculation This section allows you to determine the value below which a given percentage of the distribution lies Enter a percentage in the box and click Apply to display the value The percentage must be between 0 and 100 and is limited to two decimal places 1 6 7 Create Vector Field Two scalar rectangular grids r2s or triangular meshes t3s can be combined to create a vector rectangular grid r2v or a vector triangular mesh t3v To create a vector
10. 2 1 2 THE WORKSPACE 0 65 Gada 66 ARNAN WANNA ANAND ee eee AGA 3 1 2 1 Managing Objects in the WorkSpace 3 1 2 2 Saving and Loading The WorkSpace 6 e To Save a WorkSpace ene 6 To Load a WorkSpace cnx beds be ew deed bod aw ee Bie ea 6 1 3 THE ENSIM INTERFACE 0c cece eee ee ee ees 7 dost Me WMENU Bal 1 03 4 cos ache 2 2 wind Bere Base wd ADA wore Nae Neos INE LOOV Bal ca paha halata ramets pees sats es TAGO 8 1 3 3 The T3 Mesh Editing Toolbar 0 0 0 0000 ee 8 1 34 Shortcut Men s sss sacked oo aces NAG babaan cee cod oes Seats 8 kA DATAITEMS citrine Gioia NN AN ieee Gere LNG ee enw eee 9 1 4 1 Loading and Importing Data Items 10 1 4 1 1 Native Data Items a 10 1 4 1 2 Foreign Data ltems a 11 14 2 Saving and Exporting Data Items 0 11 1 4 3 Properties of Data Items 0 0 AA 17 1 4 3 1 Display Properties a 17 1 4 3 1 1 Rendering Options aa 18 1 4 3 1 2 Vertical Display Options 0 0 0 ee eee 19 1 4 3 1 3 Other Display Options 0 0 0 ce eee 19 43 2 COU salpakan Ga eee amp dn ote eae KUAN ee Eee 20 FO CdILING GOlIOUl Scale 4 24426 5 82200400810 Ste RS seC4 ASSES 7 4465 20 e To apply a previously created colour scale 21 1 4 3 3 Data Attributes 5 5 ew wide AKA own LA dem otha So
11. 3 2 5 1 Subset The Subset tab allows you to adjust the temporal range of data shown in the ID view Initially the entire data set will be shown To create a temporal subset 1 Click on either the Start or End data boxes You can adjust the date by typing the new data or by clicking on the button If the J button is selected a calendar will appear E DPA a December 2000 KI Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu ee a 2 2T all Pl 2 3 4 5 E 7 8 J 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Tf 18 19 20 21 22 23 ad 5 26 2f 28 29 JO Figure 3 20 This calendar is used to change the start and end dates of a temporal subset 2 Click on the date to which you would like to change the start or end time e Click on 4 or to adjust the month backward or forward or click on the calendar title to select a specific month 207 HYDAT Database September 2010 e Click on the year and use the up and down arrows to change the year 3 To remove months from the data set click on the check box next to the month name on the Subset tab 4 Click the Reset button to include the entire data set 5 Select the ppl button to apply your changes If you have selected any dates outside the range of data for the station the date will reset to the maximum for that parameter 208 Section 3 3 NARR DATABASE September 2010 3 3 NARR DATABASE 3 3 1 Introduction The North American Regional Reanalysis dataset is a long term consistent high
12. 36 1 5 5 The Polar View Window aa 3 1 5 5 1 Coordinates ina Polar View a 38 1 5 5 2 The Polar View Window Status Bar 000 38 1 5 5 3 Manipulating the Polar View 0 0 0 00 eee ee 38 1 5 5 4 Display Properties of the Polar View Window 39 1 5 6 The 2D View Window 0 0 00 cc 40 1 5 6 1 Coordinate Systems and Units in 2D Views 40 1 5 6 2 The 2D Window Status Bar 0 aa 41 1 5 6 3 Manipulating the 2D View a 41 e To move a data item already in the view to the top layer 41 1 5 6 4 Display Properties of the 2D Window 42 1 5 7 The 3D View Window 0 0000 cc 43 1 5 7 1 The 3D Window Status Bar 0 0 0a 43 1 5 7 2 Manipulating the 3D View a 44 1 5 7 3 Display Properties of the 3D View Window 45 1 5 8 The Spherical View Window aa 46 1 5 8 1 The Spherical View Window Status Bar 47 1 5 8 2 Manipulating the Spherical View 200000 e ee 47 1 5 8 3 Display Properties of the Spherical View Window 48 1 5 9 The Report View Window a 49 1 5 9 1 The Report View Window Status Bar 49 1 5 9 2 The Report View Window Tool Bar 50 1 5 9 3 Manipulating the Report View 0 00 aaa 51 e To adda view to a report 1 a 51 e To ma
13. Climate Hlevatian Land Use Slope Aspect fones Display Spatial Meta Data Zone 1 215 0725 Figure 5 6 This watershed is contained within a single climate zone To assign areas of a watershed to a different climate zone see Identifying Zones Within HBV EC on p 248 5 2 2 2 The Elevation Tab The Elevation tab indicates which elevation bands appear in the watershed Within the tab you can control how many bands are used as well as the boundaries for each band Clicking within the Colour column allows you to change the colours assigned to each band 243 The HBV EC Model September 2010 Climate Elevation Land Use Slope Aspect Bands Display Spatial Meta Data Number of Bands 10 jt Show Legend Figure 5 7 This watershed has been divided into 10 elevation bands of roughly equal area By clicking on and changing the values in the Min column you can redefine the limits of each band the Max Area and Median values will automatically change to match In the HBV EC model each elevation band is identified by a single elevation value By default this is the median elevation value of the zone 2D View 2 1252 0 to 17403 Elevation Bands Mm 341 0 to 670 0 394 0 to 541 0 268 0 to 394 UU to 268 0 Figure 5 8 This 2D view shows the triangular mesh associated with the Elevation tab shown above 244 Section 5 2 The HBV EC Interface September 2010 By default a n
14. Lines or closed lines may be saved in 12s 13s xyz mif or shp format To create a line or polyline 1 Open or select a 2D view 2 Select the a button or File 3yNew 50pen Line The button will appear depressed ey In the File New menu Open Line will appear with a checkmark 3 Click within the 2D view to create the first point of the line Each click will create a new point with a line connecting it to the previous point 4 To end the line reselect the ay button or press lt Esc gt The Line button will appear raised Alternatively reselect File gt New Open Line 5 A dialog will appear asking you to enter a name a value and units for the new line Hint Lock the view while drawing a line using the Display tab of the View s Properties dialog Otherwise a mouse click may pan the view instead of extending the Line Set To create a closed line or polygon 1 Open or select a 2D view 2 Select the E button or File New gt Closed Line The button will appear depressed amp In the File New menu Closed Line will appear with a checkmark 3 Click within the 2D view to create the first point of the polygon Each click will create a new point with lines connecting it to the previous point and to the first point producing a closed polygon 4 To end the closed line reselect the E button or press lt Esc gt The Closed Line button will appear raised Alternatively res
15. The data items that are recognized by all EnSim applications are 2D Rectangular Scalar Grids r2s Two dimensional rectangular or regular grid having evenly spaced nodes in both dimensions X spacing may differ from y spacing The node values of the grid are scalar quantities e g Elevation concentration etc associated with each node May be time varying Represents a continuous surface 2D Rectangular Vector Grid r2v Two dimensional rectangular or regular grid having evenly spaced nodes in both dimensions X spacing may differ from y spacing The node values of the grid are vector components in the x and y direction e g velocity flux etc May be time varying 2D Rectangular Cell Grids r2c Two dimensional rectangular or regular grid having evenly spaced nodes in both dimensions X spacing may differ from y spacing The node values of the grid are scalar quantities e g Land use etc and are constant over each cell May be time varying Represents a discrete surface 2D Triangular Scalar Mesh t3s Two dimensional triangular mesh The node values of the mesh are scalar quantities e g elevation concentration etc associated with each node May be time varying Represents a continuous surface 2D Triangular Vector Mesh t3v Two dimensional triangular mesh The node values of the mesh are vector components in the x and y direction e g velocity flux etc May be time varying 2D Line Sets 12s Open or closed col
16. m a Level02KEFO05 nag a Conc02KF005 AA PO Load02kFO05 PRA ee PAP TA ma Figure 3 4 Data from a specific station are shown as children of that station 195 HYDAT Database September 2010 To access a station by ID 1 Select File Environmental Data Open HYDAT Search by ID from the menu bar Query es Cancel Search for which Station ID 02kF005 Figure 3 5 This dialog allows you to search for a HYDAT station by ID 2 Enter the HYDAT ID number in the dialog and click UF All HYDAT ID numbers are uppercase Station details and associated time series will be shown in the WorkSpace as children of the selected station as shown in Figure 3 4 3 1 4 Filtering Station Details The contents of the HY DAT MDB Database can be filtered to show only a subset of available stations Filtering the database restricts the displayed records both within a View and within the Attribute Table for the HYDAT data object To filter the HY DAT MDB Database 1 Within the WorkSpace right click on the HY DAT MDB Database object HydatStations Station and select Show Attribute Table Filter from the shortcut menu The HydatStations Filter table will appear in the View area HydatStations Filter ES Hydstaus gt Data Period 1850 Ca Han Apoly Fiter __e m6 cll oe PS Oper Sched x E CABANO RIVIERE AU LAC LONG Discontinued LN I ARA AS ARE EN AVA DULAC SAPIT PRAN i ti 47
17. 2 1 3 3 2 Displaying Channels Channels can be viewed by dragging the Channels object into a 2D or 3D view The colour scale of the flow paths describes either stream order or drainage area The Data tab of the Channels Properties dialog allows you to select the attribute being displayed as indicated by a green check mark In addition to the flow path the Channels object can optionally display watershed outlet nodes A circle around a node identifies a watershed outlet node that meets the outlet node search criteria parameters See the section Watershed or Basin Outlet Nodes on p 147 for more information Watershed outlet nodes are not marked in the figure below The green line 1s the watershed boundary C7 Order 3 Figure 2 10 These examples indicate the stream order and drainage areas of the watershed bounded by the green line The extent of definition of the channels determining whether minor channels will be displayed can be adjusted in the Criteria tab of the Channel s Properties dialog 143 Green Kenue September 2010 Properties of TestWaterShed x Watershed DEM Channels Basin 1 Criteria Display ColorScale Data Spatial Meta Data Generate Channels 2 Maximun drainage area on grid d km Channel headwater drainage area o ka 2 Outlet Hode Search Criteria Minimum watershed area aO km Minimum adjoining Watershed area 26 bre Cancel Figure 2 11 The Cr
18. 219 The GEN1D Model September 2010 Properties of NewGENiDRun i xX simulation Channel Down Boundary Up Boundary Parameters Hun Name NewGEN1DRun Er Temporal Start Time 0 00 00 Duration 1 00 00 Time 5tep 0 00 30 000 Allow the model to iy m vary the timestep Output Name n38 Attributes to Save to Output Network File j2 Surface Elevation m F Conveying Width rm i velocity m s Cross Sectional Area m7 i Discharge m 2 3 Apply Cancel Figure 4 4 The Simulation tab controls the overall simulation run There are two main sections to the Simulation tab The upper section Parameters controls some of the general simulation information e Run Name This is the file name of the GENID parameter file g1d This name is also used as the root for naming generated output files Temporal This area controls the time step and duration of the simulation e Start Time The time in the simulation at which calculations begin The format is hours minutes seconds e Duration The length of time to be simulated The format is hours minutes seconds e Time Step The interval between calculation of results during the simulation The format is hours minutes seconds e Allow the model to vary the timestep If this box is checked the simulation will vary the time step as needed to complete the simulation in a reasonable amount of time If results are varying widely between time step
19. 3 If there are any attributes that are required by the model but aren t already contained by the incoming object they will be added at this point The following dialog will allow you to set the default values Attributes that are greyed out will be added but are fixed in value 223 The GEN1D Model September 2010 Add Required Attributes x The following attributes are required by the GEN1D Model but are missing from the Channel Network Selecting OK will add them to the GENTO Network Surface Elevation Enter Depth value 0 0 elocity 0 0 Strickler Friction 0 0 Cancel Figure 4 7 This dialog may appear if you create a channel object from a network or 3D line object 4 Next you will be prompted to rename and resave the network object to conform to the requirements of the GENID model Click OK 5 Enter an appropriate name for the channel network and click Save 4 2 1 2 2 Opening an Existing Channel Object If a channel object has already been created it can be used as the basis for the simulation To open an existing channel object 1 Click on El in the Channel tab of the GEN1D Run dialog 2 Select the previously created channel object It will have the extension n3s 3 Click OK 4 2 1 2 3 Changing a Segment Attribute Value To change a segment attribute value 1 Double click on a segment of the network within a view to select it 2 Right click on the selected segment 3 Select Edit from
20. RONU speserdenaccavertoerpencateweceees 327 DON eorne NA 329 DOV ama MAGANA 323 history a 237 ITAICE maa Naa 238 basin PANE aaa 242 PEO amma AA 247 dh 243 elevation aa 243 identifying zones 248 land use saaan na 245 Je aee een 246 climate zone panel 253 climate zone parameters 253 elevation band parameters 256 land class parameters 257 IIE TAD aka 257 new parameters 239 simulation panel 250 outlet elevation 252 TOUTING 252 334 September 2010 simulation times 251 watershed panel 239 watershed creating 240 watershed identifying basin 241 watershed importing 240 model ESUS amma AA OLGA 260 running simulation 259 a CA pecene 238 snow melt factor variation 238 the HBV EC model 231 watershed routing u s 238 62 aaa 2 AGE 305 BAN o 122 How TO ul 122 classify a GeoTIFF image 130 create a sloping structure 126 digitize from an imported image 128 display isoline outlined contours 125 display two features of anitem 124 drape an image onto a DEM 122 extract a cross section from gridded data 123 from points and line data 124 extract a spatial subset 127 extract a temporal subset 127 georeference a GeoTIFF
21. The attributes shown in this section will vary from one object type to another The possible attributes shown here are e Origin This is the location of the southwest corner of a grid object in the assigned coordinate system e Max This is the location of the most extreme top right point Northeast of the object e Min This is the location of the most extreme bottom left point Southwest of the object Extent Under the X column this is the distance in the x direction between the Min and Max points of the object Under the Y column this is the distance in the y direction between the Min and Max points of the object e Nodes This is the number of nodes in the X amp Y directions of a grid object e Delta This is the distance between each node For a GeoTIFF the attributes shown represent the X and Y coordinates of each corner of the object 1 4 3 4 2 Coordinate Systems All spatial EnSim Objects have a sense of coordinate system Keywords identifying the coordinate system are found in the file header The coordinate systems recognized by EnSim are LatLong UTM MTM Polar Stereographic Lambert Conformal Albers and Cartesian The default coordinate system for any object 1s Cartesian Some imported objects contain coordinate system information e g DEM MapInfo mif 26 Section 1 4 Data Items September 2010 1 4 3 4 3 Coordinate System Converting Projections To change the projection of the object
22. 2 Provide a Filename for the recording Use the a button to browse 3 In the Movie box select the number of Frames to be recorded The movie will begin at the current frame in the view window For example if you want to avoid recording the first 10 frames of an animation begin record when the counter is on frame 11 If more frames are indicated than remain in the animation the final frame will be repeated 4 The Frame Rate is the number of frames per second of playback A frame rate of 15 is generally good 5 Image Size refers to the size of the view window for the recording Choose a standard window size from the menu or create a custom size by entering the width and height respectively in pixels Note that the NTSC and PAL standards are provided 6 Encoding is the type of compression used in creating the avi record Different types of encoding will produce different quality recordings The standard Windows encoding 65 EnSim Core September 2010 methods are provided in the menu Cinepak is the most widely used method Other choices are available under the Advanced option With the Advanced option a second dialog Video Compression will appear once the movie when this dialog is closed 7 Quality allows you to adjust the quality of the recording and as a result the size of the file produced File size and quality are not linearly related That is decreasing the quality to 50 will not reduce the file size by half but will p
23. Boolean Valid values TRUE FALSE Default FALSE Description Records whether the simulation can vary the time step as needed e SIMULATION TIME Required Type floating point in seconds or hhhh mm ss in hours minutes seconds separated by colons Valid values any positive number Default none Description defines the length of a simulation e START TIME Optional Type floating point in seconds or hhhh mm ss in hours minutes seconds separated by colons Valid values any positive number Default none Description identifies the start time of the simulation if it has an absolute time Constants e COURANT Optional Type floating point Valid Values between 0 and 1 Default 1 000000 Description Records the Courant number in the case of a variable time step The Courant number is the ratio of the physical speed of the model to its calculation speed e VISCOSITY Optional Type floating point Valid Values greater than 0 Default 1 000000 Description Records the viscosity value of the water in the simulation Water is considered to have a viscosity of 1 e STEADY STATE DISCHARGE ACCURACY Optional Type floating point Valid Values greater than 0 and less than 1 Invalid values are considered to be 1e 07 317 EnSim Hydrologic September 2010 Default 0 0001 Description Records the accuracy to which the simulation will be run if the run type 1s RUN TO
24. C7 s234322 60G 616749 100 1439 73 Type 3 ts3 Type 3 time series files contain scalar data that varies with an explicit time step Each line of data has two sets of values The first is the explicit time and the second 1s the corresponding scalar data value There are four formats that may be used to specify the date and time although only one format may be used in a particular file Hours minutes and seconds are always specified regardless of the format although the values may be zero The date and decimal seconds are optional If the date is omitted hours increment beyond 24 An example of each time format 1s shown below e 2005 04 15 14 42 27 003 e 2005 04 15 14 42 27 e 0062 42 27 003 e 0062 42 27 An excerpt of data from a ts3 file is shown below The time increments every two hours starting at 3 AM on April 15th 2005 as indicated by the explicit time EndHeader 2005 04 15 3200 00 000 0 003000 23005704715 5200400 000 0 001350 2005 04 15 7200200 000 0 001327 2005 04 15 9 00 00 000 0 001442 2005 04 15 11500200 000 0 001532 2005704715 13 00 00 000 0 001712 2005 04 15 15 00 00 000 0 001909 2005 04 15 17 00 00 000 0 002037 2005704713 19 00 00 000 0 002359 2005 04 15 21 00 00 000 0 004285 2005 04715 23 00 00 000 0 006134 2005 04716 01 00 00 000 0 004698 Type 4 ts4 Type 4 time series files contain vector data that varies with an explicit time step Each line of data has 3 sets of values The first is t
25. E new MultiTile Waters Figure 2 4 These icons indicate that the watershed contains multiple source tiles You can also create a watershed from multiple tiles This is called a multi tile watershed and can be created by selecting File New gt Multi Tile Watershed from the menu bar Multi tile watersheds can contain r2s or dem source data and use slightly different icons In addition the watershed object cannot be displayed in a View if the TileList 1s moved to a View only the tiles outlines and filenames will be shown To create a new grid from another data type use the grid generation tools described in the section Creating a New Regular Grid under Creating New Data Items on p 70 The elevation grid DEM is the most important feature in the watershed object as all other components the channels and the basin outline are based on the information it contains Care should be taken to create a quality grid Drag the grid file onto the watershed object s empty DEM component within the workspace Select a flow algorithm and press the generate button Green Kenue will create a default channel network and a default basin 2 1 3 1 Watersheds The watershed object is the parent object for the three children The watershed properties tab describes the methods for watershed delineation and its associated component objects 137 Green Kenue September 2010 Properties of New Watershed x Watershed DEM Channels Basi
26. Figure 2 44 Restricting the temporal subset to a single year results in a correlation coefficient of 0 9987 173 Green Kenue September 2010 2 2 2 3 Opening an Existing RCA To open an RCA 1 Select File 30pen from the menu bar 2 Locate and select the RCA in the dialog box 3 Click Ok 2 2 2 4 Saving an RCA To save an RCA 1 Select the RCA in the WorkSpace 2 Select File Save from the menu bar The file will be saved as an rca file 174 Section 2 3 WATFLOOD September 2010 2 3 WATFLOOD 2 3 1 WATFLOOD Map Files The Watflood Map file is an input data file required by the WATFLOOD hydrologic model The file consists of a regular grid of cells with data values for several physiographic attributes assigned to each cell The Watflood Map object uses information in the watershed object to calculate most of the data attributes for each grid cell The land use data attributes are calculated using other data information and tools The Watflood Map will be stored in map format See Supported Foreign File Types Green Kenue on p 311 for more information about this type of file It can be viewed by dragging the map object into a view For WATFLOOD to use the map file it must contain at minimum the information provided by the watershed object in addition to land use information 2 3 1 1 Opening an Existing Watflood Map File To open an existing map file select File gt Open from the menu bar or the butto
27. Hint To save the contour lines of a gridded data item refer to the section on Extracting Isolines under Extracting Data on p 95 Extract the isolines and save them as a line set 12s 13s 16 Section 1 4 Data Items September 2010 1 4 3 Properties of Data Items All objects have properties that can be viewed and edited from the Properties dialog box An object s Properties dialog box can be accessed in three ways e With the object selected choose the Properties command from the Edit menu An object is selected using the workspace or by double clicking on the object in a view window e With the object selected choose the Properties command from the shortcut menu right click An object is selected using the workspace or by double clicking on the object in a view window e Double click on the object in the workspace The tabs contained in a properties dialog are specific to the object s data type e g point data line set triangular mesh Objects that can be displayed in 1D usually have three tabs Display Data and Meta Data Objects that can be displayed in a 2D or 3D view window commonly have five tabs Display Colour Scale Data Spatial and Meta Data Some objects will have none of the tabs described below For example some objects that are specific to one application are designed to guide you through a specific set of tasks These details are described in the section of the manual that is specific to the particul
28. If Mag is chosen the magnitude of the selected vector data item will be used in the expression If U is chosen the U component of the selected data item will be used in the expression If V is chosen the V component of the selected data item will be used in the expression e Expression This box allows you to enter a mathematical expression to calculate a new data item This can include the data items chosen in the Variable boxes as well as constants The mathematical operators available are listed in The Calculator Expressions on p 120 117 EnSim Core September 2010 The Expression box also stores previously used expressions from the current session of EnSim Once the expression has been evaluated the parsed expression will appear in the text box below the Expression box e Result The name of the resulting data item can be entered in the Name box and its units may be entered in the Units box Note that changing the units of a data item will not perform a conversion The Units entry is for reference purposes only Once the data item s parameters are chosen and the expression is completed click on the Evaluate button to create the new data item The new data item will appear in the WorkSpace and the expression will be displayed in the text box If the calculation is valid and a name has been provided the calculator dialog will close The new data item will be scalar If the data item cannot be used with the calculator
29. Meta Data Include Recordz Stat 1960107401 M anuani lv July IY February ff August End 2000 1 oe fe March M September Iw April MW October Ca Iw May ft November aha W June W December Figure 3 10 Each of the four time series has a Subset tab 3 1 6 1 Subset The Subset tab allows you to adjust the temporal range of data shown in the ID view Initially the entire data set will be shown To create a temporal subset 1 Click on either the Start or End data boxes You can adjust the date by typing the new data or by clicking on the button If the 7 button is selected a calendar will appear 201 HYDAT Database September 2010 Figure 3 11 This calendar is used to change the start and end dates of a temporal subset 2 Click on the date to which you would like to change the start or end time e Click on 4Jor to adjust the month backward or forward or click on the calendar title to select a specific month e Click on the year and use the up and down arrows to change the year 3 To remove months from the data set click on the check box next to the month name on the Subset tab 4 Click the Reset button to include the entire data set 5 Select the pple button to apply your changes If you have selected any dates outside the range of data for the station the date will reset to the maximum for that parameter 202 Section 3 2 CDCD DATABASE September 2010 3 2 CDCD DATABASE
30. Multi attribute MapInfo Interchange and ArcView Shape files are treated as point set files within EnSim File Headers pt2 An example point set file 1s shown below it aE He At ae He FE E E TE HE aE AP FE a E TE a APE AE AE FE FE E TE aaa ae eae aa AE FE AE E TE TE TE AE AE AE AE EE E E ERE AE AE E E E E E E E E FileType pt2 ASCII EnSim 1 0 Canadian Hydraulics Centre National Research Council DataType Point Set it Application GreenKenue Version E MR WrittenBy Username CreationDate Fri it AttributeName 1 State Attributelnits 1 NONE AttributeName 2 Thickness Attributelnits 2 metres AttributeName 3 Volume Attributelnits 3 litres AttributeName 4 Radius Attributelnits 4 metres AttributeName 5 Volume Fraction sAttributeUnits 5 Percent it EndHeader 18871 LOBO 19521 18809 286 39940 LLA TAs S LOULO A333 IAAL H A3336 914433 22344 814453 943359 roAa 748047 erer H A H O OCT 135 2005 11 20 AM 43762e 006 28 s05 LELESFO06 27 s0 4956 006 25 LOSDE ND 29 0892 sd N64 1464 8996 30 aoe Al ADs 11971 LADY 8283 LOG c 1998 2003 2200892 sAr LLA 251464 270776 September 2010 Appendix A 18683 s394531 18606 166306 303281 18231 18491 777344 742188 S20 125 21950 2 l3 Sula 2236 x LAUG 228 516 Cale ail 1187150 871094 149329 134766 File Formats pt2 ASCII Point set files ne
31. Note If you remove the border from a rectangle rounded rectangle or ellipse its outline will disappear If you haven t given it a background colour you may have a hard time finding it again Note To change a view s background colour use the Display menu in its Properties dialog You can access that dialog through the Workspace or by activating the view within the report See the Display Properties section for the type of view you re changing for more information 1 5 9 4 Report View Window Page Setup Properties The page setup properties of the Report View window can be changed in the PageSetup tab of the view s Properties dialog box Properties of Report Yiew 7 Pages etup Recording Temporal Meta Data Medium Paper f Paper Printing C Image f Portrait Landscape Size Letter Printer Snapping 40 H Figure 1 31 This dialog lets you choose the format that the report will take The page setup properties that can be edited include Medium This can be either Paper Printing or Image If Paper Printing is active the Paper properties will be accessible If Image is active the Paper properties will be greyed out You can change the image resolution on the Recording tab of the Report s Properties dialog Paper This option is only available if the Medium is Paper Printing In this area you can select the orientation and paper size of the report The orientation can be either Portra
32. PALAIMCLETS aasa AA 219 boundaries ccce 319 CONSTANTS nccocsrsednceataersaaneaedices 317 ana KAKANAN GAANO 315 O TA ara 316 AA 319 output ee 321 SIMUIALION anas 316 16128 3A Lo AA niinn 219 Chanel aaa 223 CLG AMIS cies cacauresnenetes 223 editing BOU eE 225 segment cceeeeee 224 OPC NMS sensie 224 down boundary 226 simulation 219 RESUS amanda nasa 220 PUN type u s nak 220 temporal 2525 csncorsedescosectest 220 up boundary pasasaan ad 227 running simulation 234 G ODISE aa ees 60 E04 IL geen 60 GeoTIFF Uu 11 305 classification 130 draping onto a DEM 122 georeferencing 129 NC Olle e 4 SAVING naaa AA A NAA 16 Savile OS APP 270 EMAN aaa AG 305 Getting Help u eeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 333 Green Kenue Getting Started ccceeees l Green Kenue Uu l GRIB Files 0 eeeeee 305 loading multiple ee 305 Gridded Data extracting cross sections 123 H HBM Filles c aan 327 DOON pia 328 header oo aaa aaaaa aaa aaasasaassans 327 HBT TableSet Files 329 POOT m 330 header l aaa aasa sawsawan sssassans 329 HBV Parameter Set 323 body aanak 326 NG AA 323 PC aNG ees 135 237 algorithms ua 237 background saaan 237 Climate ZONES ccceeeseeeeeeeeceeees 238 MLC EY DCS aaa 323
33. Pota deyee EF Con Cosi 03565 8 tl Discharge vs Level Di ET e Cm M De Stat E Figure 2 41 This RCA has had several low flow values inactivated producing a well fitting curve September 2010 s10 x Level H Levell2FEOO7 Example 2 With complex examples 1t may be harder to find an appropriate rating curve W RatingCurveAnalysis 0360001 Discharge O How03BC001 s10 x Level H Level036C001 Figure 2 42 This RCA is far more complex than the previous example and has a correlation coefficient of 0 9529 172 Section 2 2 Hydrologic Tools September 2010 W RatingCurveAnalysis 0380001 s10 x Name Discharge O Flow03BC001 7 Level H Level036C001 Rehing urainak j Go 3 P 1 P Q CHHON HIN uy deyee 4 UU 4 perggt Stat 156010716 Jl TEIN F Figure 2 43 Examining the curve by year makes it clear that more than one rating curve exists Er BatingCurveAnalysis 0360001 Name Discharge 0 Flowl36CO01 RabngCureAnshan Riabing Curse O CHHOIN E Pob dr ee HE 3 ET Corr Cool 09957 Level H Level03B6C00 Discharge vs Level LOG Discharge vs LOG Level HO Has GE stat 10707718 Erd 1310778 m aqaa HH
34. Runtime Library To open the HY DAT MDB Database 1 From the menu bar select File Environmental Data Open HYDAT MDB Database 194 Section 3 1 HYDAT DATABASE September 2010 2 Browse to the location of the Hydat mdb file and click pen The window opens to the location of the Green Kenue program e g C Program Files CHC GreenKenue by default The HYDAT MDB Database is a multiattribute point set which can be displayed in a 2D view It contains points for each of the HYDAT measuring stations across Canada 3 1 3 Accessing Station Details Once the HYDAT object is in the WorkSpace you can access detailed information in several ways To access a selected station 1 Click on a station within a View as shown in Figure 3 3 All attributes of the selected station will be displayed Sthi gt O2KFOO5 StrName OTTAWA RIVER AT BRITANNI StnData Flow Level Conc Load Drainage 5t Lawrence River Prov ON B ear 1915 E fear 2000 parj F 5 805 45 365 Figure 3 3 The attributes of a station can be accessed in a view window 2 Right click on the selected object and select Load Selected from the shortcut menu or select File Environmental Data Open HYDAT Load Selected from the menu bar Station details as well as associated time series are then shown in the WorkSpace as children of the selected station WorkSpace Data Items o8 H DAT StnID E D2kF005 Ae Pe FlowO2kKFoos
35. The main tool bar gives quick access to some of the commands in the menus It can be toggled on or off using the Tool Bar command in the View menu To move the tool bar click on the tool bar with the mouse and drag it to the desired location E x Cae S FP El B aao Other tool bars exist for specific command functions For example there is an Animation tool bar for EnSim applications that have animation capabilities For more information on these tool bars see the information specific to the function 1 3 3 The T3 Mesh Editing Toolbar The T3 Mesh Toolbar makes available several mesh editing functions It can be turned on or off by selecting View gt T3 Mesh Toolbar from the menu bar Like the main Tool Bar it can be moved around by clicking and dragging on its handle For more information on the T3 Mesh Toolbar see Editing T3 Meshes on p 79 q x YA GRE fa PS x A A 1 3 4 Shortcut Menus Shortcut or context menus are available for most windows and objects by right clicking on the selected window or object Section 1 4 Data Items September 2010 1 4 DATA ITEMS The items listed under the category Data Items in the WorkSpace are referred to as objects The following is an image of a Green Kenue WorkSpace displaying various objects 1 e the Jock River watershed object the Rectangular Grid the Basin 8 boundary etc WorkSpace ER Data Items GB Jock River i EB Depressionless DEM E R
36. checkbox next to the attribute name to include it The optional choices are not recorded by default 222 Section 4 2 The GENID Interface September 2010 4 2 1 2 Channel Use this tab to specify the channel network that will be used for the simulation Properties of GEN1D x Simulation Channel Down Boundary Up Boundary Channel File ame Sample GENID Network 51 n3 E Display ColorScale Data Spatial Meta Data Rendering Al Style Visible Monochrome EE Styles Lines Solid bd Points Point 2 Line Width 3 Point Size OK Apply Cancel Figure 4 6 The Channel tab controls the appearance of the channel network e FileName Click the button to select the network file that describes the channel This file must be present to run a simulation See Networks n3s on p 296 for more information on network n3s files For more information on the property tabs for the channel object see Properties of Data Items under Data Items on p 17 4 2 1 2 1 Creating a Channel Object To create a new channel object 1 Click on _ in the Channel tab of the GEN1D Run dialog 2 Select a 3D line set or a network file that represents the channel that is to be modelled See Extracting Cross Sections from Gridded Data on p 123 or Extracting Cross Sections from Points and Line Data on p 124 for more information on creating a 3D Line Set
37. click on either of the Flag or the State to toggle the flag To change the Initial Soil Moisture values in the parameter file click on the index number or the value to edit the value To save changes to the Event file 1 With the Event file selected in the WorkSpace select File 5Save Copy As 2 Enter a file name and click _ ave If you changed the Event Name parameter in the Properties dialog the new name will be listed here as the default file name 2 3 3 WATFLOOD Output Watflood Binary Output wfo files can be opened in Green Kenue A Binary Output file will appear in the WorkSpace with various components displayed as children 189 Green Kenue September 2010 WorkSpace El Data Items 5 a H Ea i BA Lower Zone Storage ve Ed Grid Runoff ma til W Grid Ouflows pres Figure 2 61 A Watflood Binary Output file The Watflood Output file may have many more components than this example Possible components include Temperature Precipitation Grid Runoff Grid Outflow and Lower Zone Storage as well as Depression Storage Depression Storage Snow Snow Water Equivalent Snow Covered Area and Upper Zone Storage for each land use class Each component of the Watflood output file can be displayed in a 2D or 3D view Multiple components may be overlaid in a view Components of the output file such as Grid Outflow can be saved independently as single frame ASCII 2D rectangular cell files or as multi frame
38. in the ID view the units are distance along the line from the starting point of the line set For an XY data item the axes take on the units of each attribute represented in the graph The x axis and y axis the value axis are not labelled automatically as multiple time series that are not expressed in the same units may be displayed in the same ID View A label can be created by clicking the Ft button in the tool bar see Labels under View Decorations on p 59 for details The units of the data may be found in a popup window see Data Probes under Tools on p 83 or on the Data tab of the Properties dialog 1 5 4 2 The 1D View Window Status Bar The bottom of the EnSim application window provides information on the current window For an active 1D window with a time series the location of the cursor 1s displayed with respect to the time axis T and the value axis or y axis V For an active 1D window with a line set the location of the cursor is displayed with respect to the distance axis D and the value axis or y axis V Ready Date vs Value 1979 08 17 22 05 Wal 6 74155 ia ZA 35 EnSim Core September 2010 1 5 4 3 Manipulating the 1D View The view can be panned by dragging the mouse with the left mouse button depressed Zoom in by pressing the lt Ctrl gt key while dragging the mouse upwards or by moving the mouse wheel up if that option is available Zoom out by pressing the lt Ctrl gt key while dragging th
39. in the figure below two channels flow through the dark green cell One drains to the east and the other to the south In terms of element proportions 35 of the cell area drains into the channel flowing south and 65 of the cell area drains into the channel flowing east The drainage direction 1s assigned as east so the 35 of the green cell that drains south is added to the red cell which is south of the green cell This results in the drainage area of the green cell being 65 and the red cell 135 See Editing Watflood Map Data Attributes on p 183 for information on changing the drainage area of a cell Figure 2 52 The sum of the two cells drainage proportion is 200 This technique can also be applied in the case of modelling multiple watersheds when a cell is split between two basins e Drainage direction S This value indicates the direction of the majority of flow out of the cell Possible directions include North North East East South East South South West West North West or N A not applicable Not applicable is only applied to the cell containing the watershed outlet node By selecting the drainage direction as the current attribute the direction will be represented by an arrow in both the 2D and the 3D views The direction can also be viewed when drainage direction is not the current attribute by checking the Directions Visible check box on the Display tab of the Watflood Map s Properties dialog 180 Sect
40. nnna aana 328 The HBV EC HBT File 22222 329 File Header hbt aaa 329 File Format hbt 740x eed Pde cee AG oe abode se one do 330 X1X Green KenueSeptember 2010 XX 1 ENSIM CORE 1 1 A QUICK OVERVIEW 1 1 1 The EnSim Simulation Environment Developed at the Canadian Hydraulics Centre CHC EnSim was created to meet the needs of a wide range of environmental prediction and decision support systems EnSim is designed as an advanced numerical modelling environment as well as a general purpose data handling and visualisation system that can easily be adapted for any class of environmental data EnSim provides an ideal framework for the integration of environmental data GIS information and model data An EnSim application can be designed to run a simple numerical model or a suite of numerical models providing a variety of pre and post processing tools It is designed as a generic toolkit from which a system developer chooses components to create an application For the modeller EnSim creates a virtual environment where simulation results can be viewed animated and analyzed in one two and three dimensions This allows you to observe complex interactions of various phenomena in an intuitive manner providing a realistic view of simulation results Presentation of simulation results to non technical audiences can be greatly improved by providing seamless integration with other Windows applications such as word p
41. obtained from the Basin panel and cannot be edited e Aspect This variable shows the bearing of the Land Class in degrees with 0 indicating North 90 indicating East and so on All terrain within the class will be considered to have this bearing Ifthe value is inappropriate you can change this variable e Slope This is the Slope of the Land Class in degrees All terrain within the class will be considered to have this slope If the value is not appropriate you can change this variable e Initial Snow Solid This is the initial snow solid in millimetres This value represents the total liquid water content of the snow pack or the amount of water that would be obtained if the solid portion of the snow were completely melted The default value is 0 e Initial Snow Liquid This is the initial snow liquid water content which represents the amount of liquid water found within a sample of snow The default value is 0 e Initial Soil Moisture This is the initial moisture content of the soil as a proportion This variable is only listed for Open or Forest terrain The default value is 0 9 2 4 2 The Met Tab This tab describes the HBM file associated with a particular climate zone The HBM file contains meteorological information for a period of time including monthly average temperature and evaporation rate and daily rainfall snowfall and temperature measurements For more information on HBM files see The HBV EC HBM File
42. on p 327 The Met tab 1s broken down into five sections 257 The HBV EC Model September 2010 e Display The HBM file data may be displayed as a ID time series This panel controls the display settings of the data See Display Properties under Properties of Data Items on p 17 for more details Properties of new HBV EC Parameter Set x WaterShed Basin Simulation Climate Zone 1 Parameters Met Display Station Data Monthly Data Meta Data Name Bevation m 989 LocationX 119301 Location Y 52117 Ok Apply Cancel Figure 5 21 The Station data can be edited e Station This tab shows data from the header of the HBM file This data may all be edited on this panel e Name This is the name of the climate station e Elevation m This is the elevation of the climate station in metres This value is taken into account when calculating variations in rainfall snowfall or temperature as a result of altitude changes as determined by the Atmosphere parameters on the Parameters panel e Location X This is the horizontal location of the climate station This value is not used by the model since HBM files are assigned to climate zones and need not be located within the zone e Location Y This is the horizontal location of the climate station This value is also not used by the model e Data This tab shows the Start and End dates of the meteorological data as well as the total number of rec
43. points and lines by first triangulating this data To create a cross section or 3D polyline from points or line data 1 Open a line or point set into the WorkSpace 2 Create a new triangular mesh by using File New 3 Drag the line or point set onto the mesh 4 Open the Properties dialog and select the Triangulate button 5 See section Extracting Cross Sections from Gridded Data under How To Hints and Tricks on p 123 for further steps 1 7 4 Displaying Two Features of an Object Simultaneously Sometimes it is desirable to display a spatial object as a surface while retaining the lines of the grid or mesh or to display an object as filled contours while also showing the distinct isolines that define the contours It may also be desirable to display two data attributes of an object simultaneously These things are all done similarly What is desired is to display the object in two different display styles or in two different ways To do this the object must be opened in EnSim twice That is there must be two of the same object in the WorkSpace To display an object in N different ways it must appear in the WorkSpace N times Each object is then displayed as one of the desired types 124 Section 1 7 How To Hints and Tricks September 2010 WorkSpace ls Data Items 3 P2 Surface wireframe Eaz Views Elf 20 view 13 Wirefram ka Works pace a Ready Cartesian F
44. select the desired EnSim WorkSpace File and select the Ok button Section 1 3 The EnSim Interface September 2010 1 3 THE ENSIM INTERFACE The interface is customized for specific applications as necessary The basic graphical user interface consists of four main components a menu bar and a tool bar both for selecting various windows and EnSim functions a workspace for managing open data files and views and an area for various views 1 e 1D Polar 2D 3D Spherical and Report An example of the basic EnSim interface follows The title bar identifies this interface as being from WaveSim However most EnSim applications have the same basic interface and will look similar to this example Pyave5im 2D Yiew 1 q Ioj x File Edit View Tools Run Window Help x ohal S F B a l aaa WorkSpace E Data Items Views m 2D View 1 Works pace Ready Cartesian Figure 1 3 The EnSim interface window 1 3 1 The Menu Bar The menu bar consists of the standard Windows options File Edit View Tools Window and Help File Edit View Tools Window Help Commands in these menus that are specific to EnSim will be detailed in the appropriate sections Specific EnSim applications may contain other menus in the menu bar e g WaveSim EnSim Core September 2010 and OilSim have the Run option in their Menu Bars which contains commands related to running a simulation 1 3 2 The Tool Bar
45. 1 Watershed Objects September 2010 Generate Channels Generate Channels 2 Masimum drainage area on grid o2 km Channel headwater drainage area 10 lee Maximum drainage area on grid Channel headwater drainage area 1 k r Figure 2 12 As the drainage area decreases more channels are displayed within the watershed 2 1 3 3 3 Editing the Channels Before adjusting the channels their flow paths should be checked against real channels Import GIS data into EnSim that contains information about the rivers and streams in the watershed that is being modelled See Supported Foreign File Formats EnSim Core on p 304 for information about compatible file formats The channels should be adjusted if they differ significantly from the channels in the GIS data Since the channels are generated based on the DEM the DEM must be edited to alter the channels The DEM should be modified in such a way as to cause the surface water to flow along the proper path Remembering that water flows downhill the elevation at nodes of the DEM along the correct flow path of surface water must be lowered to encourage water to flow in that direction Also nodes of the DEM can be raised to prevent water from flowing in a certain direction Take care when altering areas of the DEM that are within the watershed boundary Usually the elevation does not need to be increased or decreased by much to redirect the flow path of water See Chec
46. 116 Section 1 6 Tools September 2010 Calculator xX Varables Start End A VELOCITY UV z Mas z 1 123 c foo Result Mame Time Units 3 cancel Figure 1 94 The calculator for gridded objects is considerably more complex e Variable Use this box to assign variable names A B C or D to data items currently in the WorkSpace These variable names are then used to form the equation in the Expression box In the list box next to the variable name a list of the available objects which match the geometry of the selected WorkSpace will appear For scalar data items you can choose the range of frames to which the operation will apply The range first frame to last frame is set in the Start and End boxes It is important to note that for a range setting larger than one frame the maximum range of frames selected is used as the template for all other ranges If a range is later selected that is less than the maximum range an error message will appear A range of one frame can be used Ifa scalar data item is selected a list box will appear The options available in the list box for a scalar object are Value X and Y For vector data items you can choose the range of frames in which the operation will apply The range first frame to last frame is set in the Start and End boxes Ifa vector data item is selected a list box will appear The options available in the list box for a vector item are Mag U V X and Y
47. 252671 2394006 12 916187 s933000 322419000 soo 000 47 651000 4 H O IT D DD O OY OY W O N UW N NAN ND DO OW WO O A CO O1N sI DD O DF 2 N O H 2 Nd W WB N HS Oo H 01 OY NO I O KO 12 11 11 10 9 14 12 O IL 15 Ji HID dg 11 13 15 la 14 T6 12 16 17 12 17 15 lo 13 13 O O AUAA O W WU N N N H H For more information on header keywords see File Headers on p 264 e NodeCount Required The total number of nodes in the mesh e ElementCount Required The total number of triangular elements in the mesh ElementType Optional Currently the default T3 is the only supported value Shows the type of finite element used in the mesh EnSim only creates triangular finite element meshes with three nodes per element called T3 meshes File Formats t3s t3v The data contained in a triangular mesh file is divided into two parts the first lists the coordinates and the values of the data attributes of each mesh point and the second part lists the node indices of the elements or the connectivity of the mesh ASCII Only files that contain non time varying data can be stored in ASCII format The coordinates and values of the mesh points are listed in order by node number The first set of coordinates on the first line of data applies to node 1 The second set on line 2 applies to node 2 and so on There is a coordinate and value set for each node of the mesh In the above 275 EnSim Core
48. 3 2 1 Introduction The Canadian Daily Climate Data CDCD contains daily temperature precipitation and snow on the ground data for almost 8000 locations in Canada Green Kenue provides a graphical interface to the CDCD database with which you can query display and analyze the data associated with each station 3 2 2 Accessing the Database The CDCD data can be accessed directory from the DVD or the directories can be copied to a local hard drive or to a network drive Green Kenue first looks for the CDCD 1 directory below the location of the GreenKenue exe file e g C Program Files CHC GreenKenue CDCD 1 then if not found the application searches all drive letters from C to Z and selects the first location containing the CDCD 1 directory as the locations of the database Note The files DATA 101 and INDEX 101 must be present in the NCDCDU directory To access the CDCD database 1 Select File Environmental Data Open CDCD from the menu bar 2 The CDCD stations can be accessed for all of Canada or by individual region Select one of the choices shown in Figure 3 12 Tee Open HYDAT MOB Database Open HYDAT CD b Open CDCD Canada KC E Northern Territories Alberta Saskatchewan Quebec Load Selected Station Search by ID Figure 3 12 This menu is used to access the CDCD database Once the selected data has been loaded the corresponding region becomes greyed out Additional selections inclu
49. 42 27 An excerpt of data from a ts5 file 1s shown below EndHeader 19977047 03 23 59 54 922 2722 192985 222 193712 222 193705 272 193791 722 194516 19914047404 00 59 54 922 222 191448 222 192171 22241927163 222 192237 222 192944 1997 04 04 01 59 54 922 222 190000 222 190734 222 190725 222 190809 222 191537 1997 04 04 02 59 54 922 222 189433 222 190151 222 190143 222 190219 222 190930 1997 04 04 03 59 54 922 222 188974 222 189712 222 189707 222 189793 222 190526 1997 04 04 04 59 54 922 222 188998 222 189740 222 189734 222 189813 222 190541 Binary There are no binary time series file formats 292 Appendix A September 2010 Tables tb0 Table objects contain data values organized in a tabular format The table columns represent data attributes and the rows represent the values at each attribute index Table objects display the table icon 77 in the WorkSpace The data of a table may or may not vary over time and is stored in an ASCII format using the file extension tb0 If the table data is associated with a start time and time step then each data attribute represents a time series and the table object as a whole can be seen as a collection of time series all with the same start time deltaT and point count The individual attributes can be extracted as time series objects by selecting Extract TimeSeries from the shortcut menu of the table object Select table data attributes may viewed in the 1D View window Tables
50. 72472 69 28333 47 71917 69 28389 aT Ar KA SS rr DAAQUAM RIVER EN AVAL DE LA RIVIERE SHIDGEL Disconti QC 46 5575 70 08111 MADAWASKA RIVIER EN AVAL DU BARRAGE TEMISCOUATA Discontinued QC 47 54833 68 63639 SAINT JOHN RIVER AT FORT KENT Active ME 47 25806 68 59583 ST FRANCIS RIVER AT OUTLET OF GLASIER LAKE Active NB 47 20661 68 95 SAINT JOHN RIVER AT EDMUNOSTON Active NG 47 3607 68 32489 MADAWASKA RIVIERE AU RESERVOIR TEMISCOUATA Active oc 47 57056 48 64306 LONG LAC PRES DE LES ETROITS Discontinued QC 47 39063 68 89533 OC 47 4644 89 00194 QC QC Figure 3 6 This HYDAT MDB Attribute Table is currently unfiltered 196 Section 3 1 HYDAT DATABASE September 2010 2 Enter or select the restrictions from each of the available fields that apply to the subset of stations that you d like to examine Note that some fields may be empty for some records searching for any specific value will not return records that contain no value for that field e Station Number This is a seven character alphanumeric code that uniquely identifies each station The code follows the format XX where represents a digit and X is a letter The search string matches only the beginning of each code and does not use wildcards e Station Name This search field looks for the appearance of the provided text anywhere within the Station Name field of the database For example searching for the word Brook will restrict the
51. 763 Node 9 2 e 9 244 750 Node 10 1 9 244 732 Node LL 1 10 246 676 e SegmentAttributeName Gives the name of an attribute possessed by a segment of the network e SegmentAttributeType Gives the variable type such as integer text and so on for an attribute possessed by a segment of the network e SegmentAttributeUnits Gives the units for an attribute possessed by a segment of the network e NodeAttributeName Gives the name of an attribute possessed by a node e NodeAttributeType Gives the variable type for an attribute possessed by a node e NodeAttributeUnits Gives the units for an attribute possessed by a node e Segment Identifies the beginning of data pertaining to a segment of the network e EndSegment Identifies the end of data pertaining to a segment of the network e Node Identifies the list of segments that connect at a particular node File Formats n3s ASCII Data that does not vary with time is stored in ASCII format The file excerpt above is an example of an ASCII network file The data is divided into two sections The first lists the values of the data attributes associated with each segment as well as the x y and 297 EnSim Core September 2010 z coordinates of each point that makes up a segment The second part lists how many segments of the network meet at each node which segments connect and the order in which they are connected In the first section of the file the start
52. 847 000000 29 059999 0 19637 07721 007001007000 841 000000 29 049999 O 19637 07722 00 00 00 0000 813000000 29 000000 0 Binary Because they do not vary over time there is no binary file format for RCA files 314 Appendix D September 2010 APPENDIX D FILE TYPES OF GEN1D The GEN1D Parameter File The GENID parameter file g1d is the only native file type for this model within Green Kenue This parameter file controls all aspects of a GENID simulation File Header g1d The header of a GENID parameter file consists of only the general EnSim Header shown below For an explanation of the keywords used see File Headers on p 264 iat ae a aE ae aE ae He AE Ae eA Ae EA Hee A AE EA AE EAE aa aa aaa aaa EE EEE aa aaa FileType gld ASCII DataType GENID Parameter Set it Application GreenKenue Version Suche WrittenBy Username CreationDate Fri Apr 15 2005 11420 AM a AA AA AA AA AA P EE E EE E E File Format g1d The contents of an example GENID parameter file are shown below Simulation EnSim 1 0 Canadian Hydraulics Centre National Research Council NAME GENIDSIM RUN TYPE RUN DEITA T 0200210 000 SIMULATION TIME 32093800 VARY DELTA I TRUE COURANT 1 000000 S VISCOSI TY TODO Input Files CHANNEL NETWORK FILE GENI1D Example n3s DOWN BOUNDARY NODE ID 1 DOWN BOUNDARY TYPE FREE FLOW DOWN BOUNDARY VALUE 0 000000 UP BOUNDARY NOD
53. AA a AA AA ee ee E it Name Jock River Grid Title Jock River Grid it Projection Cartesian Ellipsoid Unknown it XxOr1gin 407 77 78 859400 syOrigin 4975883 000000 AttributeName 1 Elevation 270 Appendix A September 2010 AttributeUnits 1 m xCount 100 YCOUNT 100 xDelta 400 000000 yDelta 400 000000 Angle 0 000000 EndHeader Note The header for a binary file such as one containing data that varies over time is similar except that the third field in the Filetype record is BINARY instead of AscI1 If the file contains vector data the FileType will be listed as r2v and the DataType as 2D Rect Vector For more information on header keywords see File Headers on p 264 e xOrigin Optional This is the x coordinate of the point in the bottom left corner of the grid The default value is 0 e yOrigin Optional This is the y coordinate of the point in the bottom left corner of the grid The default value is 0 e xCount Required The number of points or vertices in each row of the grid along the x direction e yCount Required The number of points or vertices in each column of the grid along the y direction e xDelta Required The distance between two adjacent points in a row e yDelta Required The distance between two adjacent points in a column e Angle Optional The clockwise angle of rotation in degrees of the grid about the origin or bottom left
54. Application such as Green Kenue Blue Kenue or WaveSim with which the file was created e Version Optional This gives the version of the EnSim Application with which the file was created e WrittenBy Optional This is the username assigned to the computer workstation or account with which the file was created e CreationDate Optional This is the date and time at which the file was last altered Other keywords that are not specific to a particular file type and are included below the dashed line of the header include 264 Appendix A September 2010 Name Optional The default 1s the root of the filename It is the name of the object that is displayed in the WorkSpace The entry may be changed directly in the file header or by editing the Name field of the MetaData tab of the object s Properties dialog Note If you save an object using the Save As command the Name keyword will be stripped from the file When the file is loaded the Name field on the MetaData tab will be set to the file name of the object Title Optional The default for this keyword is the full file path of the file The entry for this keyword is displayed in the title bar of the object s Properties dialog Projection Optional The coordinate system of the data Valid values are e Cartesian Cartesian coordinates e LatLong Latitude Longitude coordinates Must appear with the Ellipsoid keyword e utmM UTM coordinates
55. Flight Path Properties The Properties dialog of a flight path can be accessed through its shortcut menu or by double clicking on its name in the WorkSpace Properties of new Flight Path i x Display Spatial Meta Data Control Points EH Delete Insert Replace Rendering ff Visible Animate Wo Show Labels 11 Font Size 2 Line Width EH Point Size Path Length 100 W Jump To Selection Cancel Figure 1 41 This flight path has seven control points Rendering This area controls the appearance of the flight path The Visible and Animate checkboxes may also be toggled through the flight path s shortcut menu Path Length This value determines the number of steps used to travel along the flight path The greater the number entered the more slowly the path will be animated Tip To slow down the animation while keeping the movement smooth increase both the Path Length and the Frame Rate The Frame Rate can be found on the View s Temporal Properties tab Control Points This area lists each control point used to construct the flight path You can examine a control point by checking Jump To Selection and clicking on the point name Add This button adds the current perspective to the end of the flight path Delete This button removes the currently selected control point Insert This button adds the current perspective to the flight path above the currently selected control point
56. GRS80 NAD83 6 378 137 0 1 0 298 257222101 Clarke1866 NAD27 6 378 206 4 1 0 294 9786982 6 371 000 0 0 0 perfect sphere The cause of misaligned data within a view is most likely non matching ellipsoids For example overlaying NAD27 and NAD83 spatial data may produce an offset of up to 200 metres If the projection and or the ellipsoid are undefined EnSim assumes that the data will use the default Cartesian coordinate system With respect to LatLong projected data there may be some confusion with regards to the defined ellipsoid EnSim expects the LatLong data object 28 Section 1 4 Data Items September 2010 to have an ellipsoid datum assigned The sphere is a valid ellipsoid Software packages such as MapInfo and ESRI s ArcInfo ArcView act differently when loading LatLong data with undefined ellipsoids ESRI assumes the data is mapped to a sphere while MapInfo leaves it undefined With MapInfo you should be aware that reprojecting LatLong data with an undefined ellipsoid to a coordinate system with a known ellipsoid simply assigns the ellipsoid 1 e LatLong data with an undefined ellipsoid projected to LatLong with the NAD83 ellipsoid assigns the ellipsoid to NAD83 It is important to know the source ellipsoid of your imported data even if it is not identified in the header of the file and assign it within EnSim Note EnSim does NOT perform datum conversion e g from NAD27 to NAD83 1 4 3 4 6 Selecting a Coordina
57. Legend Options 104 to O06 Title TRACER 0 02 to 0 04 Subtitle Below 0 02 Decorations Font W Border Arial E colour x 522 width E Coor l z Italics Colors cale Data Spatial Meta Data M Background Bold E Colour Labels M Use Range Labels to Separator Above Above Below Below Underline Scale Parameters O12 Colour Interpolation HS TY 0 1 00g Linear Levels 0 06 Res 014 Interval 0 04 0 02 Default a sali Floating Point Reset Exponential _ Reset LT Digits 3 3 MW ShowLegend Options Lance JE Apply Cancel Figure 1 33 The Colour Scale Legend Options dialog of a 2D view The Properties dialog is shown to its right The colour scale legend properties that can be edited are as follows e Title Subtitle Both titles are shown at the same font size with the subtitle appearing below the title The title text is not wrapped and the legend width is sized accordingly e Decorations This determines the appearance of the colour scale legend Border and Background The Colour and Width of the border and the Colour of the background can be changed e Number Format This determines the appearance of the colour level numbers An option button selects between Default Floating Point or Exponential formats The number of Digits after the decimal place can be defined for floating point and exponential formats e Labels This determines t
58. Line or Lines will be redrawn ensuring that the distance between each point does not exceed the Delta distance entered Beginning at the first point on the 2D or 3D Line if the distance from one point to the next is greater than the Delta value a new point is inserted at the Delta distance This procedure is repeated along the entire path of the 2D or 3D Line e Equal Distance If this method is chosen the 2D or 3D Line or Lines will be redrawn with the equal Delta distance between each points Note The greater the Delta value the greater the change in the shape will be from that of the original line 8 1 EnSim Core September 2010 e Segment Count If this method is chosen you will be prompted to enter a Count value instead of a Delta The lines will be redrawn divided into Count segments that is the number of nodes including the end points will be equal to Count 1 3 Once the resample options have been chosen click DE If the Create New LineSet box 1s checked a new lineset will be created and added as a child under the source lineset in the workspace The source lineset will remain unmodified If the Create New LineSet box is unchecked the source lineset will be overwritten with the changes 1 6 3 6 Shifting Data Objects Many data objects can be relocated or shifted changing their location Objects that can be shifted include e Point Sets pt2 xyz pcl e Lines and Line Sets 12s 13s e Meshes t3s
59. Probing Data 0a 82 1 6 4 1 DataProbes 0 0 aala 83 e To probe data magmamana amMEMSAEDULA MANG TB DA LAMAMGNEA DAG Gd 83 1 6 4 2 The Live Cursor 2 aaa 85 1 6 4 2 1 The Live Stream Lines Cursor aa 86 e To save stream lines aaa 87 TOAS TNE RUE rucresripadierr wom we de eee ed EE hh aa ha 87 1 6 4 4 Computing Areas and Volumes AA 88 e TO compute an area eee 88 e To compute a volume 0 0 0 0 ee eee 89 1 6 5 Extracting Data a 89 1 6 5 1 Extracting Surfaces aa 90 1 6 5 1 1 Extracting Temporal Statistics 90 e To extract temporal statistics as a surface 90 1 6 5 1 2 Extracting Slopes 0 a 91 1 6 5 1 3 Extracting Aspects lt 22 12e egeuerudgeddewsaeesede NG 92 1 6 5 1 4 Extracting Curvatures 0 0 0 0 a 93 1 6 5 2 Extracting Residuals 0 0 0 ce ees 95 1 6 5 3 Extracting Isolines a 95 e To extract an isoline aa 95 1 06 04 JEXIracling PANG 24cheientandlhesseee hed ee eseeesd bebe ex 95 1O CxWact a path cca aha DE o eee ai ofa ee Beek oe Boo ees 96 16 9 9 Exiracing PONDS 2 seckencaewsetaeuerebences caw set ou doe 96 e To extract points from a data item a 96 1 6 5 6 Extracting Time Series a 96 e To extract a time series tee 96 1 6 5 7 Extracting a Velocity Ros
60. Replace This button changes the currently selected control point to the current perspective 1 5 14 Synchronizing Two Views The ability to synchronize two views is a very useful feature in EnSim This feature allows you to observe the value of a specific point over time within a multidimensional View An example of this might be the synchronization of an animated data item in a 2D View Source View with a time series extracted from a selected point of the animated data item Result View Currently 1D Views can receive synchronization from 2D 3D or Spherical Views 63 EnSim Core September 2010 To synchronize Views 1 Load a temporal data item into the WorkSpace 2 Select a point on the data item and extract the time series from the selected point See Extracting Time Series under Extracting Data on p 96 for more details 3 Drag the extracted time series into a 1D View the Result View 4 Ensure that the ID view is the current view Select the View Select Sync View option The following dialog will appear Select which IEW will provide syncronizatio Cancel Figure 1 42 This dialog is used to synchronize two views 5 Select the View that will provide the synchronization Source View and press the DE button 6 Animate an object in the Source View Refer to Animation under Views on p 61 for more details on animating a data item A vertical red line will appear in the Result View While the Sour
61. STEADY STATE e CAL FRICTION NODE ID Optional Type integer Valid Values between 0 and the maximum number of nodes Default none Description records the node location of the measured node for a run type of RUN CAL FRICTION e CAL FRICTION NODE LEVEL Optional Type floating point Valid Values greater than 0 Default none Description Records the water level of the node identified in CAL FRICTION NODE ID fora RUN CAL FRICTION run type e CAL FRICTION MIN STRICKLER Optional Type floating point Valid Values greater than 0 Default 10 Description the estimated lower limit of possible Strickler values for a RUN CAL FRICTION run e CAL FRICTION MAX STRICKLER Optional Type floating point Valid Values greater than 0 Default 50 Description the estimated upper limit of possible Strickler values for a RUN CAL FRICTION run e RATING CURVE NODE ID Optional Type integer Valid Values between 0 and the maximum number of nodes Default none Description records the node location to be monitored to generate the rating curve in a run type RUN GEN RATING CURVE e RATING CURVE DISCHARGE START Optional 318 Appendix D September 2010 Type floating point Valid Values greater than 0 Default 2 000000 Description Records the initial discharge value at which the rating curve 1s generated e RATING CURVE DISCHARGE DELTA Optional Type floating point Valid Val
62. September 2010 example there are 17 entries since the NodeCount keyword has a value of 17 The first number on a line is the x coordinate the second number is the y coordinate and the third and following numbers are the values of the data attributes In the example node 1 has coordinates of 7 855000 57 107000 and has a single value of 14 this is a single attribute file Scalar data has one or more values following the coordinates Each value represents an attribute Vector data has two data values following the coordinates The first 1s the x component of the vector and the second is the y component The connectivity of the mesh is listed below the coordinate and value data Each line in the connectivity section lists the node numbers of the nodes that comprise the vertices of a single triangular element Each element is listed on a separate line In the example there are 24 elements and hence 24 lines of data The format of a triangular mesh file is slightly stricter than that of a rectangular grid The information for each node or element must begin on a new line and there cannot be any blank lines between nodes or elements Optionally there may be a blank line between the list of coordinates and the list of element nodes All of the information for a particular line or element must appear on the same line but there may be any number of spaces between values on a particular line Binary Both time varying and non time varying
63. September 2010 x AN Area of mesh BOTTOM is 2490892 984375 Figure 1 67 This mesh has an area of just over 2 49 km To compute a volume 1 Select the data object in the WorkSpace or the View 2 From the menu bar select Tools gt Compute Volume The total displacement of the selected data object will be given in a message window The window includes both positive 1 e all points with a value above zero and negative points below zero displacements as well as the net sum x Total Volume of mesh BottomElevation is 30940893539 587433 Positive 29313438 533810 Negative 30970206978 121216 Figure 1 68 This bathymetric mesh has a net negative displacement 1 6 5 Extracting Data Data extraction tools allow you to retrieve all data satisfying a particular criterion from an object in the WorkSpace Take for example a triangular mesh object that has time varying data There is a new value at each node of the mesh for each time step To retrieve the maximum value at each of these nodes the Extract Surfaces tool can be used By choosing the Temporal Maximums option the maximum value in the time series at each node of the mesh is extracted Data extraction tools also allow you to define isolines to extract point values from a defined area within an object or to calculate the residual vector from a mesh of time varying vectors There are ten data extraction tools available in Kenue each of which is describ
64. The Compass under View Decorations on p 58 e Persistent Popups Extended Popup Info Show Probes These control the view s data probes See the section on Data Probes under Tools on p 83 e Show Grid When this checkbox is turned off the lines of the grid are removed but the coordinates remain visible This is useful when viewing gridded data The grid of the 2D View can sometimes overlap with the lines of the object causing the lines to be hidden e Lock View When toggled on the ability to pan the view or zoom in or out will be disabled View decoration objects can still be moved When the view is locked the green padlock in the bottom right hand corner of the EnSim window turns red g e Xand Y These are the current extents of the view along the respective axes e Labels This toggles the grid coordinate labels e Colour This is a colour selector not a checkbox By clicking on the coloured square a dialog appears allowing you to choose a colour for the gridlines and the grid coordinates e Label Size This controls the size of the numbers along the axes The values represent the percentage of the view window size 42 Section 1 5 Views September 2010 e Divisions Hint Enter the number of grid divisions to be displayed in the horizontal direction The maximum number of divisions that can be entered here is 8 As the number of divisions is dependent on the size of the window and the data displayed this parameter 1s
65. The path is calculated at the position of the mouse cursor and is automatically updated as the cursor is moved over the select data object in a 2D view The options for the live stream lines cursor may be changed in the Tools tab of the 2D view s Properties dialog box Properties of 7D Yiew 1 X Display Recording Spatial Temporal Tools Meta Data Live Cursor W Enable Stream Lines Time5tep 4 PointCount Figure 1 63 The Tools tab contains the live stream lines cursor options e Enable Stream Lines Checking this box enables stream lines Unchecking the box enables the general live cursor see above The Live Cursor under Tools on p 85 e TimeStep The timestep used for calculating each point of the flow path e PointCount The maximum number of points within the calculated flow path 86 Section 1 6 Tools September 2010 Note For a vector grid or mesh with units of m s a TimeStep of 4 and a PointCount of 60 would compute a projected flow path over 240 seconds 4 times 60 using the velocities of the current frame To use the live stream lines cursor ensure that the desired vector data object is selected and the Stream Lines are enabled then click on the button in the tool bar Once the cursor is placed in the view a projected flow path will be computed and displayed As the cursor 1s moved the projected flow path will be automatically updated To turn off the live stream lines cursor pre
66. This keyword indicates the terrain type of the described class It may be Open Forest Glacier Or Lake e Area Required This keyword indicates the total area in square kilometers described by the given table and its nested tables e LandArea Required for Watershed Zone or Band tables This keyword indicates the total area in square kilometers of the land found within the given watershed climate zone or elevation band This is the sum of the Open and Forest terrain types e LakeArea Required for Watershed Zone or Band tables This keyword indicates the total area in square kilometers of lake found within the given watershed climate zone or elevation band Note that Lake terrain always has a slope and aspect of zero so all lake terrain found within a given elevation band is contained in a single Class table e GlacierArea Required for Watershed Zone or Band tables This keyword indicates the total area in square kilometers of glacier found within the given watershed climate zone or elevation band e Elevation Required for Band Or Class level tables This keyword indicates the elevation in metres of the described terrain e ColumnMetaData Required This keyword marks the start of the metadata information for the body of the file e ColumnName ColumnUnits ColumnType Required These keywords are followed by the Names Units and Types respectively of each of the columns that appear in
67. This option estimates the low flow by linearly interpolating between the nearest known lower drainage area and stream flow and the nearest known higher drainage area and stream flow Interpolate Average Slope This option estimates the stream flow along the channel by generating an average low flow versus average drainage area ratio Note Only one station is required for these calculations as all interpolation lines are drawn through the point where drainage area and low flow are equal to zero To add a computed flow station l 2 Drag the Channels object into a view With the Properties dialog open click on the Channels object within the view to identify the location of a flow station Select the dd button from the Stations area of the Known Flow tab e The station name will appear under the Name column To change the name of the station click on the name and edit the text e The Drainage Area will be calculated from the station and appear in the Drainage Area column The flow will be calculated from the known flow stations and appear in the flow column of the dialog 163 Green Kenue September 2010 5 Select the Apply button To remove a known flow station 1 Click on the station on the Computed Flow tab of the Properties dialog 2 Click Remove 2 2 1 15 Slope Analysis The Slope Analysis tool allows for the estimation of average slope along a user selected section of the channel To launch
68. View draw the new points See Drawing Points on p 68 for more information 4 When you re finished hit lt Esc gt or click on the tool bar To delete a point e Select the point or node to be deleted and select Delete Selected Point from the shortcut menu or Edit gt LineSet Delete Selected Point from the menu bar 75 EnSim Core September 2010 1 6 3 3 Editing Lines To edit the value of a line 1 Within the View double click on the segment of the line set that you d like to edit The segment will turn magenta to indicate that it has been selected 2 Select Edit Line Set Edit from the menu bar or Edit from the shortcut menu Editting the selected Lime Please specify the new value Cancel 22 Figure 1 53 The value of the selected line is being changed to 22 3 Enter the the value for the line and click Ok To edit the location of a point within a line set 1 Select the point or node to be edited and select Edit Selected Point from the shortcut menu or Edit LineSet Edit Selected Point from the menu bar This edit option will only appear when a polyline has been selected The dialog box that appears 1s similar to the dialog box that appears when a triangular mesh or an xyz data item has been selected The difference with this box is that the attribute cannot be changed An example is shown below Please specify new values for the location of the selected point o C
69. Watflood Map File on p 175 Green Kenue automatically calculates most of the data attributes based on the watershed object Land use data 1s not calculated automatically and must be added manually The default data attributes for the Watflood Map can be edited 2 3 1 4 1 Description of Data Attributes The physiographic data required by the WATFLOOD hydrological model are as follows e Channel elevation ELV This is the elevation at the midpoint of the main channel within a cell Note that for multiple basins with different watershed outlets the elevation at the outlet cells must be equal Green Kenue forces all outlet cell elevations to be equal to the lowest outlet cell elevation e Drainage area FRAC This is the percentage of the area of a cell within the watershed boundary that flows in the indicated drainage direction see Drainage Direction below Green Kenue will assign a drainage area of 100 to all cells within the basin outline Essentially the entire land area of the cell 1s considered to flow in the stated drainage direction Cells that lie on the basin boundary will be assigned a percentage based on the area of the cell that is included within the basin boundary 179 Green Kenue September 2010 The drainage area of a cell can be greater than or less than 100 This accounts for cells that have multiple channels that drain into different cells Adjustment of the drainage area of cells must be done manually For example
70. a channels object and the upstream and downstream boundary nodes The network object consists of both channel segments and nodes The nodes are a series of points that link the segments to one another Although the Z component of the node is usually set to the level of the channel bottom for a node this value is only used to assist in visualization The model uses the cross sections of the adjacent segments to determine the level of the channel bottom at a node The segment is defined as the channel reach between two nodes and is associated with a single cross section object The cross section associated with a segment applies to the entire length of the segment 2151 x KN Nodes F Segment hiz Cr055 5Eectons Figure 4 1 The network object is shown in black while the cross section object is shown in blue 216 Section 4 1 General Background September 2010 For additional information on cross sections see Channel under Setting Up Simulation Parameters on p 223 As shown in Figure 4 2 the cross section is used to determine the cross sectional parameters cross sectional area channel width and elevation The average water elevation between end nodes of a segment is the elevation used to calculate the cross section parameters for that segment Maximum Channel Width Water Elevation Minimum Fleyaton Figure 4 2 The parameters of the channel at the cross sec
71. a view to a report In the Workspace click on the view that you would like to add Drag the view down to the title of the report just as if you were adding a data item to a regular view Note that the view will now be contained only within the report To manipulate a view that has been added to a report 1 Select the view within the report window by double clicking on it The report will be shown with a dashed magenta outline 2 Double click on the view again or select Activate from its shortcut menu An activated view will appear with a raised outline and can be manipulated as 1f it were a regular view window See the section for the type of view you re manipulating for more information To change the order of objects in the report Objects in the report window are shown with the most recently added objects on top To reorder them select the object you would like to move and select Order from its shortcut menu e Bring to Front The object will appear on top of any other objects in the report e Send to Back The object will appear beneath any other objects in the report e Bring Forward The object will be raised one position e Send Backward The object will be lowered one position To change the border around an object in the report Any object in the report view can be displayed with or without a border To remove or change an object s border select Properties from its shortcut menu S1 EnSim Core September 2010
72. aaa 193 3 1 2 Accessing the Database 0 AA 193 3 1 2 1 The HYDAT Database CD 006 193 e To access the HYDAT database CD AA 193 3 1 2 2 The HYDAT MDB Database 05 194 e To open the HYDAT MDB Database 0 194 3 1 3 Accessing Station Details 0 0 0 0 0 000000 ee 195 e To access a selected station 0 0 aaa eee 195 e To access a station by ID a 196 3 1 4 Filtering Station Details 0 0 0 0 cee eee 196 e To filter the HYDAT MDB Database 0 196 3 1 5 Properties of aHYDAT Station 0 198 Sled PES sere riera ier ee yu AA AA 198 Sisa TYVOEK nna an bA pee tae dae oto oe EDNA AAEWA NGA 199 3 1 5 3 Mela DAA 6 6 645 oe 25 N MAAGA KANA Raw wow GWA eee a WAW GA 200 3 1 6 Properties of Associated Time Series 201 3 1 6 1 Subset aaa 201 e To create a temporal subset naaa 201 3 2 CDCD DATABASE 4 4544 REAG NG NAG AANAAAAAKA obese oan Ss 203 3 1 ANKOQUCUON si saan DA eave KG NAGKAANAK NENA DW KA RG wads 203 3 2 2 Accessing the Database 0 0 cc ee 203 e To access the CDCD database 0 0 cee ees 203 3 2 3 Accessing Station Details 0 0 0 AA 204 e To access a selected station nnana aaa ee 204 e To access a station by ID 0 a 205 3 2 4 Prope
73. aaa ee 113 HALING achliaiscactesneaadivunioaetuieiuetemaeaiacs 10 PROPCHICS sarcir inisenisi 17 removing other objects from 5 Ka te ee er oe 6 SAN 0 ee ee 11 16 Data Objects See Data items Data Probes areas and volumes 88 UVO OUISOI serenor e 85 live stream lines cursor 86 POPOD saa AA 83 PULE re E 87 selection O serenan 84 Data Extracting See Extracting Data Datums See Ellipsoids Decorations AGA 53 COCK cn ANAN E 58 KONDI aa NGA 58 QO ANA TANGA AAO 4 332 September 2010 NAGS ee ma AG 59 Fes AA 54 IB Hii KIA AA APAPAP 304 checking and editing 141 in watersheds 140 Depression Fill 111111111 153 Downstream Reach 158 Drainage Area cccccceeeeeeees 152 Drainage Area Ratio Analysis 161 computed flow eeeeeeeeeeeeee 163 Drainage Directions 151 E Editing Attribute Tables PX ACTING serie nT 100 ALPCIDUUCS maa Aa 73 AG AAO NAGA 76 points ua 75 resampling data 80 shifting data objects 82 L E iR 79 time series sisman conei 104 Ellipsoids 111 1 111 aa 28 EnSim a AA R 2 applications ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees CONVENTIONS chasoticccsshosveeaveisseanamees 4 Equations CONN samba ARA 215 KOTO nada mann ences 215 Navier Stokes 215 Extracting Data eee 89 ONG maana ANN nae sana AGO 95 meshes accnadicasdsd
74. ability to move data items within the view will be disabled View decoration objects can still be moved When the view is locked the green padlock in the bottom right hand corner of the EnSim window turns red e Rotate and Translate control the movement of the viewing area as described previously See Manipulating the Spherical View on p 47 for more details e X Y and Z extents Near Far and Field of View behave as described previously in this section See Manipulating the Spherical View on p 47 for more details 48 Section 1 5 Views September 2010 1 5 9 The Report View Window The report view window allows you to display several views at once and to synchronize several animated views The report view also lets you prepare one or more views for printing while including legends headers or other formatting objects Unlike other views the report view does not display data items Instead other types of views can be dragged onto and displayed within a report view A new report view window can be opened by pressing the button or by selecting Window New Report View You can open an already formatted report template by selecting Window gt Load Template See Report View Templates on p 53 for more information Figure 1 30 The report view can contain other views as well as decorations 1 5 9 1 The Report View Window Status Bar The bottom of the EnSim window provides information on the open window If
75. as a tributary entering the main channel The boundary nodes are defined as the end nodes of the network object For additional information on boundaries see the sections Down Boundary on p 226 and Up Boundary on p 227 218 Section 4 2 The GENID Interface September 2010 4 2 THE GEN1D INTERFACE 4 2 1 Setting Up Simulation Parameters The parameters for running a GEN1D simulation are contained within the GEN1D Parameter Set file gld For more information about this file see Appendix D on p 315 This file is created from the GEN1DParamSet object To create a new simulation parameter set select File New gt GEN1D Run from the menu bar An empty object called NewGEN1DRun will appear in the WorkSpace WorkSpace Data Items B B NewSEN1DRun AY Channels GA Down Boundary an GA Up Boundary Cal ki ane os ol E m m5 Ju m B Figure 4 3 Anew GENID Run appears in the WorkSpace with several empty components All data and parameters pertaining to the new simulation are specified through the Properties dialog of the NewGENIDRun object The Properties dialog appears when the NewGEN1DRun object is created or it can be opened by double clicking on the object in the WorkSpace The Properties dialog has four tabs e Simulation e Channel e Down Boundary e Up Boundary 4 2 1 1 Simulation The Simulation tab is used to manage parameters regarding the overall simulation
76. chosen the direction component of the selected time series will be used in the expression e Expression This box allows you to enter a mathematical expression to calculate a new data item This can include the data items chosen in the Variable boxes as well as constants The mathematical operators available are listed in The Calculator Expressions on p 120 The Expression box also stores previously used expressions from the current session of EnSim Once the expression has been evaluated the parsed expression will appear in the text box below the Expression box e Result The name of the resulting time series can be entered in the Name box and its units may be entered in the Units box Note that changing the units of a time series will not perform a conversion The Units entry is for reference purposes only 119 EnSim Core Once the parameters are chosen and the expression is completed click on the Evaluate button to create the new time series The new data object will appear in the WorkSpace and the expression will be displayed in the text box If the calculation is valid and a name has been provided the calculator dialog will close 1 6 9 4 Both the gridded object calculator and the time series calculator use the same mathematical The Calculator Expressions expression set The mathematical operators are 120 arithmetic operators plus minus multiply divide exponentiation chs change sign
77. corner The default is 0 Data Organization r2s r2v The ordering of points on a rectangular grid begins at the bottom left southwest corner of the grid and proceeds to the right along the bottom row When the end of the row is reached the numbering resumes at the left end of the next row up The diagram below shows a simple r2s grid Figure A 2 The points of this grid are numbered sequentially left to right and bottom to top 271 EnSim Core September 2010 Keywords in the header are used to indicate the coordinates of the origin of the grid the spacing between the vertices the number of points in the x and y directions of the grid and the angle of the grid From this information the coordinates of each point on the grid are determined File Formats r2s r2v The file format refers to the organization of data that is contained in the file after the EndHeader keyword that is after the entire file header ASCII Only non time varying data can be stored in ASCII format Data values are recorded in free format This means that any number of spaces tabs or line returns may separate individual values The first value in the data set corresponds to the first point of the grid the second value to the second point and so on The data is read until a value is obtained for each grid point so the number of values in the file must correspond to the total number of vertices in the grid xcount yCount If there are more va
78. data item from Data Items has the effect of removing or closing the object from the application e Removing data items from a view Data items can be removed from a view by selecting the data item within the list of views and using the lt Delete gt key by selecting Remove in the data item s shortcut menu or by selecting Edit 5Remove from the menu bar e Viewing an Object s properties Double clicking on an object opens its Properties dialog The Properties dialog of a selected object can also be accessed from the Edit menu or the object s shortcut menu e Viewing an object s shortcut menu Right clicking on an object displays its shortcut menu EnSim Core September 2010 e Renaming an object After opening the Properties dialog select the Meta Data tab and change the text in the Title or Name fields The Title field will change the name of the object at the top of the Properties dialog box while the Name field will change the name of the object in the WorkSpace data probes and the automatic title of the colour scale legend 1 2 2 Saving and Loading The WorkSpace EnSim allows you to save the current state of the WorkSpace to an EnSim WorkSpace File ews The EnSim WorkSpace File contains all the data item settings including colour scales legend options scaling rendering options line width point size and so on for all currently opened objects As well as saving data item settings it also saves the settings for all th
79. database to recording stations whose names contain the word Brook as well as those containing Sherbrooke Cranbrook or Brookmere e Province This drop down list allows you to search for recording stations located within a single province Note that several U S border states also contain recording stations and can be searched with this field The complete list consists of e AB Alberta e BC British Columbia e MB Manitoba e NB New Brunswick e NL Newfoundland and Labrador e NS Nova Scotia e NT Northwest Territories e NU Nunavut e ON Ontario e PE Prince Edward Island e QC Quebec e SK Saskatchewan e YT Yukon Territory e ME Maine e MN Minnesota e MT Montana e ND North Dakota e AK Alaska e WA Washington ID Idaho e Hyd Status This field may be either Active or Discontinued 197 HYDAT Database September 2010 Regulation This field may be either Regulated or Natural Oper Sched This field short for Operating Schedule may be either Continuous Miscellaneous or Seasonal Data Period This field allows you to set a date range Applying the filter will return all records that contain at least some data falling within the given range Total Years This field consists of a drop down list and a text box From the list select lt less than or equal to or gt greater than or equal to In the text box enter a number The filter will return all records that contain data from at most or at least t
80. digital elevation map grid in the format of a regular or rectangular grid that describes the topography of the land e a network that describes the path of the flow of surface water through the watershed e a watershed boundary or basin there may be more than one basin in a watershed object In the WorkSpace the watershed object will appear similar to the following example WorkSpace See Data Items Test Watershed naik H DEM g Channels Stream Order o Basin 1 AT Basin 2 bo am ae O r Figure 2 1 An example of a watershed object 135 Green Kenue September 2010 2 1 1 Opening an Existing Watershed Object To open an existing watershed object select File 5Open from the menu bar or click the button Watershed objects have the file extension wsd Once opened the watershed object will be listed under the Data Items category of the WorkSpace 2 1 2 Importing a Watershed from Topaz Watershed files created with the Topaz software can be imported into Green Kenue to create a watershed object The Topaz files must be in ArcInfo ASCII grid file arc format An ArcInfo grid file from Topaz may be added to the EnSim WorkSpace and displayed in a 2D or 3D view To create a new watershed object from Topaz files select File New gt Watershed from Topaz files from the menu bar A dialog will appear requesting the paths of the Topaz DEM watershed boundary drainage directions and upstream drainage area files L
81. disappear the near parameter should be reduced in order to view all parts of the image 1 5 8 3 Display Properties of the Spherical View Window The display properties of the spherical window are changed in the Display tab of the view s Properties dialog box Properties of Spherical Yiew 7 Display Recording Spatial Temporal Meta Data Options Background Colour Show Compass Persistent Popups Extended Popup Info M Show Probes T Lock View Camera View Center 13256709 o Y 0 o 0 Z bbitbd d Rotate Translate Near 4464695 Field of View Far 1530757 45 2 M Show Crosshairs Apply Cancel Figure 1 29 The Display Properties dialog of a spherical view The display properties that can be edited include e Background Colour The box is not a checkbox but a colour selector indicating the colour to be applied to the background Upon selecting the box a colour selection dialog appears The box will display the colour selected e Show Compass The compass is a view decoration object and is described in the section The Compass under View Decorations on p 58 e Persistent Popups Extended Popup Info Show Probes These control the view s data probes See the section on Data Probes under Tools on p 83 e Show Crosshairs Crosshairs are the red green and blue axes defining the x y and z directions respectively e Lock View When toggled on the
82. e To change a segment attribute value AA AA 224 4 2 1 2 4 Changing a Node Attribute Value 225 e To change a node s attribute values 0 0 0 ee ees 225 e To change a node s location or value 0 000 225 4 2 1 3 Down Boundary 0 0c ees 226 4 2 1 4 Up Boundary a 221 4 2 1 5 Cross Sections eee ee eee 228 4 2 1 5 1 Associating a Cross Section with a Segment 228 e To associate a cross section with a segment 228 4 2 1 5 2 Scaling a Cross Section 0 0 0 0 ee 229 e To scale a cross section 0 0 eee 229 4 2 1 5 3 Copying a Cross section toa Segment 229 e To copy a cross section to a segment 0 0 eee ee 229 4 2 1 5 4 Orthogonally Positioning a Cross Section 230 e To orthogonally position a cross section 0 0 002 e eae 230 4 2 1 5 5 Resampling a Cross Section 0 0 000 eee eee 230 e To resample a cross section ce eee 230 4 2 1 5 6 Interpolating a Cross Section 0 000 ce eee 231 e To interpolate data from two cross sections 231 4 2 1 5 7 Vertically Offsetting a Cross Section 232 e To vertically offset a cross section 0 cee eee 232 4 2 1 5 8 Generating a Simple Cross Section 232 e To generate a simple cross section
83. file is shown below EHH HH Ht EH HH EE EH HH EH EE EH EH HH EH EEE HO EE HE EEE HE EE EEE EE OE EE EEE EEE EE EE FileType pcl ASCII EnSim 1 0 Canadian Hydraulics Centre National Research Council c 1998 2005 DataType Lagrangian Parcel Set it Application GreenKenue VETSION EPRE NG WrittenBy Username CreationDate Fri Apr 1o 2005 11 20 AM a AA AA AA AA E E E AttributeName 1 State Attributelnits 1 NONE AttributeName 2 Thickness AttributeUnits 2 metres AttributeName 3 Volume AttributeUnits 3 litres AttributeName 4 Radius AttributeUnits 4 metres AttributeName 5 Volume Fraction AttributeUnits 5 Percent AttributeName 6 Exposure Time sAttrib teUnits 6 sec EndHeader 1667145090469 2227423814453 195004916016 23334 943339 1952143222660 23338529297 188309814453 22344 748047 3T 62e006 28 0892 30 7797 sO31ElE 006 27 1164 46 1559 07495367000 25 1464 41 8283 ste 0G6 005 2928990 2051051 280892 61321 s211164 1341 201464 61321 298996 61321 PRR Hp ros Ae ao oo 283 EnSim Core September 2010 186555111344 21950 718750 1 52679758006 24 3049 36 9069 0 243049 61321 18251 394531l 21331 871094 L 227256 9e 006 236394 52 8398 02230394 CLIZ1 13806 142100 A2361 117929T L 12466376003 22 0500 26 1960 0 320500 61321 LO63628201 45 22065 134700 1L 2251945e 006 24 0362 5517902 02240562 CLIAl 184913063481 22131 42851b 1 22709682006 25 6871 64 9310 U 235659511 61321 File Formats pcl
84. from positive to negative or vice versa Pi 3 1415926535897932 abs absolute value sqrt square root log10 logarithm base 10 log natural logarithm exp exponential base e sin sine COS cosine tan tangent asin inverse sine arcsine acos inverse cosine arccosine atan inverse tangent arctangent sinh hyperbolic sine cosh hyperbolic cosine tanh hyperbolic tangent min returns the minimum value max returns the maximum value mean returns the arithmetic mean average of all values sigma returns the standard deviation of all values parentheses D2R convert degrees to radians R2D convert radian to degrees gt A gt B returns the greater of A and B lt A gt B returns the lesser of A and B September 2010 Section 1 6 Tools September 2010 For any expression standard operator precedence applies Operands for trigonometric functions are in radians Examples of valid expressions include o A e 3 45 e A B C D e A exp B C log10 D e chs A pi A B e cos B sinh A e cos A pi 180 e A lt B 121 EnSim Core September 2010 1 7 How TO HINTS AND TRICKS This section is intended to provide you with a quick reference on how to accomplish some useful tasks with EnSim The items discussed here are based on the fundamental EnSim functions but may not be readily obvious 1 7 1 Draping a 3D Image Onto a DEM EnSim allows the dra
85. information in all three panels of the HBV EC dialog click Apply to confirm your entries 2 Within the WorkSpace select the name of your HBV EC Parameter Set object From the menu bar select File Save 259 The HBV EC Model September 2010 3 Select Run gt Check Parameters from the menu bar A dialog box will appear listing any errors remaining in the parameter set If there are no errors found the the message box shown in Figure 5 23 will appear x ox INFO Parameter set validation completed Jj NO errors or warning were found in New HBV EC Parameter Set Figure 5 23 This message indicates that no errors were found 4 Once you have fixed any errors select Run Launch Simulation from the menu bar A number of data objects will be created as children of the parameter set 5 3 1 The Results of the HBV EC Model The results of the HBV EC model are shown as 1 dimensional time series and attributes of a single 2 dimensional time varying triangular mesh All of these result data objects are shown in the WorkSpace as children of the HBV EC Parameter Set The following results are shown as I dimensional time series They are best examined in a 1 D view window e Total Discharge This object shows the rate of total discharge in thousands of litres per second from the watershed over the simulated period e Fast Reservoir Storage This object shows the level of storage in the fast reservoir of the watershed in mil
86. manipulations a hand cursor W will Fa appear An unlimited number of moves can be undone by the Undo Move command in the view s shortcut menu The Default View command in the view s shortcut menu allows you to return to the default view e Changing the view parameters in the display tab of the view s Properties dialog box There are several types of controls to the view parameters e X Y and Z Camera Camera indicates the location in 3D space from which you are viewing the scene e X Y and Z View Centre View centre refers to the location of the centre of the point of interest within a view It is the centre of the view window Note that the crosshair 1s always drawn at the centre of the view e Field of View Analogous to the field of view of a camera lens it is the angle that defines the limit of the size of area you see around the view centre It has a zoom effect decreasing the field of view is equivalent to zooming in and increasing the field of view is equivalent to zooming out e Near and Far Near and far are clipping planes of the view Clipping planes are limits perpendicular to the line of sight between the camera and the view centre By default the clipping planes are located on either side of the view s data In the view s coordinate system s units near and far are defined by the distance of the clipping plane from the 47 EnSim Core September 2010 camera If while zooming in parts of the image begin to
87. meshes may be recorded in binary format However the header of the binary file is left in ASCII characters so that it can be examined in a text editor The binary file begins with a section that describes the mesh including the coordinates of the nodes and the connectivity of the nodes forming the elements There are five records which contain this data The first two records contain the x and y coordinates of the nodes Each of these contains n floating point values where n 1s the total number of nodes in the mesh as indicated by the NodeCount keyword The first position in the record refers to node 1 the second to node 2 and so on The next three records specify the node connectivity There are m integer values in each of these records where m is the total number of elements or triangles in the mesh as indicated by the ElementCount keyword The first record contains the values for the first node in each element The next two hold the values for the second and third nodes in each element respectively e X X coordinate 4 byte floating point e Y Y coordinate 4 byte floating point e N1 Node 1 of the mesh 4 byte integer 276 Appendix A September 2010 e Nn Node n of the mesh the last node 4 byte integer e E1 Element 1 of the mesh 4 byte integer e Em Element m of the mesh the last element 4 byte integer Following the description of the mesh which does not vary with time are the values of the data attri
88. might define secondary roads as 2 and main roads as 1 4 Create a new point set See Drawing Points under Creating New Data Items on p 68 for more details For each point set drawn define its value as something representative of the object For example you might define houses as 1 and businesses as 2 1 7 10 Georeferencing a non georeferenced GeoTIFF Non georeferenced tiffs may be loaded and manually georeferenced To georeference a non georeferenced tiff 1 Import a GeoTIFF image into the WorkSpace by selecting File Import 2 Open the Properties dialog and select the Spatial tab 3 The pixel size the coordinates of the origin or SouthWest corner of the image can be set and applied Properties of Example Image ki Classes Image Spatial Meta Data Coordinate System Projection Assign Cartesian af Registration f Onigin Delta C 4 Comers Pixel Size Figure 1 103 Registering a GeoTIFF image at the origin Alternatively the image may be stretched into place by setting the coordinates of the four corners To do this click on the 4 corners button and set pixel size and the corner coordinates 129 EnSim Core September 2010 Properties of Example Image x Classes Image Spatial Meta Data Coordinate System Projection Assign Cartesian a Registration C Drigin Dela 4 Comers Northwest MorthE ast ila Figu
89. modify 2 3 1 5 1 Adding Land Use Data Using Closed Polygons Land use data attributes cannot be calculated from the DEM Therefore Green Kenue provides a tool to obtain land use information from GIS data The number of land uses described in the map file should correspond to the land uses described in the WATFLOOD parameter file 183 Green Kenue September 2010 Properties of Watilood Map x Map Gen Display ColorScale ata Spatial Meta Data Edit Land Cover Attibutes Options Land Cover Classes 4 Add Delete Clear Contour Interval 1 Min ha a Attribute ae Units o Imperious Area 0 Us 9 wetlands OX 10 Class 2 Ux 11 Class 3 UX 12 Class 4 Us 13 Bankfull Capacities 0 0 Cancel Figure 2 56 Use this dialog to add more land classes to the map To add land class data 1 In the Data tab of the Watflood Map s properties dialog click the Add button The Add Attributes dialog box will appear add attributes ed Land Use Class Add Bankfull Capacity Mo Figure 2 57 Use this dialog to enter the name of the new class 3 Click on a keyword to add a class to the map e Land Use Class Enter the name of the new class in the Value column You can change the name of the new class later by double clicking its name on the Data tab e Add Bankfull Capacity Select Yes or No from the Value column If you select yes the Bankfull Capacity attribute will be added to the Watflood Map
90. not already have a data item describing the area or perimeter of the zone to be identified If you have such an object open it and start with step J 1 Drag the map either Climate Zones or Land Use Regions that corresponds to the type of zone you re identifying to a 2D view window 2 With the window open and the map visible click on the E button on the tool bar 248 Section 5 2 The HBV EC Interface September 2010 3 Using the Polygon tool trace the outline of the zone See Drawing Lines and Closed Polylines on p 69 for more information on using this tool 4 When you ve completely outlined the area press lt Esc gt or click fee to stop drawing Give the line a name and click OF 5 Within the WorkSpace select the map again either Climate Zones or Land Use Regions and select Tools Map Object from the menu bar 6 From the dialog box select the object that identifies the zone If you ve just created the object 1t will have the name that you selected in Step 4 Click OK 7 If the zone you re identifying is a climate zone you re finished The area you ve defined will be added to the list of climate zones You ll identify the properties of each climate zone on the Simulation panel Select Land Use Type Figure 5 14 This dialog lets you choose a Land Use Type If you re identifying a land use region a dialog box will appear letting you select which type of region you re describing Select the l
91. objects If this option is selected the node i d number is displayed at each node The size of the labels can be adjusted e Show Element Labels This is an option for gridded objects If this option is selected the node 1 d number is displayed in the centre of each element The size of the labels can be adjusted 1 4 3 2 Colour Scale A colour scale consists of a colour spectrum and colour levels It is automatically generated upon opening or creating a data item and can be edited The colour scale legend can be created from the colour scale and displayed in a view window See the section Legends under View Decorations on p 54 for more information Properties of Example Object x Display ColorScale Data Spatial Meta Data Colours Levels 6 152 Scale Parameters Colour Interpolation HSY TY Linear Levels u Interval Mar p 922 OG Miri 0 122 2 132 Ve Tooo 0 792 0 122 O Show Legend pions Cancel Figure 1 6 The Colour Scale tab of the Properties dialog box To edit the colour scale Open the Properties dialog box for the object Select the Colour Scale tab The following fields may be edited e Colours This is the colour spectrum Clicking on an individual colour box provides a dialog to modify its colour Changing the top or bottom colour and then clicking on the Colours heading will modify the entire spectrum This will cause the colours to be interpolated betwe
92. of information about a particular segment is marked by the keyword Segment The keyword is followed on the same line by the segment ID number the number of points in the segment and the values of any data attributes associated with the segment On the lines following the Segment keyword the x y and z coordinates of each point are listed in order from the head to the tail of the segment The first and last points given for each segment are the coordinates of the nodes to which it 1s connected The list of points for a particular segment ends with the EndSegment keyword In the second section of the file following the list of segments the nodes of the network are listed with each node marked by the keyword Node On the same line after the keyword the node ID number the number of segments that meet at the node and the ID numbers of each segment are listed If a segment ID 1s preceded by a minus sign the node is located at the tail of the segment After the list of segment IDs the values of any data attributes associated with the node are listed Binary Networks containing data that varies over time is stored in binary format The geometry of the network does not vary over time Each segment described in the file consists of the same points listed in the same order although the attributes associated with the segments may change The header of the file and the section describing the geometry of the network are stored in ASCI
93. po gh TiOrid Neigh Format O O O pt Dri Node Ronmat elope Hart Format O SA 2D angu eaor Mest BY ASCH Sin mad 80 Bin sina Fra Ein oma Fay at Fae Sin oma Fs ast agn nt in Fo Fs inary i ot Sim ma Fasc agn nt ns a o Binary Single Frame Sim 8 Binary Milt rae Bai format PY iwiso ASCH Ensim foma pf x2 ASC Bai format p AroView Shape Format pt aif Mpg Interchange om pt Het Google Barth Format 13 EnSim Core September 2010 Object Type May Be Saved As Time Series Type 1 ts1 ASCII EnSim format ih Time Series Type 3 ts3 ASCII EnSim format 2s ASCII Mag and Dir EnSim format Anda ee Yr 4s ASCII Mag and Dir EnSim format ee AS Gina Time Series Type 4 4s ASCII Mag and Dir EnSim format o 88 ASC ES format pf ye ASC Si format Ll ip AceView Shape Korma Pt ifoMapfnfoTalobang Format i tent Gogle Barth Format p28 ASC Sim formas pf ye SCT Sim format pf AS CTT Gistance value nim format pt sp AroView Shape Format oo if Mapinfo Interchange Format etl Google Bart Poe dp Tebles 80 Tale Dota EnSim format __ Coenen Dette tet Velocity Rose vrl ASCII EnSim format Section 1 4 Data Items September 2010 Object Type May Be Saved As GeoTIFF tiff GeoTIFF 1 pty Si ane Sin ma Fs ae sin oma Fs ase inte ane asi ama Mu Fame Cno es ec O Jabo n ASR DEW DTED amp COED 2s ASCII Single Frame EnSim format DEM D
94. printed image 1 5 16 8 Troubleshooting in Views If the object is not displayed after it is dropped into a view try the following e Choose Default View from the View s shortcut menu to centre the view on the object e If there is more than one object displayed in the view make sure that their coordinates are compatible 66 Section 1 5 Views September 2010 e In ID Polar or 2D views try zooming out In3D views open the Properties dialog of the data item and choose the Display tab Set the Scale and Shift parameters of all objects to 1 67 EnSim Core September 2010 1 6 TOOLS Tools in EnSim are functions that allow you to manipulate data retrieve information and create data items They help you to analyze data and to understand model output results These tools include e Creating New Data Items e Editing Data Items e Probing Data e Extracting Data e Time Series related Tools e Creating Vector Fields e Mapping Objects e Calculators Following the descriptions of the tools is the How To Hints and Tricks section which describes how these can be used for completing tasks that may not be readily apparent 1 6 1 Creating New Data Items 1 6 1 1 Drawing Points EnSim has the ability to define and edit new Point Sets These points may be used for a number of uses or they may be used in conjunction with other tools such as Map Objects Points can also be digitized from a GeoTIFF Refer to the section D
95. resolution database of approximately 180 climatological parameters that cover the North American continent It was developed at the National Center for Environmental Prediction This dataset has a spatial resolution of 32 km on a 349 by 277 grid and a temporal resolution of 3 hours between January 1979 and the present A ake ua lo pp Sam gt am Figure 3 21 NARR data coverage More information can be found at http www emc ncep noaa gov mmb rreanl 3 3 2 Downloading the NARR Data NCEP provides a download service where users can extract individual parameters from the NARR database via a set of perl scripts Perl is open source and freely available A standard distribution called ActivePerl can be downloaded for free from www activestate com For the sake of convenience these scripts have been included in the Green Kenue distribution and can be found in the directory INSTALL _DIR NARR They files include e get httpsubset pl e get inv pl e get grib pl e get gfs pl One executable file 1s also provided 209 HYDAT Database September 2010 e curl exe The perl script files may have to be edited manually to ensure that the directory paths are correct For example the following lines at the top of the get httpsubset pl file may have to be edited if get inv pl and get grib pl are not in the specified directory Sget inv C NARR get_inv pl Sget grib C NARR get grib pl Another edit may have to be mad
96. respect to the magnitude and direction Ready Polar Plot Mag 27067 Dir 67 1 EI A 1 5 5 3 Manipulating the Polar View The view can be panned by dragging the mouse with the left mouse button depressed Zoom in by pressing the lt Ctrl gt key while dragging the mouse upwards or by moving the mouse wheel up if that option is available Zoom out by pressing the lt Ctrl gt key while dragging the mouse downwards or by moving the mouse wheel down While the view is being manipulated a hand cursor wW will appear 38 Section 1 5 Views September 2010 The view can also be manipulated by adjusting the X and Y minimum and maximum extents in the Display tab of the view s Properties dialog box These will be the minimum and maximum values displayed on the X and Y axes An infinite number of moves can be undone by the Undo Move command in the shortcut menu of the view object The Default View command in the view s shortcut menu allows you to return to the default view which centres the entire object in the view window 1 5 5 4 Display Properties of the Polar View Window The display properties of the polar window are changed in the Display tab of the view s Properties dialog box A sample Display tab for a polar window is shown below Properties of Polar Yiew kd Display Meta Data Options Background Colour Lock View Min Mar 0 2599686 0 25996560 Y Hoi 549691 0115496911 f2 Show Grid 90 0 bd
97. selected you can select from predefined colour schemes which include Default Colours Rainbow Grayscale USGS Reduced 40 Nice Colours RGB Interpolation and HSV Interpolation on the colour or name of an individual class to set their own colours and names 2 Also within the Custom Theme mode you can edit individual class colours and names by clicking on them 3 To save the created scheme press the Save button This file will be saved to an ASCII thm file and stored in the bin Templates GEOTIFF directory To choose from a predefined theme 1 All saved theme files found in the bin Templates GEOTIFF directory are selectable from the list in the top right of the dialog Once a predefined theme is chosen changes to colour schemes class colours and class names are not allowed 2 Several documented land cover theme files are provided e EC Environment Canada e LA GAP Louisiana GAP Analysis Project e USGS NatAtlas LC USGS National Atlas Land Cover e EOSD Earth Observation for Sustainable Development of forests 131 EnSim Core September 2010 fa 2D View 1 yy oO xj a ak 2 Example Image igi mpervious pa Deciduous AE ny Cai Classes mage Spatial Meta Data Agriculture Grayscale EC Cave ka Cure Wetland an kad Water I i M sel e Ne a aaa TONG he r par EF oe T k To reclassify a GeoTIFF 1 With the GeoTIFF object selected in the WorkSpace select Tools Reclassif
98. t already and click Gone lol x ve E Figure 2 15 These channel objects are shown before left and after right the predefined channels black were added 2 1 3 3 5 Watershed or Basin Outlet Nodes A watershed outlet node marks the drainage outlet of a basin that meets user defined criteria This node if present occurs at a point on the channel just before the channel joins with one or more other channels 147 Green Kenue September 2010 On the Criteria tab of the Channels Properties dialog watershed outlet nodes are defined by two parameters e Minimum Watershed Area All outlet nodes with an upstream drainage area greater than this value will be potential watershed outlets e Minimum Adjoining Watershed Area Watersheds adjacent to the potential watershed outlets must have upstream drainage areas greater than this value To display more watershed outlet nodes decrease these parameters This will cause smaller drainage areas to qualify as watersheds To display fewer watershed outlet nodes increase the parameters The display of watershed outlet nodes is controlled by the Target Outlets Visible checkbox in the Display tab of the Channels object s Properties dialog Figure 2 16 Watershed outlet nodes are indicated by circles on this image To select an outlet node 1 Double click anywhere within the watershed outlet node s circle To select a channel node near a watershed outlet node 1 On the Dis
99. tab of a new Triangular Mesh with new PointSet as source data 71 EnSim Core September 2010 You can select a closed polygon as a constraint line which will be used as the outer boundary of the triangulation 4 Select the Trarguilate button in the T3 Mesh tab This will create a triangular mesh based on the source data points according to the specifications described in the previous step Note The Properties dialog contains all the tabs of a viewable object in addition to the T3 Mesh tab See Properties of Data Items under Data Items on p 17 for more details 1 6 1 5 Creating a New Table Object This section explains how to create a new table object and populate it with time series data To extract an attribute table from an existing data object see Extracting an Attribute Table on p 100 To create a new Table Object from existing data 1 Create a new grid object by selecting File New gt Table Object The table object that appears in the WorkSpace will be empty If the Properties dialog of the table object is opened and the Data tab is selected the attribute list will be empty Properties of New Table F Display Data Meta Data Records 0 Attribute Name i Mas Units OF Apply Cancel Figure 1 48 The Data tab of an empty Table Object 2 To build the table object drag the source object s into the empty table object in the WorkSpace The source data must be a time series object O
100. the boundary conditions over time if you ve selected a Water Level Series or Discharge Series 226 Section 4 2 The GENID Interface September 2010 boundary type For more information on the property tabs for the time series see Properties of Data Items under Data Items on p 17 4 2 1 4 Up Boundary The Up Boundary tab allows you to examine and edit the characteristics of the upstream boundary of the channel object Properties of NewGEN1DRun x Simulation Channel Down Boundary Up Boundary Type water Level Constant 0 NodelD 187 Seles FileName Sample Up Boundary tal A Display Data Meta Data Rendering Lines bd Style Wisible Colour Styles Lines Sold Points Fill Square al IK Apply Cancel Figure 4 12 The Up Boundary tab describes the properties of the upstream boundary 157 Line Width 4 Point Size Like the downstream boundary there are five ways to describe the properties of the upstream boundary e Type Use this box to select the general type of boundary at the upstream node of the channel e Water Level Constant If the upstream boundary is constant enter the water level in metres in the text box e Water Level Series If the upstream boundary varies over time click ee to select and load a scalar time series ts1 file that describes the changes in its water level e Discharge Constant If the upstream b
101. the Channels object into a view 2 With the Properties dialog open click on the Channels object within the view to identify the location of a flow station 3 Select the Add button from the Stations area of the Known Flow tab e The station name will appear under the Name column To change the name of the station click on the name and edit the text e The Drainage Area will be calculated from the station and appear in the Drainage Area column 4 Click on the Flow box and enter the flow for the station 5 Select the Apply button To remove a known flow station 1 Click on the station on the Known Flow tab of the Properties dialog 2 Click the Remove button 162 Section 2 2 Hydrologic Tools September 2010 2 2 1 14 2 Computed Flow The Computed Flow tab describes the computed flow calculated from the known flow stations Properties of Sample Watershed E x Watershed DEM Channels DAR Analysis Basin 1 Basin 2 Known Flow Computed Flow Display Spatial Meta Data Stations Fit Line Method a Remove epal Ponti Fan z Interpolate Point to Point gt Point to Point al Sth 5 Computed Bo sd 49 9156 Stn 6 Computed 390 24 35 5959 Str Computed 5 12 1 93939 Stn 8 Computed 162 56 19 032 Cancel Figure 2 35 The Computed Flow is based on the known flow stations There are two methods for calculating the flow at a station along the channel Interpolate Point to Point
102. the body of the subtable The values must be listed in the same order as the columns appear e EndColumnMetaData Required This keyword marks the end of the metadata information File Format hbt HBT files are always stored in ASCII format The body of the file consists of columns of data The columns are as described by the columnMetaData keywords and each row represents a single set of HBV EC results for a particular terrain class seperated by the time interval given by the DeltaT keyword 330 Index Index A ANEMOSCOPE Uu 311 Animation ul 61 clock a 58 lg AN 62 FECONDO Aa Aa nAAAG 65 ArcInfo ASCII grid file 304 ArcINFO ASCH Grid files 270 ArcView Shape File 304 SAVING La 16 Areas and Volumes Uu 1111 88 AS NA 92 Attribute Tables 100 B Base Maps Uu 1a 60 Basin Network 1 5 159 LENA 149 GIA aaa mamana habaan 150 ouet NOTES inspannin 147 PODOV INT peA 150 Binary Rasters 0 0 0 0 304 AG PA BOKEEN mn AGO 60 C CAGUIOA An 115 dala MENS spieta i a 115 XPrESSIONS AAP 120 extract a temporal subset 127 gridded objects cccccccceeeeeees 116 LIME Series 0 ceeccccccceeeesesseeeeeeees 118 CDCD ea seei ri 203 file locations 0 0 eeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 203 September 2010 loading a station ccceceeeee 204 stations ACCESSING APA 204 SCAG E E 205 Mela dala se
103. the line will be removed e If you ve selected a point on the line other than the first the line segment connecting the point with the previous point will be removed TI EnSim Core September 2010 Note You can undo the Opening by selecting the Open Line and selecting Close Selected Line from the shortcut menu To divide a Closed or Open Line into two Open Lines 1 Within the View select the point on the Line where you would like the separation to take place 2 From the menu bar select Edit Line Set Split Selected Line or select Split Selected Line from the shortcut menu e Ifyou selected a point on an Open Line the Line will be divided into two lines whose end points are in the same location as the selected point No line segments are removed e If you selected a point on a Closed Line the Line will be divided into two lines whose end points are at the same location as the selected point and at the first point in the line No line segments are removed Note You can undo the split by selecting either Open Line selecting Cut from the shortcut menu selecting the other Open Line and selecting Append from the shortcut menu 1 6 3 3 3 Adding Line Segments To add an Open Line to a Line Set 1 In the WorkSpace or the View select the Line Set to which you d like to add an Open Line 2 Select Edit Line Set Add Open Line from the menu bar or Add Open Line from the shortcut menu The New Open Line button on the
104. the receiving object the object whose values are to be changed in the WorkSpace 3 Select Tools gt Map Object 4 A dialog will appear providing a list of all open data items that can be mapped to the receiving object Select the desired source object 114 Section 1 6 Tools September 2010 Available Objects x 5 new OpenLine Pa themed CapilanoT elemac 30 1953 CapilanoT elemac20 1993 Cancel Figure 1 92 This dialog is used to select a source object when mapping Other possible examples of mapping objects include e Vector objects mapped to other vector objects e Vector objects mapped to scalar objects For example mapping a t3v vector triangular mesh to an r2s a rectangular grid object will generate an r2v a vector rectangular grid showing the interpolated vector values from the mesh at each point on the grid 1 6 9 Calculators 1 6 9 1 The Calculator for Data Items The calculator tool performs basic arithmetic operations such as addition subtraction multiplication or division on all non gridded data items The calculator changes all the values of the data item by the same value or factor Only one operation may be applied at a time A possible application of this tool might be to change the units in a data item from metres to feet by multiplying all measurements by 3 280839895 To use the calculator 1 Select the data item in the WorkSpace upon which the arithmetic operation will be
105. the view s coordinate system 1s changed when the object s coordinate system is changed Similarly if multiple data items are displayed in a particular view the view s coordinate system will change only when all of the data items have been changed to a new coordinate system For example if two data items both with the Polar Stereographic coordinate system are displayed in a Polar Stereographic view the view s coordinate system will remain the same if one of the data items 1s changed to the Lat Long coordinate system Only when the second data item is also changed to the Lat Long coordinate system will the view s coordinate system change to match 30 Section 1 4 Data Items September 2010 1 4 3 5 Meta Data The Meta Data tab displays the information documented for the data e g source file type obtained from the file header see File Headers on p 264 for information on file headers A sample Meta Data tab is shown below Properties of EnSimExampleObject Display ColorScale Data Spatial Meta Data EnSimE sample0 bject 2D Rect Scalar O Projects data EnSimD ata En5imE sampleO bject ris Application En5im5 ample4pp Version U4 We Tithe nBy Example User CreationDate Fr Jan 11 2005 10 08 4M Figure 1 16 The Meta Data tab shows information about the object file Some meta data fields may be changed depending on the object For example the name and title of an object may be change
106. to objects such as triangular meshes rectangular grids lines or polylines or point sets The values will be mapped from one object to the other where there is an overlap For example e All nodes of a grid or mesh located within a closed line will be given the value of the closed line Note that only one value can be applied within a polygon 113 EnSim Core September 2010 Hah Bt ILIGAN GG eee EILILEITINININUNINI NIT LEAH U BE AA ee ee TIRE ILUTO TTTATELE TO TLAGA U been given a specific value x Figure 1 90 The nodes within the polygon have al e The values from a grid or mesh can be mapped to a point set In the figure on the left the grid has not yet been mapped to the points In this example the points all have the same value In the figure at the right the values from the grid have been mapped to the points by spatially interpolating the values on the grid at the location of each point CE ee PAA BG PEE ANA NA TAGA NENN AU UU AG BERR BERR ERR RRR LEE EEE EEE EEE EEE EEE EEE LEE EEE EEE EEE EEE EEE Figure 1 91 The points have been given values interpolated from the data of the grid To map objects 1 Open the two data items involved in the mapping One will be the source object The other will be the receiving object The values will be mapped from the source object to the receiving object 2 Select
107. to select and edit the watershed object that is to be modelled For detailed information on creating a watershed object see Creating a New Watershed Object on p 136 There are two ways to prepare a watershed for the HBV EC model 239 The HBV EC Model September 2010 Properties of New HBV EC Parameter Set x WaterShed Basin Simulation FleName Watershed DEM Channels Channels def How Algorithm A DE Generate W Enable Predefined Channels Name New Water5hed ype WaterShed Directory Filename Lancel Figure 5 2 This is the WaterShed panel with the Predefined Channels option enabled e Ifyou ve already created a watershed using Green Kenue you can open that object and drag it to the HBV EC Parameter Set object The information on the existing watershed will be copied into the HBV EC watershed child object including the Channels and Basin objects You can also select the watershed by clicking El and selecting the file WorkSpace WorkSpace Fi T Data Items F f8 Data Items HG New HBV EC Parameter Set El El New HBV EC Parameter Set 2 eine 7 E q AN os ba A DEN k a EB DEM Basin 1 H Q HBV EC Spatial pl U e BE Spatial i et HBV EC Model inn O HBV EC Model an E DEM FA DEM bse ow Mh Channels Stream Order 3 BY Channels Stream Order A Basin 1 gt Mi Basin 1 ee ee a ee T prrs w T FRE TAO a T Figure 5 3 By dragging
108. tool bar will be selected and the mouse pointer will change accordingly See Drawing Lines and Closed Polylines on p 69 for more information on drawing an OpenLine 3 When you re finished drawing the Open Line click gt y on the tool bar or hit lt Esc gt You ll be prompted to supply a value and units for the new Open Line Please enter into for this new OpenLine we Te adding to the object Cancel Name OpenLine1 Value 314 Units m Figure 1 55 This Open Line is being added to the Line Set OpenLine1 4 Click DE To add a Closed Line to a Line Set 1 In the WorkSpace or the View select the Line Set to which you d like to add a Closed Line 78 Section 1 6 Tools September 2010 2 Select Edit Line Set Add Closed Line from the menu bar or Add Closed Line from the shortcut menu The New Closed Line button on the tool bar will be selected and the mouse pointer will change accordingly See Drawing Lines and Closed Polylines on p 69 for more information on drawing a Closed Line 3 When you re finished drawing the Closed Line click a on the tool bar or hit lt Esc gt You ll be prompted to supply a value and units for the new Closed Line Please enter into for this new ClosedLihe wete adding to the object Cancel 1 6 3 4 Editing T3 Meshes The T3 Mesh editing toolbar contains shortcuts to several functions that can greatly simplify the creation and editing of triangular mesh
109. two or three values per line If the file 1s then saved within EnSim a header will be added Note XYZ ASCII files may also be comma delimited 281 EnSim Core September 2010 XY Data Objects xy dat XY data objects are stored in a relatively simple format Their data does not vary over time XY data objects are however very useful for comparing two data attributes The icon used to represent an XY data item in the WorkSpace is The file extension of an XY data item may be xy or dat File Headers xy dat An example XY data file is shown below Hit HH HH HH HHH EE HH HH HH EEE HE EE EEE EE EOE EE a EEE EOE EEE OEE EE EEE EEE H FileType xy ASCII EnSim 1 0 Canadian Hydraulics Centre National Research Council c 1998 2005 DataType XY DataObject Application GreenKenue Version ala WrittenBy Username CreationDate Friz Aor 15 2005 11720 AM Ne Ne E EEE AttributeName 1 AttributeUnits 1 AttributeName 2 AttributeUnits 2 EndHeader 200 sels 2097259 230079 1661 46 2307 21 1861246 Zee E293 29322 2007 38 25 Lego 1851 06 2513203 1651 86 2513 03 1632 34 413051 LILA SL LALO lee TILA WG Like point sets XY data objects have no unique keywords See File Headers on p 264 for more information on general keywords File Format xy dat XY data objects have a very simple layout Data is always stored in ASCII format organized into two columns Each column represents a sing
110. used as a guideline for the number of divisions 1 5 7 The 3D View Window The 3D view window displays data in a perspective view The default view shows a perspective from the negative x negative y and positive z octant The 3D view display properties can be edited and objects can be manipulated in the 3D view A new 3D View window can be opened by pressing the 7 button in the Tool bar The sample 3D view shown below displays the same objects as the sample of the 2D view ox Figure 1 24 This 3D view shows the same data item as the 2D view on p 36 1 5 7 1 The 3D Window Status Bar The bottom of the EnSim window provides information on the open window For the active 3D window the view s current coordinate system and the location of the crosshairs 1s displayed as well as the active type of view manipulation ROT for rotation TRN for translation Ready LL GRS5S80 0 360 123 127 49 576 0 007 ROT TA 43 EnSim Core September 2010 1 5 7 2 Manipulating the 3D View In EnSim 3D space there are two ways in which the view can be manipulated e By dragging with the mouse the view can be rotated or translated Rotation and translation occur in the x y plane using the lt Ctrl gt key in conjunction with the mouse or using the mouse wheel rotation and translation can occur in the z or vertical direction The options of Rotate or Translate can be chosen using commands in the shortcut menu or in the display tab of th
111. velocity rose 99 EnSim Core September 2010 Note The first sector is always centred on 0 degrees For example with a sector width of 90 degrees the first sector will span from NorthWest to NorthEast 45 degrees to 45 degrees e Speed Bins Set up the bins using the following parameters e Min Specify the upper limit used by the first bin e Count Specify the number of bins e Interval Specify the width of the bins Click Apply to update the list containing bin and values based on the selected the Min Count and Interval e Constant Interval If checked the bin widths will remain constant using the Interval value If unchecked the minimum value for each bin becomes editable in the list within the dialog e Name Enter the name to be used by the extracted velocity rose object Click Uk to create and display the velocity rose object in the WorkSpace as a child of the originating vector time series The velocity rose can be saved as an ASCII vr1 file See Velocity Roses vr1 on p 295 for more information on this file type 1 6 5 8 Extracting an Attribute Table Attribute tables can be used to show the data from a time series a table or any multiattribute object in tabular format These files can then be saved as tables or comma seperated text files To Extract an Attribute Table 1 In the Workspace select the data object whose attribute table you d like to examine 2 Right click on the object and select Sho
112. 0 e StartTime This is the explicit time in hours minutes seconds decimal seconds when the time series begins If the type of time series uses explicit time as is the case for ts3 and ts4 files this is the time of the first data point If explicit time is not specified as with tsl and ts2 files the time 1s set to 0 00 00 000 e DeltaT This is the time step used in files that do not use explicit time as is the case with ts1 and ts2 files File Headers ts5 An example header from a type 5 time series file is shown below EE HH HH EH HH EE HH HH EH EE EH EH HE EEE HE EE Ha EEE HOE EE EEE EEE EE EEE EEE EE FileType ts5 ASCII EnSim 1 0 Canadian Hydraulics Centre National Research Council EC 1998 2007 DataType Type 5 Time Series Application Green Kenue Version iS Pee fs WrittenBy Username CreationDate Mon Jul 16 2007 11 20 AM E EE E E EE a E E AA AA AA E EN E E EE N EE E E E E E E EE E EEEN AA E EEE EE E E AA AA AttributeName 1 AttributeUnits 1 AttributeName 2 AttributeUnits 2 BeginLine 8 Point 452534 495453 5464098 227279 Point 452616 191608 5464098 037764 Point 452756 638834 5464098 166487 Point 452849 177323 5464098 955789 Point 452849 689540 5464098 381640 Point 452849 003346 5464098 467922 Point 4527735733241 5464098 720075 Point 452715 768993 5464098 248804 EndLine T EndHeader e BeginLine This keyword is used in the ts5 time series file to l
113. 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 O20 0 0 Onl O25 O04 O41 07 G21 0 1 0 0 0 0 O l 0 3 O45 O4 0 4 O41 0 1 O20 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 4 0 4 0 3 0 0 0 1 O20 0 0 0 0 0 0 OO 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Ob O20 0 0 0 0 120 0 0 30 0 0 0 020 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 OO 0 0 0 0 0 0 OU 0 0 EndFrame Frame 2 2 1993 01 01 2200200 000 0 0 0 0 020 0 0 0 0 02 0 02 0 0 0 020 DO O40 0 0 O20 O40 0 0 0 0 O 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 4 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 0 4 0 2 0 1 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 3 On 0 3 03 0 4 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 1 Oss O25 O25 0 4 025 O22 Osl WA 0 0 Og 0 4 O45 0 5 0 5 10 4 O23 O23 02 0 0 2 4 0 5 0 4 0 3 0 5 0 4 0 4 0 0 O20 02 2 O43 Uel 0 0 0 OL 02 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 O20 020 0 0 0 0 020 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 VU 0 0 EndFrame e Frame The data for each timestep or frame is lead off by the Frame keyword The values following the keyword are the integer frame number the integer step number and the time associated by this frame If there is a space within the time string then the string must be enclosed by double quotation marks The following are both valid time strings 1993 01 01 1 00 00 000 and 12 00 00 EndFrame The data for each timestep or frame ends with this keyword Note On loading the ASCII multiframe r2c file Kenue will save the ASCH file to a binary file This is required to enable Kenue to visualize multiframes A message will be displayed to the user Binary Both time varying
114. 0 0 0 cee ee 138 e To delineate a watershed 0 cee ee 138 2 1 3 1 3 Delineating a Multi Tile Watershed 139 e To delineate a multi tile watershed AA 139 ZNO END 7x05 ab 45u4es was AMAG Had PAG hehehe e eed NG kA 140 2 1 3 2 1 Checking for Errors and Editing the DEM 141 2 1 3 3 Channels and Flow Paths 0 0 0 00 000 cee 141 2 1 3 3 1 Channel Attributes 0 000 0000 a 142 2 1 3 3 2 Displaying Channels 0 aa 143 e To view more or fewer channels 00 0 a 144 2 1 3 3 3 Editing the Channels 0 a 145 2 1 3 3 4 Using Predefined Channels AA 145 e To add a predefined channel to a Watershed 147 2 1 3 3 5 Watershed or Basin Outlet Nodes 147 e To select an outlet node aa 148 e To select a channel node near a watershed outlet node 148 2 1 3 4 Basin or Watershed Boundaries 0000008 149 2 1 3 4 1 Creating and Removing Basins 0005 150 e To adda basin 0 eee 150 e To remove a basin ee es 150 2 2 HYDROLOGIC TOOLS 2 cee eee 151 2 2 1 Watershed Tools 0 00 0 ee 151 2 2 1 1 Extracting Drainage Directions 2 00000 eae 151 2 2 1 2 Extracting Drainage Area 0 eee 152 2 2 1 3 Extracting Depression Fill 0 0 0 0 cee eee 153 2 2 1 4 Extrac
115. 0 000 The World map shows national borders for the entire world e 1 7 500 000 The Canada map shows provincial and territorial borders within Canada e The Rivers and Lakes map shows major rivers and lakes within Canada e The Roads map shows major roads within Canada e The Cities map shows medium to large settlements within Canada The names can be shown or hidden by checking or unchecking the Show Node Labels box in the Fonts section of the Display tab of the Properties menu The Cities 7 5m map contains data including NTS50 values and populations as of 1991 for 497 settlements The additional data can be views by right clicking on the data object and selecting Show Attribute Table from the shortcut menu e 1 1 000 000 The Rivers and Lakes map shows most rivers and lakes within Canada e The Roads map shows most roads within Canada e The Cities map shows most settlements within Canada Like the Cities 7 5m map the settlement names can be shown or hidden The Cities 1m map contains location data for 3540 settlements e 1 50 000 The Map Sheets map shows a grid covering all land within Canada This grid corresponds to the NTS map sheet boundaries published by Natural Resources Canada e The Map Sheet Names map contains the names for each of the grids outlined in the Map Sheets map The two maps can be used together to quickly determine which maps might be needed from websites such as GeoGratis or GeoBase 1 5 12 Animation Time
116. 0 05 The maximum value would be typical of a mature glacier in late summer e KGMin This is the minimum outflow coefficient for glacier water per model time step The default value is 0 05 This value would indicate an early spring outflow coefficient e KGRC This is a recession coefficient that is applied to the computation of the glacier outflow coefficient This value must be between 0 and 1 and the default value is 0 7 e Area This is the total area contained within the climate zone in square kilometres This value 1s obtained from the Basin panel and cannot be edited e Elevation Band Parameters These variables deal with a specific Elevation Band Since most watersheds will contain at least a few such bands you may need to provide some information for each of them To edit the variables for an Elevation Band other than the first select the band you d like to edit from the list box shown at the top of Figure 5 19 Elevation Band Parameters Elevation Band 4 1187 Sr Humber of Land Class 4 Band Elevation 1187 3 Area 48 2375 Figure 5 19 The Elevation Band information contains only one editable variable Number of Land Classes This variable shows the number of Land Classes contained within the Elevation Band A Land Class consists of a particular combination of Land Use Region Slope Band and Aspect Band Remember Lakes are always considered to have a Slope and Aspect of 0 so all lakes within a pa
117. 00 00 46 2615 2002402722 04 00 00 rol 2002702722 10 00 00 6 2 fol 2002402722 16 00 00 0 2 7615 2002 02 22 22 00 00 0 2519 2002402723 04 00 00 46 foe 2002 02 23 10 00 00 3 4 roal 2002402723 16 00 00 0 2622 2002 02 23 22 00 00 25623 2002402724 04 00 00 0 b24 2002402724 10 00 00 0 25625 2002402724 16 00 00 Dr Add Delete Figure 1 82 This dialog box is used to edit time series The time series editor dialog is divided into three parts the Source TimeSeries data section at the top the two edit pages Data Points and NoData in the middle and the option for creating a new timeseries or overwriting the source time series at the bottom The Source TimeSeries section contains data associated with the time series object Some fields such as X axis units and Y axis units are editable Greyed text is read only The Data Points page lists the item number the time and the value for every point in the time series object Both the time and the value are editable fields Data points may be added by using the Add button Selected data points may be removed by using the Delete button 105 EnSim Core September 2010 Note Although added points appear at the bottom of the point list the points are automatically sorted by time when you click OK The NoData page gives you several options for replacing NoData values NoData values are points in the time series that have an associated time but no valid value In this case a user specif
118. 000 yDelta 400 000000000000 Angle 0 000000 SourceFile JockRiver rzZs Name DEM EndHydroGrid it HydroChannels 308 Appendix B September 2010 DrainageAreaThreshold 8 000000 gt MinWaterShedArea 375 000000 gt MinAdjWaterShedArea 26 000000 OutletsViewable 0 Title Network Name Channels EndHydroChannels Basin 1 Outlet x 445400 000000 Outlet y 5017600 000000 Title Basin Name Basin 1 EndBasin it For an explanation of general keywords used in file headers see File Headers on p 264 The Name and Title keywords that are used for several watershed subcomponents are described in that section The FlowAlgorithm keyword indicates which algorithm was used to generate the depressionless DEM from the source data The Watershed object uses several keywords that are similar to those found in a 2D rectangular grid to describe the depressionless DEM These keywords are found after the keyword HydroGrid which indicates the beginning of the subsection and before the EndHydroGrid keyword which indicates its end e xOrigin This is the x coordinate of the point in the bottom left corner of the grid e yOrigin This is the y coordinate of the point in the bottom left corner of the grid e xCount The number of points or vertices in each row of the grid along the x direction e yCount The number of points or vertices in each column of the grid along the y direction e xDelta The distanc
119. 000 DeltaT 24 00 00 000 Point Count ee Min Value 252765 Max Value O 21935 Mean Value 4 945695 Std Dev 1 73365 Resample Options Method Subset StartT ime 0 00 00 000 EndT ime E24 00 00 000 W Create New TimeSeries New Name Resampled Example Time Seres canal Figure 1 84 This dialog box is used to resample time series 107 EnSim Core September 2010 The Resample TimeSeries dialog is divided into two parts a Source TimeSeries section at the top and a Resample Options section at the bottom The Source TimeSeries section contains data associated with the time series object Greyed text is read only You can specify resampling parameters within the Resample Options section There are several resampling methods to choose from Subset Any time series points found between and including the resample StartTime and EndTime values will be subsetted Temporal Shift All time series points will be shifted to match the new resample StartTime value For example if the source StartTime is at 12 00 00 000 12 hours and you enter a resample StartTime of 18 00 00 000 18 hours then all time series points will be shifted forward by 6 00 00 000 6 hours Linear Interpolation A new time series is generated by linearly interpolating the source time series using the resample DeltaT The timespan of this interpolated time series is defined by the resample StartTime and EndTime values default to t
120. 1 Creating and Removing Basins More than one basin can be defined within a watershed object To add a basin 1 Ensure that the Channels object is displayed in a 2D view 2 Select the outlet node for the watershed The outlet can be any channel node Note To select an outlet node that is currently defined as a watershed node surrounded by a circle click anywhere within that circle To choose another channel node that is within the circle of a watershed outlet node uncheck the Target Outlets Visible box in the Display tab of the Channels object s Properties dialog before selecting the desired node 3 Select the Add Basin command from the shortcut menu A new watershed boundary will appear in the active view A new basin tab will appear in the watershed Properties dialog To remove a basin 1 Select the Remove command from the Basin object s shortcut menu or select the basin object in the WorkSpace and choose Edit 5Remove from the menu bar 150 Section 2 2 Hydrologic Tools September 2010 2 2 HYDROLOGIC TOOLS 2 2 1 Watershed Tools There are a variety of watershed tools available in the Green Kenue environment These hydrologic tools are used in conjunction with the EnSim Core tools to provide a greater understanding of the physical characteristics of the watershed The Watershed Tools are e Extracting Drainage Area e Extracting Drain Direction e Extracting Depression Fill e Extracting Average Upslope Elevatio
121. 138 Section 2 1 Watershed Objects September 2010 2 Select the Generate button Information on the modifications to the watershed and progress of the watershed delineation appear in the following dialog Generating flow data Using the AT Search algorithm Computing flow areas Identifying drainage channels Searching for default basin outlet Generating default basin Identify additional basin outlets There are 2 watershed outlet nodes on the grid Done Ce x Figure 2 6 This dialog shows the progress of a watershed being generated Once this dialog has been accepted by clicking OK two new objects Channels and Basin 1 will appear in the WorkSpace as children of the watershed object 2 1 3 1 3 Delineating a Multi Tile Watershed To delineate a multi tile watershed 1 On the Properties of new MultiTile Watershed dialog use the dd button to add the tiles that describe the area of the watershed 2 Once all of the relevant DEMs have been added click Delineate Watershed to create the Channels and Basin objects The delineation method used by the Multi Tile Watershed object 1s a modified version of the A Search algorithm 139 Green Kenue September 2010 Properties of new MultiTile Watershed Figure 2 7 This dialog creates a watershed from multiple tiles 2 1 3 2 DEMs The DEM digital elevation model tab from the watershed properties dialog describes the rectangular gri
122. 2643 E LENGTH O 00010s425 5 49685 Mnom i m Oe kL lll l d aml naM Figure 1 9 The popup window displays useful data about the current attribute Note The Length displayed in the upper portion of the popup window 0 219 is the length of the selected section of the river as calculated by EnSim The LENGTH attribute displayed in the lower portion of the popup window 0 218560104757 was specified in the attributes of the shape file For an object being displayed in 1D such as a time series the data attributes displayed in popup windows are slightly different from those displayed for objects in 2D or 3D A sample popup for data point of a time series in 1D is shown below The time series was extracted from a T3 mesh 24 Section 1 4 Data Items September 2010 Figure 1 10 A 1D Time Series popup e The title bar the darker yellow bar at the top of the popup shows from where on the mesh the time series was extracted at node 424 and the location of this node e ID refers to the order of the data point in the time series This point was the 35th data point in the data series e Time There are two Time values in a ID pop up window The first is the time displayed in hours minutes seconds decimal seconds The second Time is the same time displayed in decimal seconds This data point was recorded at 71 hours or 255 600 seconds e Value This is the measured quantity as displayed on the y axis This time series was extr
123. 4 Click OK To map land use data 1 Ensure that the Watershed object is a child of the Watflood Map If it is not already associated open the watershed object that was used to generate the map In the WorkSpace drag the watershed into the Watflood Map to associate the two This will not change the 184 Section 2 3 WATFLOOD September 2010 map s data attributes In addition ensure that the polygons or GIS files containing the land use data are available in the WorkSpace 5 Select a land use class in the Data tab of the Watflood Map and press Apply A green check mark will appear to the left of the land class name 6 Ensure that the Watflood Map is selected within the WorkSpace 7 Select Tools Map Object 8 A dialog will appear listing the compatible objects Select the object corresponding to the proper land use type and then select DE When the land use data is applied the grid cells will change colour according to the percentage of the cell s area that was covered by the land use polygons 9 In the view verify that the cells are coloured according to the percentage of the cell covered by the polygon s This can be done either by checking the colour against the colour scale or by double clicking on a cell to bring up its attribute values 10 Repeat steps 2 to 6 for each remaining land class a 2D Yiew 1 Figure 2 58 The colour of each cell indicates the percentage of its area belonging to a particular
124. 45 STATION NO 16125 OTTAWA BRITANNIA ONT WRB RESPONSIBLE FOR GAUGE EFFECTIVE APR 01 1982 ALL HISTORICAL WATER LEVEL AND DISCHARGE DATA ENTERED Data Collection Type Tributary Code E4600 Benchmark ID Benchmark Elev Status Figure 3 8 This tab displays additional HYDEX information 3 1 5 3 Meta Data Additional HY DEX information can be found on the Meta Data tab See Meta Data under Properties of Data Items on p 31 for more information Properties of 02KF005 i station Flow Level Cone Load Details HYDEX Meta Data OTTAWA HIVER AT BRITANNIA Name 02KF00S Type HY DAT Station Director D AHYDATEN Filename O KPO0S dat HOS Sediment 119710545 HOSS ediment 1197T1WTAS HOS ediment 119730545 H Sedimenta 119740545 HOsSediment4 19750545 HOMSediments 119720545 Apply Cancel Figure 3 9 The Meta Data tab displays data about the station files as opposed to data about the station 200 Section 3 1 HYDAT DATABASE September 2010 3 1 6 Properties of Associated Time Series There are four possible time series that can be linked to a Hydat station These include Flow Level Conc and Load For each time series linked to the station a tab will appear in the properties dialog These time series are similar to other EnSim time series with the addition of the Subset tab Properties of O2KFO05 q x Station How Level Cone Load Display Data Subset
125. 64 for information on general keywords File Formats 12s i3s ASCII All line set files are in ASCII as currently only non time varying line sets have been implemented The following format is repeated for each line in the set The first line of data contains at least one value The first of these is an integer that represents the total number of vertices in the line The other values are the attributes associated with the line The number name and type of attributes are specified by the AttributeName and AttributeType keywords in the file header The following lines of data contain the x and y coordinates and the z coordinate in the case of a 3D line set of each vertex in the order in which they are connected If the data represents a closed polyline or polygon the coordinates on the first and last lines must be identical The first number in each line is the x coordinate the second number is the y coordinate and the third number 1f present 1s the z coordinate Binary Because EnSim does not support time varying line sets there is no binary format for 12s or 13s files 280 Appendix A September 2010 XYZ Point Sets xyz XYZ Point sets are stored in a relatively simple format They contain data describing points that are not connected and may not follow any particular pattern Their data does not vary over time and contains only a single attribute The icon representing point sets in the WorkSpace is i The file
126. 7 Properties applying changes sssaaa 31 336 September 2010 COUT O 20 ICC CAG aee A 54 COP NG aaa 31 data attributes 21 Splay aaa maan 17 1 dimensional views 36 2 dimensional views 42 3 dimensional ccceeeeee 45 si Gane eee ne 19 polar VIEWS xicsseckoscesnescestnsieedec 39 15 ALA AA een ee 18 SCANS AA 19 SA 19 spherical VIEW 0000002 48 CORDS se 63 a e 31 page setup FEDON VIEW cm nn 34 spatial 25 IDE e 26 coordinate systems 26 27 CI OSOUCS asana AO 28 NIC NG maa ANOS 5 Q Quick Legend u 1 1 1 111111111 1a 37 R R2C Fils sesona 300 Rating Curve Analysis RCA 165 background and theory 165 polynomial curve 166 DOW ED CULVE serere gainn 165 GR GA rnin 166 file 1NG NAA e APA 313 format ASO a 314 DIDA PP 314 TING NE ATEN sezctvetewcscvssnanedensoass 313 keywords cceeeeee 313 MILEAGE nama 166 manipulating 168 Index VAC IWS AA 168 manipulating Jasaan 169 GIL AA 170 172 AN PA 174 Li PAP 174 SLY NA AA 169 RCA See Rating Curve Analysis Rectangular Grid 270 ea cg 6 AA AA 300 file format NG AA 301 multiframe 302 DINA aaa 302 headers 300 CAN rer 70 creating a sloping structure in 126 data organization cccceeeee 271 TNC ANA 272 ASCI AA AA 312 PINA
127. 710 0 046849 0 036684 taD00000 07027793 04029384 0 027232 0 009639 0 027606 0 068220 0 027513 02033595 10 000000 0 012727 02019465 0 013382 0 002620 0 010200 0 056122 0 018248 0 022272 122500000 0 003182 0 006457 0 006270 0 000000 0 003182 0 011698 0 009826 0 011042 15000000 0 000094 0 001029 0 000468 0 000000 0 000655 0 001778 0 003837 0 002901 17 500000 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 0 000936 0 002246 0 000936 File Formats vr1 ASCII The data is organized into n rows of data where n is the number of speed bins and r 1 columns of data where r is the number of directions The extra column which is the lead column is used to store the velocity value for the bin 295 EnSim Core September 2010 Networks n3s A network is a connected set of polylines or segments Each segment of the network 1s made up of a series of 3 dimensional vertices When displayed in a view the points in each segment are connected to form a polyline The interconnected polylines form the network Each segment may have multiple attributes Networks have the file extension n3s and are represented in the WorkSpace with the icon Networks may be saved in any of the following formats e EnSim Network ASCII Single Frame n3s e EnSim Network Binary Single Frame n3s e EnSim Network Binary Multiframe n3s e 3D Line Set 13s e 2D Line Set 12s e Point Set xyz e MapInfo Interchange format mif e ArcView Shape file s
128. A The Rating Curve Analysis File rca The file extension for a Rating Curve Analysis object is rca It is represented in the WorkSpace by the icon For information about using rating curve analyses see Rating Curve Analysis RCA on p 165 File Header rca An example of a header from an RCA object 1s shown below This RCA was generated with the Power Curve function tHE HH Ht HH HH TE EH HH EH EE EE EH HH EH EE EH EH EEE HE EO EEE EE EE EEE EEE EE HEH FileType rca ASCII EnSim 1 0 Canadian Hydraulics Centre National Research Council c 1998 2005 DataType Rating Curve Analysis it Application GreenKenue Version Bigaa WrittenBy Username CreationDate Pra Apr 15 2005 11 20 AM it PEPE ER EN EE y EE EE E E E a AA AA Name RatingCurveAnalysis 03BC001 it DischargeSourceName Flow03BC001 LevelSourceName Leve103BC001 it The rating curve has been fitted in the form Power Function Q C H H0 N C Constant numerically equal to discharge when H HO 1 0 N Slope of the rating curve HO Effective gauge height of zero flow also called Scale offset it PowerCoeffLogC 62 194 PowerCoeffN 20 4427 PowerCoeffH0 O it The explanation of the general keywords used in the header is in Appendix A in the section File Headers on p 264 Keywords specific to the RCA are discussed below e DischargeSourceNane This is the name of the discharge or flow object used for the RCA
129. Coordinate System Projection Assign UTM 7 UTM one 18 Ellipsoid WESS Figure 1 12 The Coordinate System projection can be changed within the Spatial tab 1 Select the projection from the Projection list box in the Spatial tab The projections available are LatLong UTM MTM Polar Stereographic Lambert Conformal and Albers e If LatLong UTM MTM Polar Stereographic Lambert Conformal or Albers has been selected the central edit box will become active Enter the appropriate details e The Ellipsoid Datum list box will appear greyed out as Datum shifts are not allowed 2 Select the Apply button The object will now appear in the view with the new projection 1 4 3 4 4 Coordinate Systems Assigning Projections To assign a coordinate system to an object 1 Select the Assign button 2 The following dialog box will appear Assign Coordinate System ki Assign Coordinate System Parameters to Object MOTE Mo transformation is performed here Projector Central Meridian Latitude of Origin Tat Standard Parallel 2nd Standard Parallel False Easting False Northing Ellipsoid Datum GS84 cod Figure 1 13 The Assign Coordinate System dialog box allows for seven possible projections 2 EnSim Core September 2010 NOTE As noted at the top of this dialog this option is used strictly to assign a coordinate system to the data item It does NOT perform coordinate transformat
130. E ID 18 UP BOUNDARY TYPE LEVEL CONGTANI UP BOUNDARY VALUE 0 000000 315 EnSim Hydrologic September 2010 STEADY STATE DISCHARGE ACCURACY 0 0001 CAL FRICTION NODE ID 1 CAL FRICTION WATER LEVEL 0 000000 CAL FRICTION MIN STRICKLER 10 000000 CAL FRICTION MAX STRICKLER 50 000000 RATING CURVE NODE ID i RATING CURVE DISCHARGE START 2 000000 RATING CURVE DISCHARGE DELTA 1 000000 RATING CURVE STEP COUNT 10 Output RESULT FILE GEN1D2 SAVE WIDTH True SAVE AREA True it End of File Simulation Parameters General Parameters e NAME Required Type text up to 256 characters in length Valid values any valid filename without an extension Default none Description the name of the run GEN1D uses this parameter as the basis for generated output filenames Simulation Parameters e RUNTYPE Required Type text Valid values RUN RUN TO STEADY STATE RUN CAL FRICTION RUN GEN RATING CURVE Default RUN Description records the type of run that has been saved This parameter also affects which other parameters are included in the file e DELTA T Required 316 Type floating point in seconds or hhhh mm ss in hours minutes seconds separated by colons Valid values any positive number Default none Description defines the simulation time step This value is very dependent on the hydrodynamics used Appendix D September 2010 e VARY DELTA T Required Type
131. For vector data there are two records in the file each sufficient to hold n 4 byte floating point values where n is the total number of nodes in the mesh The first record holds all of the x components of the vector The second holds all of the y components The values in the records are stored in the sequence of the nodes The first value refers to the first node the second value to the second node and so on a Rani Kang Rane Vanni Yung Kana Yuni van Yana fim Rani Kana ane Varn 277 EnSim Core September 2010 The above table illustrates the node values for a mesh containing n vector nodes varying over m time frames Each value is a 4 byte floating point number 278 Appendix A September 2010 Line Sets i2s 13s Line set files consist of one or more 2D or 3D lines and may have additional attributes associated with each line Line sets include lines opened polylines and closed polylines File extensions for line sets are 12s and i3s for 2 dimensional and 3 dimensional line sets respectively e A 2 dimensional line set has vertex geometry that is defined by x and y coordinates Its icon in the WorkSpace is st e A 3 dimensional line set has vertex geometry defined by x y and z coordinates Its icon in the WorkSpace is 8 In many cases the z coordinate is elevation Both 12s and 13s files may also include data attributes but each attribute must be equal at all vertices within a
132. G nant cunidaendhene thane AA 291 e Type 4 tS4 2 eee eee nas 291 INDO OO cde hoe eed Anew PAG tee KA bee e AT ha O 292 e DAV anguk ene e Y 292 AGES ADO wie beeen N Ree oe ee ee ae ee oo ee 293 e File Headers tb0 ce eee 293 e File Format tb0 aa 294 e ASO eroest E es eee ces eed ees eae eee eee ees 294 e DOI AA keene PAY 294 Velocity Roses vr1 aa 295 e File Headers vr1 1 4 ccc ee ee eee 295 e File Formats vr1 aaa 295 xvii Green KenueSeptember 2010 e GA APA 295 e Networks n3s n a 0 0 ce ee ee 296 e File Headers N3s ce ee eee 296 e File Formats n3s aa 297 e Aee E peer eh ed DEL Pam E E eG sa 297 e SIL AA AA 298 e 2D Rectangular Cell Grids r2c 0 0 0 eee eee 300 Figure A 3 File Headers r2c 0 0 0 cc eee 300 e File Formats r2c nnna anaana eee 301 e AOGW ETTEN E EE E oon oe 301 e Multiframe ASCII 2 0 0 ee 302 PIY eceeussuechseeudeageaeesesbeuceeruwret eee 302 SUPPORTED FOREIGN FILE FORMATS ENSIM CORE 304 e GeoTIFF Theme files thm nonna nananana 305 APPENDIX B FILE TYPES OF GREEN KENUE 307 APPENDIX B NATIVE FILE TYPES 0 000 c eee e eee eee ees 308 Appendix B Watershed Objects wsd 000 ee eens 308 Appendix B File Headers wsd 0 cece eee eee 308 e File Format wsd 0 aaa 310 e ASCII pssniesscer
133. Green Kenue Reference Manual September 2010 CH C CANADIAN HYDRAULICS CENTRE CENTRE CO HYDRAULIQOUE CANADIEN ee i hg Canadian Hydraulics Centre Water Survey Canada Copyright 1998 2010 Canadian Hydraulics Centre National Research Council Green Kenue was developed with Microsoft Visual C Copyright 1994 2010 Microsoft Corporation All Rights Reserved MFC Microsoft Corporation Copyright 1997 All Rights Reserved OpenGL Silicon Graphics Inc Copyright 1993 All Rights Reserved WATFLOOD SPLY Copyright by N Kouwen 1986 2000 Supported Foreign Files TOPAZ Grazinglands Research Laboratory and Department of Geography University of Saskatchewan ArcInfo Grid Environmental Systems Research Institute Inc Copyright 1997 2002 ArcView Shape Files Environmental Systems Research Institute Inc Copyright 1997 2002 DTED or CDED DEM National Imagery and Mapping Angency NIMA MapInfo Interchange Format MapInfo Corporation Copyright 2002 Surfer Grid Golden Software Inc Copyright 1994 1997 GeoTIFF Library Copyright 1995 Niles D Ritter Copyright 1999 Frank Warmerdam TIFF Library Copyright 1988 1997 Sam Leffler Copyright 1991 1997 Silicon Graphics Inc il ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS Green Kenue has been a collaborative effort funded in part by Environment Canada Ottawa Ontario Special thanks are directed at several individuals who have supported the Green Kenue p
134. Grid Axes deg I Show Labels Grid amp Label Colour 4 Label Size D Misiona Hint E E Figure 1 20 The Display Properties dialog of a polar view Background Colour The box is not a checkbox but a colour selector indicating the colour to be applied to the background of the Polar View window Upon selecting the box a colour selection dialog appears The box will display the colour selected Show Grid When the check box is turned off the grid lines are removed The axes coordinates remain visible Grid Axes deg This defines the spacing of radial axes displayed in the view Axes may be drawn at 22 5 30 45 or 90 degree intervals Show Labels This check box toggles the axes coordinate labels Grid amp Label Colour This is a colour selector indicating the colour to be applied to the grid and the axis interval labels When the box is selected a colour selection dialog appears The box will display the colour selected Label Size This controls the size of the numbers along the axes The values represent the percentage of the view window size Divisions Hint Enter the number of grid divisions to be displayed in the horizontal direction The maximum number of divisions that can be entered here is 8 As the number of divisions 39 EnSim Core September 2010 is dependent on the size of the window and the data displayed this parameter 1s used as a guideline for the number of divisions e Lock V
135. I format so that they can be examined with a text editor The remainder of the file containing the time varying data is in binary format This section contains the data attributes possessed by both the segments and nodes of the network Essentially a binary network file is similar to an ASCII network file with time varying binary data appended The binary portion of the network file contains a record of attribute values for each time step The record header for these records follows the same format as the general record header for binary files described in the section Binary Files under ASCII and Binary Files on p 268 After the record header is a 4 byte integer that states the number of data attributes Following that value is another 4 byte integer which states the number of segments in the network These numbers are then followed by a series of records one per data attribute The same pattern number of attributes number of nodes and values of the attributes is used for the node attributes of the network This record structure 1s repeated once for each time step of the network RecHeader Seg Atts Al of S1 XO Al ofSn AnofS1 An of Sn Seg Atts Al ofNn An ofNI1 l An of Nn Nodes Node Atts Node Atts Al of N1 298 Appendix A September 2010 e RecHeader The Record Header Each time step has a single record header e Seg Att The number of data attributes associated with segments of the net
136. Must appear with the Zone and Ellipsoid keywords e MTM MTM coordinates Must appear with the zone and Ellipsoid keywords e PolarStereographic Polar Stereographic coordinates Followed by CentreLongitude CentreLatitude and Ellipsoid keywords e LambertConformal Lambert Conformal coordinates Followed by CentralMeridian FirstStandardParallel SecondStandardParallel LatitudeOfOrigin FalseEasting and FalseNorthing keywords e Albers Albers coordinates Followed by centralMeridian FirstStandardParallel SecondStandardParallel LatitudeOfOrigin FalseEasting and FalseNorthing keywords The default value is Cartesian A data item with no Projection keyword may be opened but it will be assigned the cartesian coordinate system when it 1s saved Zone Required if the Projection is UTM or MTM This keyword contains an integer from 1 to 60 for UTM coordinates or from 1 to 32 for MTM coordinates Ellipsoid Required if Projection Is present and is not Cartesian The ellipsoid used by the coordinate system Default is Unknown Possible values are Clark66 GRS80 WGS72 WGS74 Or Sphere CentreLatitude Required if the Projection 1S PolarStereographic The centre latitude of the projection A negative centre latitude indicates a Southern Polar Stereographic projection CentreLongitude Required if the Projection 1S PolarStereographic The centre longitude of the projection CentralMeridian Re
137. NID Interface September 2010 WorkSpace Data Items A HAN NG 2 Channels Velocity A Down Boundary ai Up Boundary bo He Out Network Surface Elevation pap UG NAA AA NG a mali RE ai Figure 4 23 The Out Network object is the output of a simulation dm a If the simulation run was a normal Run a Run To Steady State or a Generate Rating Curve Run Type the Out Network object will have three data attributes e Velocity This is the velocity of water within a channel segment in m s e Discharge This is the total discharge from a channel segment in m s e Surface Elevation This is the elevation of the surface of the water in a channel segment in metres If the simulation was a Calibrate Friction to Water Level or a Calibrate Friction to Discharge Run Type then the Out Network object will have a fourth data attribute e Strickler Friction This is the calculated Strickler Friction coefficient for a channel segment If a simulation has already been run for a particular GEN1D Parameter object you can load the results by selecting Run Load Results from the menu bar The Out Network object can be displayed in a 2D or 3D view and can be animated The number of frames will depend on the parameters chosen for the simulation For more information on viewing time varying data see Animation under Views on p 61 4 2 3 1 Creating a Hot Start From an Output In some cases it may be useful to us
138. Rating Curve Analysis Interface 0 4 166 e To perform an RCA on a HYDAT station 046 166 e To create an RCA from any two time series 166 2 2 2 2 1 Working With Rating Curves 0 0 0000 eee 169 e To adjust the rating curve by creating a subset 169 e To inactivate an individual data point 0 020000 2 eae 169 e To adjust the rating curve directly a 170 2 2 2 3 Opening an Existing RCA naana aaaea ee 174 TO open AN REAL mama ac KAG BATAAN GAWAAN HIWA DA deed does dee 174 2224 Savingan RCA 2s kama TABA red dhe wea KG Ss Ewes 174 e To save an RCA aaa 174 2 3 WATFLOOD ccc aaa 175 2 3 1 WATFLOOD Map Files 0 0 a 175 2 3 1 1 Opening an Existing Watflood Map File 175 2 3 1 2 Creating a New Watflood Map File 0 4 175 e To set map file specifications manually 000005 175 e To set map file specifications automatically 176 e To return to the default grid 2 2 0 ee 177 2 3 1 3 Modelling Multiple Watersheds 2 000000 178 2 3 1 4 Watflood Map Data Attributes 179 2 3 1 4 1 Description of Data Attributes 179 2 3 1 4 2 Calculating the Default Data Attributes from the Watershed Object 182 2 3 1 4 3 Displaying Differen
139. SGS Digital Elevation Maps dem DEM files are loaded into EnSim as rectangular grids In the WorkSpace they have the gp icon They may be treated as native r2s files e MapInfo Interchange files mif Only the GIS features in point or line format 2D or 3D are supported by EnSim The legends and other view decorations cannot be imported Shape files are represented in the WorkSpace by the MapInfo icon z The data they contain lines or points are represented as children with an icon identifying the specific data type Each data type may have multiple attributes MapInfo files can possess multiple children up to one per type of data When a MapInfo Interchange file is opened in EnSim it may be treated as a line set point set XYZ point set or parcel set depending on the type of data it contains amp ShoreLine sagt ShoreLine HYSHORE ID Figure A 5 A MapInfo Interchange file in the WorkSpace e Surfer Grid files grd Surfer grids are loaded into EnSim as rectangular grids In the WorkSpace they appear with the gg icon They may be treated as native r2s files e Binary Rasters ARC BIL GTOPO hdr dem bil ArcInfo rasters GTOPO30 s and BIL files are loaded into EnSim as rectangular grid files They are represented in the WorkSpace by the gg icon They may be treated as native r2s files 304 Appendix A September 2010 e SRTM Grid file hgt Shuttle Radar Topography Mission files both one ar
140. Section Grid Drainage Area FRAC 176 Section 2 3 WATFLOOD September 2010 WorkSpace Ely Data Items eS attlood Map Channel Elevation ELWY Test Watershed KA FH DEM Be Channels Stream Order a Basin 1 ees A Basin 2 a ee Figure 2 48 A Watflood Map associated with a watershed in the WorkSpace Note A Watflood Map cannot be created from a watershed object that has a rotated grid Open the Properties dialog of the watershed object s DEM and ensure that the Angle field of the Spatial tab has a value of zero When you drag a watershed object into the Watflood Map a default grid is automatically created that conforms to the following WATFLOOD grid rules e Each watershed outlet must be a square outside the watershed e There should be a border of blank grid squares around all sides of the watershed boundary The watershed outlet may be within this border e The maximum grid size is 99 cells by 99 cells lox Figure 2 49 A Watflood Map grid can be displayed in either a 2D left or 3D right view To return to the default grid e Inthe Watflood Map s shortcut menu select Set Spatial Default From Watershed Note All changes made to data attributes will be lost including land class data 177 Green Kenue September 2010 2 3 1 3 Modelling Multiple Watersheds Creating a Watflood Map for multiple watersheds that are independent of each other i e their boundaries do not overlap is straig
141. TED amp CDED ts ingame Sim Toma Fs a Fame Sin oma Fs as Frame asin oma O Mu Fame ni farm es ec Oo i mse O esa ani asena r2s ASCII Single Frame EnSim format ArcInfo ASCII Grid O O 5 By Seet Sin Fs Fame sin oma Fase inte ame asi ma O an Mu Fame ni ama es ec O Jadbrowd a asc ArcInfo ASCII Grid EnSim Core September 2010 a J _ Binary Muli Frame asim tm 88 ASCTT Single Frame Sin format oo 8 Binary Multi Frame EnSim format D E Si formas ol raSueteGed sna ASG pt t Binary Single Brame Ensim format P 2s Binary Muli Frame EnSim format tC 85 AST Single Frame Sim format pT 8 Binary Rae Sine Pf ye ASCE Sim format Ol ee socArefmtoASmGed Note ArcView Shape File objects cannot be saved The child objects can be saved if they are of type xyz 12s or 13s ArcView Shape File objects can contain multiple objects but all these children must be the same file type MapInfo Interchange Format objects cannot be saved The child objects can be saved if they are of type xyz 12s or 13s MapInfo Interchange Format objects can contain multiple objects and these children can be different file types t GeoTIFFS although not considered a native EnSim file format can be saved within EnSim Any changes made to the GeoTIFF s legend or colours will be preserved within the file Opening a GeoTIFF that has been saved in EnSim with another application may remove this data
142. Temperature 8 OutletElevation 0 ClimateZone Name Climate Zone 1 METFile YVR IYear hbm AtmosphereRFCF 1 AtmosphereSFCF 1 AtmospherePGRADL 0 0005 AtmospherePGRADH O AtmosphereEMID 5000 AtmosphereTLAPSE 0 005 AtmosphereTT 0 AtmosphereTTI 1 AtmosphereFPGRAD 0 0005 324 Appendix E September 2010 AtmosphereETF 0 5 ForestIFRAIN 0 8 ForestTIFSNOW 0 7 ForestCanopyFactor 1 0 SnowAM 0 05 SnowTM 0 SnowCMIN 3 SnowDC 2 5 SnowMRF 0 9 SnowCRFR 2 SnowWHC 0 5 SnowLWR 2500 S011FC 200 SOilBETA 0 7 So11LP 0 8 GlacierMRG 1 5 GlacierAG 0 5 GlacierDKG 0 2 GlacierKGMin 0 1 GlacierKGRC 0 7 ElevationBand Name Elevation Band 1 Elevation 435 100000 LandUse Forest Name Forest slope 12 5 aspect 0 Aspect 0 000000 Slope 15 000000 InitialSnowsolid 0 000000 InitialSnowLigquid 0 000000 InitialSoilMoisture 0 000000 InitialSoilWaterTemperature 0 000000 EndLandUse LandUse Forest Name Forest slope 12 5 aspect 90 Other Land Use Descriptions EndLandUse EndElevationBand Elevation Band Name Elevation Band 2 Other Elevation Bands EndElevationBand EndClimateZone gt ClimateZone Name Climate Zone 2 Other Climate Zones EndClimateZone EndWaterShed EndModel ENdHBVEC EndHeader 325 EnSim Hydrologic September 2010 For an explanation of general keywords used in file headers see File Headers on p 264 The Name and Title keywords that ar
143. The times below are valid formats e 24 00 00 000 e 12200200 e 71220000 e ColumnMetaData This keyword initiates the block of keywords and values that describe the table attributes columns The keywords found within the block are e ColumnNanme The column or attribute names Specify the name for each column from 1 ton e ColumnUnits The column or attribute units Specify units as a string for each column from 1 to n This keyword is optional e ColumnType The column or attribute data type Specify the data type for each column from 1 to n Data types may be float integer boolean text or date e EndColumnMetaData This keyword ends the block of keywords and values that describe the table attributes columns File Format tb0 ASCII Table files are always stored in ASCII format The data is organized into n columns where n is the total number of data attributes The attribute values for each data index begins on a new line The first value on each line is the value for the first attribute the second value is the value for the second attribute and so on Each new line of data represents the next data index If the StartTime and DeltaT keywords are present in the header than each data index represents a time with the first index at StartTime and the second at StartTime plus one DeltaT and so on If StartTime and DeltaT are not present than the data is associated with integer indexes only Binary There a
144. Type 2D Rect Cell Application GreenKenue Version SPA WrittenBy Username CreationDate Pri Apr 15 2005 11 20 AM EE EP AA AA AA AA AA E E E EE E E E EE A E E Ag E E E E E E Projection Cartesian Ellipsoid Unknown AttributeName 1 Soil Moisture rOrigin 02000000 SyOrtgin 0 000000 it 300 Appendix A September 2010 FrameTime 313 00 00 000 xCount 27 YCOUNE 38 xDelta 1 000000 yDelta 1 000000 EndHeader For an explanation of the common keywords used in r2c files see File Headers on p 264 The remaining keywords used in 2D rectangular cell grid files are similar to those used in rectangular grid files e xOrigin This is the x coordinate of the point in the bottom left corner of the grid e yOrigin This is the y coordinate of the point in the bottom left corner of the grid e xCount The number of points or vertices in each row of the grid along the x direction e yCount The number of points or vertices in each column of the grid along the y direction e xDelta The distance between two adjacent points in a row e yDelta The distance between two adjacent points in a column e Angle The clockwise angle of rotation in degrees of the grid about the origin or bottom left corner An additional keyword is sometimes used in r2c files e FrameTime When data in an r2c grid is extracted from a data file containing time variable information this keyword is
145. Y maa 212 TUNG Deaden aaah 270 672 a eo eo ee ere 10 NCO e 4 WC ClOL aaa AA NAAN 10 CO a0 Alka mac 4 Regular Grid See Rectangular Grid Relief Potential 157 Report View u 1 1 a 49 Resampling Data 80 REN PIGS mO 311 RUIE eer 87 S Selection Info Uu 84 Shortcut menu VIC WN ai E 5 Simultaneous Displays 124 Slope Analysis ccccsseeeeeeees 164 1 0 0 oe 91 September 2010 Spherical View Uu 46 SRTM Grid file u 1 1111 305 Status Bar 1 dimensional view 6666 35 2 dimensional VIEW u s 41 3 dimensional VIEW u s 43 PONG ANA AG 38 report VIEW ee 49 spherical view 47 Stream Strahler Order 142 Stream Power Uu 156 Surfer Grid file 1 11 1111 304 Surfer Grid files 270 Synchronizing 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 63 I T3 Mesh See Triangular Mesh Tables x coscenecrecncnsssutsseesseacencuss 11 293 file format anG MADAPA esate 294 binary 294 KE NATEN amahan 293 LEON E E NGANGA daa 4 Telemac EnSim 1 1111 l Time Series 96 288 computing distribution 111 Cumulative SUM 110 SCSI a E 104 file format PSC DI aa A 290 CVG E 290 DING maana 290 Ty 0G Os AA 291 type 4 asana nk 291 DEO anan 292 PINAL kaaa 292 file header 0 eee eee 288 289 flow duration curve 666 110 TC TANG cai oscccaeatarc
146. a Attribute types are se Float e integer e boolean Appendix A September 2010 e CENT e date e oneof In the file data the text or date must be enclosed by double quotation marks If this keyword is not used the attribute type is not specified and the attribute 1s given the default type of floating point float If the attribute type oneof is used a list of character strings words enclosed in double quotes must follow on the same line as the type declaration In the body of the file integers are used to index these character strings For example a 3 in the file body that corresponds to an attribute with the type oneof would be assigned the third character string on the list on the AttributeType keyword line e SourceFile Optional only used with data extraction files States the name of the file from which the data was extracted e FrameTime Optional only used with data extraction files States the simulation time at which the data was extracted Applicable to data extraction files carrying data from one frame of a parent file containing time varying data e EndHeader Required Always the last keyword in a header Anything appearing after this keyword is considered part of the body of the file Comments begin with the pound character All characters following on a line are ignored The copyright comment is the same for each file The DataType comment depends on the type of file It corresponds t
147. a ae see whan 21 Ware ODA Stew tat ot heehee wake eee ae een ett eine eee 25 ASAT AMDE S aNG Bee Bee ede Bee 0 PA NAGA BYE SS we 26 1 4 3 4 2 Coordinate Systems 0 0 ce ee 26 1 4 3 4 3 Coordinate System Converting Projections 21 e To change the projection of the object 00 0000 ee 27 1 4 3 4 4 Coordinate Systems Assigning Projections 21 e To assign a coordinate system to an object 27 TASAS Elso Sn na ba kan Bag Wa dok GA DAG HALAL RA ee no eae 28 1 4 3 4 6 Selecting a Coordinate System 29 ADD Meta DIa gout eel eae kee awe eed esate hala 31 Vil Green KenueSeptember 2010 1 4 3 6 Applying Changes to an Object s Properties 31 1 4 3 7 Copying Data Item Properties Aa 31 e To copy data item properties aa 31 Er MEWS ap he seared REENT ERRANA MALE NANA ee eg NAAN AGA ea 33 1 5 1 Creating a View Window 00 ees 33 1 5 2 Removing a View Window 2 000 eee ees 33 1 5 3 Properties Shared by all View Types 33 1 5 3 1 The Properties Dialog a 34 1 5 4 The 1D View Window aaa 34 1 5 4 1 Labels of Axes in a 1D View aa 35 1 5 4 2 The 1D View Window Status Bar 20000 35 1 5 4 3 Manipulating the 1D View a 36 1 5 4 4 Display Properties of the 1D View Window
148. a smaller number will produce a cross section containing more points The length 1s divided by the value entered to determine the new pointCount value and the points are equally spaced along the line 3 After entering the new value click Ok 4 2 1 5 6 Interpolating a Cross Section If data is available for the segments on either side of a cross section that data can be used to produce a cross section for a segment that resembles a combination of its neighbours To interpolate data from two cross sections 1 With the Channel object visible in a 2D or 3D view select the segment to which you would like to assign the combined cross section The segment must have neighbours on both sides 2 From the segment s shortcut menu select CrossSection lInterpolate CrossSection at Segment Interopolate Cross Section Cross Section A Target Cross Section Cross Section B Segment 1 3 Segmert 24 Segment l 3 Ratio Sect A to B 0 5 Figure 4 18 The centre cross section is a combination of the left and right cross sections 3 Use the arrows to select two source cross sections from the channel 231 The GENID Model September 2010 4 Enter a value 1n the dialog that reflects the degree to which the created cross section should resemble each of the sources A value of 0 5 produces an equal combination of the two sources Lower values produce a result that more closely resembles cross section A while higher values prod
149. abase To access the HYDAT database CD 1 Select File Environmental Data Open HYDAT from the menu bar 193 HYDAT Database September 2010 2 The HYDAT stations can be accessed for all of Canada or by individual province Select one of the choices shown in Figure 3 1 Environmental Data F COCD H CC Aberta Load Selected Station Search by ID Figure 3 1 This menu is used to access the HYDAT database on CD Once the selected data has been loaded the corresponding province becomes greyed out Additional selections including the Canada option add stations to the HYDAT object The HYDAT object is a multi attribute point set which can be displayed in a 2D view WorkSpace Ep Data Items OH 3 a HYDAT GIAN wa a ta a a IT a ar Figure 3 2 The HYDAT object appears in the WorkSpace 3 1 2 2 The HYDAT MDB Database The HY DAT MDB Database is contained within a single file named Hydat mdb This version of the HYDAT database includes some fields that aren t available in the CD version The HYDAT MDB Database can be obtained from Environment Canada To access the HY DAT MDB Database you must have Microsoft Access 2007 or the Microsoft Access 2007 Runtime Library installed on your computer The latter can be downloaded from the Microsoft website Note that if you are using a 64 bit Operating System you ll need to install the 64 bit version of Microsoft Access 2007 or the Microsoft Access 2007
150. ack is extremely deep e Soil variables FC This is the field capacity of the soil in millimetres The default value is 200 This indicates the maximum amount of water that the soil can retain BETA This controls the relationship between soil infiltration and soil water release The default value is 1 Values less than this indicate a delayed response while higher values indicate that runoff will exceed infiltration LP This is the soil moisture content as a proportion of FC below which evaporation becomes supply limited meaning that actual evaporation will be less than potential evaporation This value must be between 0 and 1 and the default value is 0 7 e Glacier variables 255 The HBV EC Model September 2010 e MRG This is the ratio of melt of glacier ice to seasonal snow at the same air temperature The default value is 2 and the minimum is 1 There is no maximum value This account for the difference in albedo between ice and snow resulting in a greater amount of energy being needed to melt the same amount of ice as snow e AG This is the factor controlling the relation between glacial snowpack water equivalent and runoff coefficient per millimetre This simulates the effect of sub glacial drainage systems The default value is 0 05 The value is typically between 0 and 0 2 e DKG This is the difference between the minimum and maximum outflow coefficients for glacier water storage per day The default value is
151. acted see Extracting Time Series under Extracting Data on p 96 from a model of water depth over time After 71 hours of simulated time the depth of the water was 2 18931 m 1 4 3 4 Spatial The Spatial tab shows the x and y extents of the object The units of the extents distances and locations depend on those used in the source file i e 1f all data in the source file are in units of feet then the values shown in the Spatial Tab will have units of feet This tab is not available for 1D data or objects that contain other objects An example of the Spatial tab is shown below There are two main sections on the Spatial tab The Attributes section describes the origin node count delta extent and angle of the data item The Coordinate System section describes the projection and datum of the coordinate system Both of these sections are discussed further in the following sections This page varies for different object types Following these sections 1s a list of criteria for coordinate system selection 25 EnSim Core September 2010 Properties of Example Object i x Display ColorScale Data Spatial Meta Data Attributes ka Y Origin of o Max 4900151 E016A74 Min 0900268 13762171 Extent 39998832 40000 326 Coordinate System Projection Assign UTM X UTM one 18 Ellipsoid WGS84 Figure 1 11 The Spatial tab of the Properties dialog has two sections 1 4 3 4 1 Attributes
152. an unknown coordinate system in a view with a known coordinate system e Data Item Coordinate System Known View Coordinate System Identical 29 EnSim Core September 2010 If both the data item and the view have identical coordinate systems the object can be dragged onto the view e Data Item Coordinate System Known View Coordinate System Different If the data item has a coordinate system different from the view a warning message similar to the dialog shown below will appear x ERROR Data Object Example Object Can t be displayed in 2D View 1 ERROR Coordinate systems do not match Object Example Object CoordSys UTM Zone 10 GRS80 View CoordSys LatLong GR380 180 Figure 1 15 This error message is shown when an object s coordinate system does not match that of its view e New Data Item Created in View All new data items created in a view will acquire the coordinate system of the view e Data Item Extracted from Data Item with Existing Coordinate System Data items extracted from other objects items will acquire the coordinate system of their parent object e Multiple Data Items in View Changing the coordinate system of a data item in a view with multiple data items displayed will not change the coordinate system of the view To view the object that has had its coordinate system changed move it to anew view or change it back to the coordinate system of the view If only one object is in the view then
153. anadian Hydraulics Centre National Research Council c 1998 2005 DataType HBV EC Parameter Set it Application GreenKenue Version Se te o WrittenBy Username CreationDate Fri Dec 16 2005 03 23 PM it ma a ic EE AA AA E AA AA AA a es Projection Cartesian Ellipsoid Sphere SourceWatershedFile SampleWaterShed wsd it AttributeName 1 Elevation AttributeName 2 Direction FlowAlgorithm AT SGarch it HydroGrid XO 10 481900 000000 yOrigin 5462000 000000 XCOuUnt 360 YGOUNE 640 xDelta 50 000000000000 yDelta 50 000000000000 Angle 0 000000 Name SampleDEM EndHydroGrid 323 EnSim Hydrologic September 2010 it HydroChannels DrainageAreaThreshold 2 000000 MinWaterShedArea 150 000000 MinAdjWaterShedArea 1 0 O000000 OutletsViewable 0 Title Network Name Channels EndHydroChannels it Basin 1 Name Basin 1 Outlet x 489700 000000 Outlet y 5463100 000000 Title Basin Name Basin 1 EndBasin it AHBVEC 1 Spatial NodeCount 86029 Elevations Levels 4 600 900 1305 2 EndElevations Slopes Levels 2 2b EndSlopes Aspects Type 2 EndAspects EndSpatial Model WaterShed Name SampleWatershed ModelTimeStep 24 StartDate 1996 10 01 00 00 EndDate 1997 09 30 00 00 RoutingModel Parallel RUNoTrIKE 0 4 RunoffAlpha 0 3 BUNOTIKO Val RunoffFRAC O InitialFastReservoirDischarge 10 InitialSlowReservoirDischarge 10 InitialFastReservoirTemperature 8 InitialSlowReservoir
154. ancel ka F532 Y 66 809 Lance Figure 1 54 This dialog box is used to edit points within line sets 2 The X and Y coordinates at the selected point on the 2D or 3D Line can be changed Once the coordinates have been changed press DE 1 6 3 3 1 Transferring Lines within Line Sets To transfer a line from one Line Set to another 1 Within the View select the line segment that you d like to transfer 2 Select Edit Line Set Cut from the menu bar or Cut from the shortcut menu The line segment has now been removed from its Line Set and stored in memory You can now move it to a different Line Set by pasting or appending 3 In the WorkSpace select the Line Set to which you d like to add the line segment 76 Section 1 6 Tools September 2010 4 Select Edit Line Set Paste from the menu bar or Paste from the shortcut menu The line segment has now been added to the new Line Set To add the line segment to more Line Sets select each of them and select Paste again To duplicate a line in two or more Line Sets 1 Within the View select the line segment that you d like to duplicate 2 Select Edit Line Set Copy from the menu bar or Copy from the shortcut menu The line segment has now been stored in memory but also remains in its original Line Set 3 In the WorkSpace select the Line Set to which you d like to add the line segment Note You can also select the Line Set from which you copied the lin
155. and End Frame boxes respectively If the Start Frame comes after the End Frame only the Start Frame will be extracted e All Frames This option extracts a subset from all frames of the parent mesh 6 Click DE and enter a filename for the subset The subset will be displayed in the WorkSpace as a child object of the parent mesh Extract Mesh Subset From x TRACER Where Elements are within the Polygon new ClosedLine 0 Select Frames Time steps Current Frame 133 of 1 33 Frame Option Start Frame End Frame Cancel Figure 1 79 This dialog is used to extract a subset of a mesh 1 6 5 9 2 Extracting the Edge of a Mesh To extract the edge of a mesh 1 In the WorkSpace select the mesh whose edge you wish to extract 2 From the menu bar select Tools 3T3 Mesh gt Extract Edges Shorelines The nodes that form the edge of the mesh will be extracted as a 2D line set which will be created as a child object of the parent mesh 1 6 5 9 3 Extracting Edge Lengths From a Mesh To extract the edge lengths of a mesh 1 In the WorkSpace select the mesh whose edge lengths you which to extract 2 From the menu bar select Tools 5T3 Mesh sExtract EdgeLengths The resultant mesh will be created as a child object of the parent mesh The EdgeLengths mesh contains the same nodes but the value of each node is equal to the average of its distance from its neighbours 102 Section 1 6 T
156. and non time varying data can be saved in binary format The format used is very similar to that found in time varying rectangular grid files The primary difference is that the values are listed for each cell instead of each vertex One record 1s saved for each time step of the data item The first numbers in each record comprise the record header as described in the section Binary Files under ASCII and Binary Files on p 268 302 Appendix A September 2010 After the record header are a sequential collection of sub records representing the values for each cell of the grid for each data attribute Each data attribute sub record stores n values where n is the total number of cells in the grid Each value is a 4 byte floating point number The values for each cell are listed in order beginning at zero Vl of Al V2ofAl1 Vnof Al V1 of A2 V2ofA2 Vnof A2 VI of An V2 of An Vnof Ap Vl of Al V2o0fAl Vnof Al V1 of A2 V2 o0f A2 VnofA2 V1 of An V2 of An Vnof Ap Vl of Al V2o0fAl Vnof Al V1 of A2 V2 o0f A2 Vnof A2 VI of An V2 of An Vnof Ap e RH Record Header numbered from 1 to m Each frame has it s own record header e WV Node value VI is the value of the first cell and Vn is the value of the last cell The order of these values corresponds to the order of the cells of the grid e A Attribute A1 is the first attribute Ap is the last Note The number of attributes is
157. and use category and click OK You ll see the area on the map change colour to match the new land use type In either case you can check the Area column on the appropriate tab on the Basin panel to confirm that the changes have been applied To 1dentify a zone using a GeoTIFF If you have a GeoTIFF that describes the climate zones or land use regions the process 1s similar to using polygons Note If you re describing land use regions the GeoTIFF must have no more than four classes numbered from 0 to 3 corresponding to the land use classes used by HBV EC Undescribed areas will retain the default value of 0 for Open land See The Land Use Tab on p 245 for more information on these classes and see Classification of a GeoTIFF Image on p 130 for more information on reclassifying a GeoTIFF 1 From the menu bar select File 31Import 5GeoTIFF and select the GeoTIFF that you re using 2 Within the WorkSpace select the mesh corresponding to the map you re identifying either Climate Zones or Land Use Regions and select Tools Map Object from the menu bar 3 From the dialog box select the GeoTIFF that identifies the zone Click OK The areas of the map will automatically be assigned to categories based on the value of the corresponding area on the GeoTIFF 249 The HBV EC Model September 2010 To identify a climate zone using points 1 Create or load a Point Set object with a point at the centre of each of the clima
158. ankfull capacities Once the default data attributes are calculated they should be checked for accuracy The default values are automatically calculated for a newly created Watflood Map when the watershed object is dropped into the Watflood Map object To reset the data attributes to their default values make sure that the appropriate watershed object is associated with 1 e is a child of the Watflood Map Select the command Collect Data From Watershed from the shortcut menu of the Watflood Map Note Changes to the data attributes will be lost except for land use class attributes 2 3 1 4 3 Displaying Different Data Attributes in the Watflood Map To display the same data attributes for all cells 1 Ensure that the Watflood Map is displayed in a 2D or 3D view 2D is preferable 2 Double click on the Watflood Map in the WorkSpace A Properties dialog will appear 3 In the Data tab select an attribute in the list and click ___ APPI A green check mark will appear next to the selected attribute The Watflood Map will be updated in the view Properties of new Watilood Map i x Map Gen Display ColorScale ata Spatial Meta mik ea Land Cover Attibutes Options Land Cover a Dee er Contour Interval Attribute Min Max Units Channel Elewation EL 0 158 m 2 Drainage Area FAAL 0 Ir X 3 Drainage direction 5 0 o 4 River Class IEM 0 0 0 5 Contour Density ROUGH 40 b Channel Densit
159. aphic Curve The hypsographic curve also known as a hypsometric curve shows the percentage of a watershed that is below an elevation The hypsographic curve is extracted from the basin object of the watershed Select a Basin from the Watershed in the WorkSpace and select Tools Watershed 5Extract Hypsographic Curve from the menu bar The curve appears as an XY data item which is shown as a child of the Basin object This curve can be viewedin a 1D View 159 Green Kenue September 2010 1D iew 3 fa 42000 2 3 Value 103 404 metres Figure 2 31 The data probe on this curve indicates that 42 of the basin is below 103 404 m in elevation The x axis 1s normalized between 0 and 100 The curve is created by using a sorting algorithm that determines the percentage of the watershed that is below a given elevation 2 2 1 13 Extracting Basin Flow Path Distances The flow path distance from each nodes within a basin to the outlet of the basin can be extracted as a surface Select the basin in the WorkSpace or a point on the basin boundary and then select Tools Watershed Extract Basin Flow Path Distances from the menu bar 160 Section 2 2 Hydrologic Tools September 2010 Figure 2 32 A surface representing flow path distances to the outlet extracted from a selected basin shown in 3D view 2 2 1 14 Drainage Area Ratio Analysis The Drainage Area Ratio DAR Analysis tool allows for the estimation of channel flow
160. ar application Some Properties tabs may be quite different for some objects especially those that are specific to one EnSim application The Properties tabs may also be embedded 1n dialogs that are specific to a particular application For example a Parameter Set dialog has the Standards Tabs along with other meta data such as variable names and values 1 4 3 1 Display Properties The display tab allows you to change the rendering style of the object as well as the vertical position Vertical position only applies to objects being displayed in a 3D window The display tab also allows you to change the display style of lines and or points Display options are similar for objects that have similar characteristics For example an ArcView shape file and an EnSim isoline will have similar display properties because both are line sets Recall that similar objects have the same icon displayed in the WorkSpace The following figure is an example of a Display properties tab 17 EnSim Core September 2010 Properties of Example Object ki Display ColorScale Data Spatial Meta Data Rendering wireframe Y Style Visible Transparent Monochrome B W Clip Contours Animate i Line width zH Foint Size Scale 200 2 Shift 0 Show Node Labels Show Element Labels J Label Size Figure 1 5 The Display tab of the Properties dialog box 1 4 3 1 1 Rendering Options e Style Chan
161. arch Council c 1998 2005 DataType HBV EC Hbm it Application GreenKenue Version ore BENG i WrittenBy Username CreationDate Wed Jan 25 2005 03 23 PM AN PN AP AE AN PA ee ge ane a a it it ColumnMetaData ColumnName Rainfall Snowfall Temperature ColumnUnits mm mm degC ColumnType float float float EndColumnMetaData i StationName Sample Weather Station Elevation 430 000000 LocationX 49 57 LocationY Sao MontlhiyTemceralure 2 0 2 17 3 8 Teo 12 0 1427 19 3 19 0 14344 Ged 349 140 MonthlyEvaporation 8 4 10 25 19 32 34 16 18 23 19 21 it StartTime 1988 10 01 00 00 DeltaT 24 00 00 000 EndHeader OP LT wa 14 3 14 5 9 12 95 11 Lis 11 12 15 14 12 12 8 O 12 8 3 U 12 O1 Ul D DD O DO O O O oao O O1 N H N O DO DO DO COC O I OO O 8 Aa For an explanation of general keywords used in file headers see File Headers on p 264 32 EnSim Hydrologic September 2010 ColumnMetaData Required This keyword marks the start of the metadata information for the body of the file ColumnName ColumnUnits ColumnType Required These keywords are followed by the Names Units and Types respectively of each of the columns that appear in the body of the file The values must be listed in the same order as the columns appear Note The units for measurement of snowfall is given in millimetres of water equivalent not centimetres of snowfall In general the water
162. arge FastReservoirStorage SlowReservoirStorage Rainfall Snowfall PrecipLand PrecipLake PrecipGlacier InterceptionLand SnowWaterEquivalent SWELand SWEGlacier SoilInfiltration SoilInfiltrationLand SoilMoisture SoilMoistureLand UnitEvaporation EvaporationLand EvaporationLake WaterRelease WaterReleaseLandFast WaterReleasePercSlow WaterReleaseGlaciers GlacierIceMelt ColumnUnits m3 s m3 s m3 s m3 s mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm ma mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm mm ColumnType float float float float float float float float float float float float float float float float float float float float float float float float float float float EndColumnMetaData EndHeader data columns describing the contents of the Watershed similar tables for each of the terrain types nested by Climate Zone Elevation Band and Land Class a combination of Terrain Type Slope and Aspect For an explanation of general keywords used in file headers see File Headers on p 264 An explanation of keywords specific to or prominent in HBT files follows 329 EnSim Hydrologic September 2010 e Level Required This keyword indicates the nesting level of the subsequent table From highest level to lowest the options are Watershed Zone Band Or Class corresponding to the entire watershed the climate zone the elevation band or a particular combination of terrain type slope and elevation respectively e Type Required for Class level tables
163. ary with respect to terrain slope or aspect In the HBV EC model the snow melt factor varies as a function of aspect b and slope s as MF MFrrarx 1 4M e sin s e cos b 1 where MF pr 7 is the melt factor computed for flat terrain mm d and AM is a model parameter representing the aspect slope reduction factor dimensionless which varies between 0s AMx1 5 1 2 3 Watershed Routing The traditional HBV model uses a MAXBAS parameter to transform fast and slow reservoir releases into streamflow The HBV EC model does not use a weighting function to distribute reservoir releases from the model Output from each reservoir is totalled to predict the discharge for the given model time step 5 1 3 References Bergstrom S 1995 The HBV Model In V P Singh editor Computer Models of Watershed Hydrology Water Resources Publications Highlands Ranch Colorado pp 443 470 Lindstrom G Johansson B Persson M Gardelin M and Bergstrom S 1997 Development and test of the distributed HBV 96 hydrological model J Hydrol 201 272 288 Moore R D 1993 Application of a conceptual streamflow model in a glacierized drainage ba sin J Hydrol 150 151 168 5 2 THE HBV EC INTERFACE The parameters required to execute the HBV EC model are stored in a data file with the extension HBV For more information on the structure of this file see The HBV EC Parameter Set File on p 323 Within the WorkSpace the parameters are d
164. ast Note The number of attributes 1s determined from the AttributeName keywords in the file header The above grid illustrates the layout of a binary r2s file for a grid containing n nodes p attributes and data varying over m frames Each scalar value 1s a 4 byte floating point number For Vector data there are two data sets contained within the file The first gives the x component of the vector at each point of the grid and the second gives the y component of each point The order of the values in each block of data corresponds to the order of points in the grid as given in Data Organization r2s r2v on p 271 Note Vector files are single attribute an pen xang Xuna yani Vana Vans paz arnt xang kane yani van Verne fin Xai Xana Kana aint vane Vans Similar to the previous grid this grid illustrates the layout for a binary r2v file containing n nodes varying over m frames Each x and y component is a 4 byte floating point value 273 EnSim Core September 2010 2D Triangular Meshes t3s t3v The three 3 in t3s stands for 3 node triangles the simplest possible finite element grid The data contained in a triangular mesh file is in two sections the first lists the coordinates and the data attributes of the nodes and the second lists the connectivity of the nodes making up the elements The file extensions for a 2D triangular mesh are t3s and t3v Their icons are 4 and 4 respective
165. at a selected point or along a user selected section of the channel Calculations are made using the Drainage Area Ratio method This method assumes the flow along a channel is proportionally linear to the drainage area To launch the DAR Analysis 1 Click on the watershed object in the WorkSpace 2 Select Tools Watershed gt DAR Analysis from the menu bar This will add a DAR analysis point set object to the watershed object The DAR Analysis will appear as an additional tab in the watershed Properties dialog Properties of Sample Watershed Gg x Watershed DEM Channels DAR Analysis Basin 1 Basin 2 aE sE a ee ee EAR TE TA Figure 2 33 The DAR Analysis tab appears after an analysis has been run The DAR Analysis tab has two unique tabs e Known Flow 161 Green Kenue September 2010 e Computed Flow To identify the computed flow stations from the known flow stations refer to the Display tab Within the Display tab a unique colour may be selected for each of the stations 2 2 1 14 1 Known Flow The Known Flow tab describes known flow stations located on the channel object of the watershed Properties of Sample Watershed x Watershed DEM Channels DAR Analysis Basin 1 Basin 2 Known Flow Computed Flow Display Spatial Meta Data Stations Add Remove Cancel Figure 2 34 Use the Known Flow tab to enter collected data about nodes To add a known flow station 1 Drag
166. ata object 0 0 0 ee eee 73 16 3 2 Editing PONG 22602 maam LA ce eeeokeeededoeneyeees 15 e To edit a point within a point set ee 15 e To add a point ee ee eee 15 e To delete a point ee ee eee 75 Green KenueSeptember 2010 1 6 3 3 Editing LineS 0 ees 16 e To edit the value of a line a 76 e To edit the location of a point within a line set 76 1 6 3 3 1 Transferring Lines within Line Sets 76 e To transfer a line from one Line Set to another 76 e To duplicate a line in two or more Line Sets 77 1 6 3 3 2 Editing Line Segments 0 00 00 ees 77 e To append a line segment to another line segment 77 e To turn a Closed Line into an Open Line a 77 e To divide a Closed or Open Line into two Open Lines 78 1 6 3 3 3 Adding Line Segments 0 0 00 ees 78 e To add an Open Line to a Line Set 00 0 0 0 0 eee eee 78 e To add a Closed Line to a Line Set 0 0 0 0 00 eee 78 1 6 3 4 Editing TI Meshes a 19 1 6 3 5 Resampling Data aaa aaa 80 1 6 3 5 1 Resampling Lines and LineSets 00 80 e To Resample a Line or LineSet a 80 1 6 3 6 Shifting Data Objects aa aaa aaea 82 e To relocate a Data Object aa 82 1 6 4
167. ates the name of the source TimeSeries the number of data points used in the calculation the start and end times of the TimeSeries and the value of the integral xi The integral of the tmeseries N 212 X 489686 6 5471010 0 ama computed using 133 data points between 3 00 00 000 and 266 00 00 000 ist 5 694e 004 Figure 1 86 The integral of the TimeSeries is 56 940 1 6 6 7 Computing a Distribution A probability density distribution curve can be computed from a time series This curve displays the distribution of data for a record set Only the records included in a temporal subset will be used for computing the distribution To create a distribution 1 In the WorkSpace select the TimeSeries to be examined 2 Select Tools TimeSeries Compute Distribution from the menu bar or Compute Distribution from the shortcut menu The distribution will appear as a child of the selected time series with the Distribution suffix A distribution object is represented by the st icon and can be saved as a dat file WorkSpace a Data Items E Flow Figure 1 87 The distribution appears as a child of the time series The Data tab from the Properties dialog of the distribution displays some useful information about the time series 111 EnSim Core September 2010 Properties of Flow_ Distribution x Display Data Meta Data Abscissa 4 Intervals 1000 Maimun 21 29 Minimum i Units ri SAC
168. be disabled by clicking on the True or False descriptor in the Enabled column and clicking Apply 146 Section 2 1 Watershed Objects September 2010 You can deactivate the Channels def tab by selecting the Channels def object in the WorkSpace and hitting lt Delete gt or by selecting Remove from the object s shortcut menu To add a predefined channel to a Watershed 1 To add a predefined channel to a watershed object the channel must be loaded as a 2D or 3D Line Set object If your channel data isn t in a form that EnSim can access you can enter the data manually by creating an Open Line object See Drawing Lines and Closed Polylines on p 69 for more information on this process 2 Once you have a 2D or 3D Line Set object with your data open in the WorkSpace there are two ways to create the Channels def child object of the Watershed e Click the Enable Predefined Channels box on the Watershed Properties dialog See Figure 2 13 on p 146 for details e Drag the 2D or 3D Line Set object to the Watershed object 3 To add additional channels drag the Line Set object describing the channels to the Channels def object The Number of Channels value on the Channels def tab of the Watershed properties dialog will increase by one for each set of channels added and the new channels will be listed and enabled 4 Go back to the Watershed tab of the properties dialog change the Flow Algorithm to AT_Search if it isn
169. binary 2D rectangular cell files The single frame option will save only the current frame of the component file The multi frame option will save all the frames in the time series See 2D Rectangular Cell Grids r2c on p 300 for more information about 2D rectangular cell and Supported Foreign File Types Green Kenue on p 311 for more information on Watflood Binary Output files 2 3 4 Bankfull Animation Bankfull animation allows you to visualise the streams and their potential for flooding during a particular event Based on the modelled flow the network of streams and the bankfull capacities of the main stream in each cell of the Watflood Map the percentage flows of the streams are displayed at each time step A percentage greater than 10096 indicates potential flooding of the stream When viewing the bank full animation you can change the colour scale to display flooding in an alternate colour Over the course of the animation the stream segment within a cell changes colour according to the percentage bankfull flow at each time step Time series can be extracted from a selected stream segment showing the changes in bankfull flow over time Time series are displayed in a ID view To create a bankfull animation Note A bankfull animation can only be created after a watershed has been modelled with WATFLOOD 1 Open the watershed object wsd 2 Change the display of the channels to the desired density That is show as ma
170. bject is moved in the view 83 EnSim Core September 2010 Properties of data probes may be edited in the Display tab of the view s Properties dialog box There are three properties e Persistent Popups When this has been selected the popup windows of previous data probes remain open when others nodes are probed e Extended Popup Info This option will display extended information 1f any is available in popup windows For example if an object with multiple data attributes is probed all of the attributes will be displayed e Show Probes This option highlights using a green square outlined in magenta locations from which time series have been extracted Highlights will remain visible until the time series object is removed from the WorkSpace a 2D Yiew 1 Figure 1 60 These nodes have had time series extracted from their data Multiple probes can be viewed at the same time To retain history of previous probes choose View Selection info A window will appear in the view as shown below If the Extended Info option is selected the extended information will appear for each selected item 84 Section 1 6 Tools September 2010 VELOCITY Uy Mode 491664 0154 P4691 71 000 0000256947 0 000 436748 Mad O O008225 77 MS Dr 146 695 Deg VELOCITY Uy Mode BEY 491442 658 P4691 43 000 000664364 00007401 01 O 00099455 M S 138 057 Deg Figure 1 61 The Selection Info window shows data from several probes A
171. butes which may vary with time Since the values at each mesh point may change with time each time step must list a new set of mesh values Each data record begins with a record header See Binary Files under ASCII and Binary Files on p 268 for more information on record headers After the header each record contains the values of the data attribute at that particular time step For Scalar data each record header is followed by a sequential collection of sub records representing the values for each node of the mesh for each data attribute Each data attribute sub record stores n values where n 1s the total number of nodes in the mesh Each value is a 4 byte floating point number Vl of Al V2o0fAl Vnof Al V1 of A2 V2 o0f A2 Vnof A2 VI of An V2 of An Vnof Ap Vl of Al V2o0fAl Vnof Al V1 of A2 V2 o0f A2 Vnof A2 V1 of An V2 of An Vn of Ap Vl of Al V2o0fAl Vnof Al V1 of A2 V2ofA2 VnofA2 V1 of An V2 of An Vnof Ap e RH Record Header numbered from 1 to m Each frame has it s own record header e V Node value VI is the value of the first node and Vn is the value of the last node e A Attribute A1 is the first attribute Ap is the last Note The number of attributes is determined from the AttributeName keywords in the file header The above table illustrates the layout of a binary triangular mesh containing n nodes p attributes and data varying over m frames
172. c second SRTM1 and three arc second SRTM3 are loaded into EnSim as rectangular grid files They are represented in the WorkSpace by the Jk for SRTM1 files or for SRTM3 files icons They may be treated as native r2s files e GeoTIFFs tif GeoTIFFs are georeferenced images and may be displayed in 2D or 3D views Non georeferenced tiffs may also be loaded and can be manually georeferenced in that the corners of the image can be assigned coordinates GeoTIFFs can be saved as r2s or xyz files They are represented in the WorkSpace by the icon e WMO GRIB Files grb GRIB GRIdded Binary files are used to store meteorological data EnSim supports Version GRIB files the sub contents of which are treated as 2D rectangular grid files GRIB files are represented in the WorkSpace by the sE icon WMO GRIB Files each contain a single timestep of a dataset You can load multiple timesteps as a single R2S file by selecting File Import WMO GRIB Files Multiple GRIB Files from the menu bar Select the files and click Open You ll then be prompted to save the GRIB files as a single R2S file which is loaded automatically The files will be sorted sequentially according to the Canadian Meteorological Centre naming convention for GRIB files which is detailed on the Environment Canada website at this location http www weatheroffice gc ca grib Ensemble GRIB e html GeoTIFF Theme files thm EnSim provides an ASCII theme file t
173. calculated at each node based on the elevation of that node and that of its neighbours The units for slope may be either degrees or percent To extract the slopes select the grid or mesh in the WorkSpace and then select Tools Extract Surface Slopes from the menu bar There are three methods available for computing slope on regular grid e Finite Difference 8 neighbour The slope is computed at each node using the elevations of the node s eight neighbours A 3rd order finite difference method is used e Finite Difference 4 neighbour The slope is computed at each node using the elevations of the node s neighbours in the four cardinal directions only A 2nd order finite difference method is used e Steepest Descent The slope at each node is the steepest downhill slope found among the eight neighbours If a node has a lower elevation than it s neighbours a slope value of zero is set for that node There is one method available for computing slope on a triangular mesh e T3 Element Average The slope of each node of the mesh is computed as the average slope of all elements connected to the node The slope of each element is calculated using cross products Once the slope option has been chosen a Query dialog will appear Select the units for the extracted slope Degrees or Percent 91 EnSim Core September 2010 Cancel Select the UNITS for the Extracted SLOPE Grid Figure 1 70 This dialog asks for the uni
174. called a timegrid It is generated using the Extract Time Series tool Along a Line and is essentially a collection of attribute values extracted along a line from a time varying grid or mesh See Extracting Time Series on p 96 for more information File Headers ts1 ts2 ts3 ts4 An example header from a time series file is shown below Hit tH HH HH HHH EE HH HH EH EE EH EH EE EEE EOE EOE EE EEE OE EO EEE EEE OE EE EE EEE H FileType tsl ASCII EnSim 1 0 Canadian Hydraulics Centre National Research Council c 1998 2004 DataType Type 1 Time Series it Application BlueKenue Version 3 0 44 WrittenBy Username CreationDate Fri Apr 15 2005 11 20 PM Sa a GG EG a a BG BA a AP EG NP a GN ab PN AttributeUnits 1 M AttributeName 1 FREE SURFACE LocationX 444997 593750 LocationY 5022443 000000 StartTime 0 00700 000 DeltaT 0 15 00 000 EndHeader e LocationX This keyword is used in time series files that were created by EnSim as a result of a time series extraction from another data tile This value represents the x coordinate of the location of the data probe from which the series was extracted e LocationY This keyword is also used in time series files that were created by EnSim as a result of a time series extraction from another data tile This value represents the y coordinate of the location of the data probe from which the series was extracted 288 Appendix A September 201
175. ce View is being animated the vertical red line in the Result View will be redrawn at the same temporal location as the current Source View ioj x loj x dl 4 fs bil gt rol 39 Days 16 57 00 En a ma INN 4 D000 Figure 1 43 These two views have been synchronized 64 Section 1 5 Views September 2010 1 5 15 Saving and Copying Images Images from a View can be copied or saved for use in other Windows applications A snapshot of the current static display in a view can be copied for use in a word processing application to add the image to a report it can be copied to presentation software or copied to a photo editor to save the image for repeated use Static images can be printed to produce a quick paper copy of the View window display Time varying or dynamic images can be saved by recording the display data as a movie or animation in avi format 1 5 15 1 Recording A movie can be created showing animated data in the view window Movies created in EnSim are in avi format To create a movie 1 In the View window Properties dialog select the Recording tab Properties of 7D Yiew 1 x Display Recording Spatial Temporal Tools Meta Data Filename E AProjects datath ew awi lal Movie Encoding Frames 12 Frame Hate 5 Cinepak bd Quality B5 mage Size 530 ed Custom Size Figure 1 44 The Recording tab is found in the Properties dialog of the view
176. ch Council 1998 2005 DataType XYZ Point Set it Application GreenKenue Version Seles WrittenBy Username CreationDate Fri Apr 157 2005 1120 AM e Keywords begin with the colon character Keywords may have specific meanings within the context of the application file type such as the origin count and delta of a rectangular grid When EnSim recognizes one of the keywords it will look for the proper information immediately following Keywords that have no direct meaning within the context of a particular file type are treated as Meta Data Keywords can be added to the file in the MetaData tab of the Properties dialog by using the button or can be added directly into the file by using a text editor Note The EndHeader keyword must be the last line of the header Other keywords can appear in any order but if a given keyword appears more than once in a header the last listed appearance will replace any earlier occurrences Standard keywords appearing in the top section of the header like those shown above are as follows e FileType Required Shows the file type in the form of the file extension such as r2s 13s t3s and so on whether the file is ASCII or binary and the version number of the EnSim file type This tells EnSim the format of the data in the file based on its type Note A binary file still has an ASCII header so that it can be read in a text editor e Application Optional States the EnSim
177. complex polygons in the GIS file into simple polygons before applying the data 2 3 1 5 2 Adding Land Use Data Using GeoTIFFs Green Kenue provides an alternative tool to obtain land use information Classes may be generated directly from one or more classified GeoTIFF images The image s must be preprocessed so that only required landuse classes exist See Classification of a GeoTIFF Image under How To Hints and Tricks on p 130 To map land use data 1 Ensure that a Watershed object is a child of the Watflood Map Ifit is not already associated open the Watershed object that was used to generate the Watflood Map In the WorkSpace drag the Watershed onto the Watflood Map to associate the two This will not change the map s data attributes 2 Import the GeoTIFF files with the preprocessed land use classification Ensure that the full spatial extent of the basin s are covered by the GeoTIFF images 3 Optionally the preprocessed classification theme may be edited On the Classes TAB of the GeoTIFF Properties dialog enter the desired class names or select one of the predefined themes Note edits to the themes may be saved for reuse The saved files are stored as ASCII thm files in the bin Templates GeoTIFF directory 4 Ensure that the Watflood Map is selected within the WorkSpace 5 Select Map Land Use from GeoTIFF s from the Watflood Map s shortcut menu 6 A dialog will appear listing all available GeoTIFF objects Selec
178. consists of the core EnSim features common to all EnSim applications plus additional features that are specific to hydrological modelling This section describes the interface and tools specific to Green Kenue Green Kenue allows you to create much of the information required to run a hydrological model by creating a watershed object From the watershed object both the map file required by the hydrological model WATFLOOD and the HBV EC parameter file can be generated The tools available in Green Kenue are integrated with general EnSim tools allowing grids spatial GIS type information and model results to be viewed and analyzed 2 1 WATERSHED OBJECTS A watershed object 1s a very important data item in Green Kenue since it contains the basic geographical and geophysical data necessary to run a hydrologic model The watershed object is created in Green Kenue from a regular rectangular grid of georeferenced elevations This grid can be generated by Green Kenue from a georeferenced point set or a digital elevation map e g CDED DTED DEM etc may be used directly The elevation data of the grid is used by Green Kenue to generate the channels or flow paths of the water as it travels overland to the watershed outlet and the boundary of the watershed See Creating a New Regular Grid under Creating New Data Items on p 70 for more details on grid generation Accordingly a watershed object contains three object types e aprocessed DEM
179. ct At Multiple Points A list of available point sets from which the time series may be extracted within the current object are shown in the dialog window that appears Once a point set is selected spatial interpolation is used to extract a time series for each point The series are then displayed in the WorkSpace 96 Section 1 6 Tools September 2010 e If Along a Line is chosen a line must have been created See Drawing Lines and Closed Polylines under Creating New Data Items on p 69 for more details Once the new line is created select Along a Line A list of available line sets from which the time series may be extracted within the current object are shown in the dialog window that appears Once a line set is selected spatial interpolation is used to generate time series for each point along the line These series are used to create a surface which is a special time series known as a time grid ts5 See Time Series ts ts2 ts3 ts4 ts5 on p 288 for more information on this file type 10 x 500 00 welocity 375 00 250 00 125 00 1 00 00 2 00 00 3 00 00 Figure 1 75 This time grid visualized in a 1D view The above figure illustrates the time grid The y axis measures the distance along the line and the x axis denotes the time The colours as defined in the legend represent the velocities along the line as they span through time e If Constrained By is chosen the following dialog
180. ct XY data from a table 1 Select the table within the WorkSpace From the shortcut menu select Extract XY Data 103 EnSim Core September 2010 Select Attributes to extract as an X Y object Figure 1 81 This XY Data object will compare Points to Length 2 From the drop down menus in the Select Attributes to extract as an X Y object dialog box select the two columns that will be compared Click DE The XY Data object will be created as a child of the Table object 1 6 6 TimeSeries Tools Several tools are available in Kenue that allow you to create analyze and compare various types of Time Series For information on creating a Time Series from a time variant data object see Extracting Time Series on p 96 1 6 6 1 Editing Time Series To launch the time series editor dialog either select a point in the time series or the time series object itself and select Edit from the shortcut menu Ifa point is selected that point will be highlighted in the Data Points list box An example of the time series editor dialog with the selected point highlighted is shown below 104 Section 1 6 Tools September 2010 Edit TimeSeries x Source TimeSeries Name frain 1996 12731 16 00 EndT ime 2012 05 01 10 00 TimeS par 5599 Days 18 00 00 DeltaT 6 00 00 Has unita SEC anig Units mm Point Count 22400 Min Value 0 Max Value 200402421 10 00 00 rola 2004402721 16 00 00 3d 2514 2002402721 22
181. cted e Automatic Colours If this box is checked a different colour will automatically be assigned to each data object that is added to the 1D View window This is especially useful when comparing two or more timeseries e Persistent Popups Extended Popup Info These control the view s data probes See the section on Data Probes under Tools on p 83 36 Section 1 5 Views September 2010 e Show Grid When the check box is turned off the grid lines are removed The axes coordinates remain visible e Show Labels This check box toggles the axes coordinate labels Grid amp Label Colour This is not a checkbox but a colour selector indicating the colour to be applied to the grid and the axis interval labels When the box is selected a colour selection dialog appears The box will display the colour selected e Label Size This controls the size of the numbers along the axes The values represent the percentage of the view window size e Divisions Hint Enter the number of grid divisions to be displayed in the horizontal direction The maximum number of divisions that can be entered here 1s 8 As the number of divisions is dependent on the size of the window and the data displayed this parameter is used as a guideline for the number of divisions e Lock View When toggled on the ability to pan the view or zoom in or out will be disabled View decoration objects can still be moved When the view is locked the green pa
182. ction For example when a 3D line is created it is added to the WorkSpace as a child of the parent object Selected objects can be added to other objects in the WorkSpace by dragging and dropping An object can only be dragged into another object that is capable of receiving data such as a view window or an empty data item e Adding data items to a view To add an object to a view select it from the Data Items section of the WorkSpace drag it to the View section of the WorkSpace and drop it into a view object The default view object in EnSim is a 2D View window After an object has been dropped into a view it can be displayed or hidden without removing it from the view by toggling the Visible command in the shortcut menu the Edit menu or the Display tab of the object s Properties dialog box A data item can only be displayed in one view window at a time To display the data item in multiple windows a copy of the file must be opened for each view window For example if a rectangular grid is to be displayed in three view windows there must be three copies of the rectangular grid displayed in the WorkSpace under Data Items Each copy of the grid is then dropped into one of the appropriate view windows e Removing an object from another Data items can be removed from the Data Items hierarchy by selecting the data item in the WorkSpace and using the lt Delete gt key or the Remove command in the shortcut menu or the Edit menu Removing a
183. ctions to this tab 198 Section 3 1 HYDAT DATABASE September 2010 Properties of O7KFO05 x station Flow Level Cone Load Details HYDEX Meta Data U2kKFOOS Lat Long 45 365 75 805 Prov ON OTTAWA RIVER AT BRITANNIA Data Collection Period 1915 to 2000 Drainage Area Effective O km Gross 90900 km Figure 3 7 The details ofa HYDAT station cannot be edited directly e Identification This section details the location and ID number of the station e ID This is the HYDAT ID number There is a unique ID number for each station e Lat Long This is the latitude and longitude of the station in decimal degrees e Prov This is the province in which the station is located e Name not labelled This is the official name of the station e Data Collection e Period This identifies the first and last years during which data was collected at this station e Drainage Area e Effective This is the effective drainage area of the watershed in kn e Gross This is the gross drainage area of the watershed in km 3 1 5 2 HYDEX This tab displays HY DEX information This tab also has three sections Refer to the HY DAT documentation for complete information on the HY DEX 199 HYDAT Database September 2010 Properties of O7KFO05 ka station Flow Level Cone Load Details HYDE Meta Data WATER LEVEL DATA FOR 1960 TO APR 1952 COLLECTED BY MEDS
184. d The watershed object is the most important file type in Green Kenue since it contains the basic geographical and geophysical data necessary to create the hydrological model All data values in the watershed object correspond to a vertex of the DEM which forms the basis of the watershed object The file extension for a watershed object is wsd and it is represented in the WorkSpace by the icon The three data objects that are contained within a watershed objects are also represented by icons The DEM has the icon of a 2D scalar rectangular grid gp the channel object has the network icon 4 and the Basin has a unique icon j The basin object otherwise has the properties of a 3D line set File Headers wsd An example of a watershed object file header is shown below tit HHH HH HH HHH HEE HH HH HH EEE HH HH EH EEE EE EE EE EEE HOE EE EEE EEE EE EEE EEE H FileType wsd ASCII EnSim 1 0 Canadian Hydraulics Centre National Research Council c 1998 2005 DataType WaterShed it Application GreenKenue Version Ba WrittenBy Username CreationDate Pri Apr 15 2005 11 20 AM pn BG a aE neo AO a E papa T aa AG GA a E E E AB iab EEEE GA o E PE ee ai a Name Watershed Projection LatLong Ellipsoid NAD80 AttributeName 1 Elevation AttributeName 2 Direction it FlowAlgorithm AT Scarch it HydroGrid KORTOLI 409000 000000 VOK1G11f 4978000 000000 XCount 101 yCount 101 xDelta 400 000000000
185. d r2s containing the digital elevation data used in the delineation of the watershed The Meta Data tab indicates the source data from which the DEM was created The DEM appears as a child of the watershed object in the WorkSpace 140 Section 2 1 Watershed Objects September 2010 Properties of New Watershed x Watershed DEM Channels Basin 1 Display ColorScale Data Spatial Meta Data Scale 1 Rendering wireframe bd Style Visible Monochrome CU fe Clip Contours id Line Width 3 Point Size Z Shift Grid Step Xx 1 Grid Step Y 14 Figure 2 8 The DEM tab is accessible as a child of the watershed object 2 1 3 2 1 Checking for Errors and Editing the DEM Delineation of channels and the watershed boundary by EnSim is only as good as the DEM It is important to check the channels and watershed boundary with existing data for example GIS data to ensure correct location of streams and watersheds GIS data images of the actual paths of streams and rivers can be imported into Green Kenue and displayed in a view along with the channels generated by EnSim DEMs with low resolution may introduce significant errors during the removal of depressions and flat areas For these reasons it is a good idea to examine the DEM closely For significant errors edit the DEM ideally based on accurate field data and regenerate the watershed object After the DEM has bee
186. d including Lines LineSets and Time Series For information on resampling Time Series see Resampling Time Series under TimeSeries Tools on p 107 1 6 3 5 1 Resampling Lines and LineSets To Resample a Line or LineSet l 80 Select an individual line from within a view or a lineset object from the workspace and select the Resample command from the shortcut menu The following resample dialog will appear Section 1 6 Tools September 2010 Resample LineSet x Source Line Set Name Example Lines Point Count of Selected Line Length of Selected Line 1159 9 Avg Delta of Selected Line 193 309 Resample Options M Selected Line Only Method Equal Distance Delta 100 W Create New LineSet New Name Resampled Example Lines cence Figure 1 57 This dialog box is used to resample lines The Resample LineSet dialog is divided into two parts a Source LineSet section at the top and a Resample Options section at the bottom The Source LineSet section contains data associated with the selected line or lineset object Greyed text 1s read only 2 Specify the resampling parameters within the Resample Options section If a line was selected from the view you will have the option of resampling only that line or the entire lineset There are three resampling methods to choose from Maximum Distance Equal Distance and Segment Count e Maximum Distance If this method is chosen the 2D or 3D
187. d alone version of the National Water Data Archive This large database contains daily monthly and or instantaneous information for streamflow water level suspended sediment concentration sediment particle size and sediment load data for over 2900 active stations and some 5100 discontinued sites across Canada Green Kenue provides a graphical interface to the HY DAT database with which you can query display and analyze the data associated with each station 3 1 2 Accessing the Database The HYDAT Database 1s available in two forms the HYDAT CD and the HYDAT Access database or MDB file 3 1 2 1 The HYDAT Database CD The database resides 1n two separate directories on the CD These directories are e CD HSIS6 DATA This directory contains subdirectories organized by province which in turn contain HYDAT station index files arranged by major watersheds e CD HYDAT6 This directory contains 100 subdirectories which in turn contain the station data files The HYDAT data can be accessed directory from the CD or the directories can be copied to a local hard drive or to a network drive Green Kenue first looks for the HSIS6 Data and HYDAT 6 directories below the location of the GreenKenue exe file e g C Program Files CHC GreenKenue HSIS6 then 1f not found the application searches all drive letters from C to Z and selects the first location containing the HSIS6 DATA and HYDAT 6 directories as the locations of the dat
188. d entering a new value with the exception of the Outlet Elevation which is obtained from the Watershed e Run Name This contains the name of the watershed and of the model The default value is New HBVEC Watershed e Simulation Times 251 The HBV EC Model September 2010 Start This is the start date and time of the simulation In most cases the start and end dates will be limited by the dates for which you have weather data available Enter the date and time of the start of the simulation in the format YYYY MM DD HH MM The default is 2000 01 01 00 00 midnight January 1st 2000 If your weather data doesn t contain data for intervals smaller than a day use midnight 00 00 as the start time End This is the end date and time of the simulation Like the Start Date this value may be limited by available data Enter the end date and time of the simulation as YYYY MM DD HH MM The default value is 2000 01 01 00 00 Notice that this is the same as the default Start Date Time Step hrs This contains the number of hours in each step of the model simulation The default value is 24 hours or 1 day per step e Outlet Elevation This is the elevation of the outlet from the watershed in metres This value is determined from the basin of the watershed and cannot be edited e Routing These variables apply to the entire watershed regardless of the number of land classes or climate zones Configuration This parameter selects
189. d eu NG 212 e 2D Triangular Meshes t8s t3v 214 e File Headers t3s t3v aa 214 e File Formats t3s t3v 0 aa 275 e ASCII AAAH AA AA 275 e PMA E EEE E E E E EEE ETE E E E 2 6 e Line Sets i2s is 0 0 es 279 e File Headers i2s i3s 0 cc ee ee ees 279 e File Formats i2s 13s 0 0 0 0 aa 280 e Vo Hah BABE ee re a A 280 e SIA AA AA 280 e AYZ PONT Sets KY a a ka BA riikki be ow eee ee oe es 281 e File Headers xyz nannan 00 cc ee eee 281 e File Format Xxyz aaa 281 e XY Data Objects xy dat n n nananana 282 e File Headers xy dat nnn nnna anaana 282 e File Format xy dat aonana aa 282 e Parcel Sets pel seis gaara oes ape a a ae ew ew 283 e File Headers pel aaa 283 e File Formats pel n on aana aaa 284 e POG aeran e a eA aaa 284 e Binary 2 ee eee eee 284 e Point Sets pt2 nnana anaa aaa ee 286 e File Headers pt2 nannan anaana 286 File Formats pt2 nananana aa 287 e ROOI geere ranees AA aa AY 287 e Time Series ts1 ts2 ts3 ts4 ts5 288 File Headers ts1 ts2 ts3 ts4 0 0 0 0 0c eae 288 e File Headers ts5 2 0 0 ee 289 File Formats ts1 ts2 ts3 ts4 ts5 290 e PAA E E AA 290 a NS 1S AA AA 290 e Type 2 182 wacadiedSeideaadbn eee Satur eh bee oh dhe dR BA 290 STO A
190. d from this tab Changing the Title field alters the title appearing in the header of the Properties dialog Changing the Name field alters the name of the object that appears in the WorkSpace Arbitrary keyword values may be added using the button The new keywords will be written to the standard EnSim file header See File Headers on p 264 for more information about keywords and file headers Read only fields are greyed out 1 4 3 6 Applying Changes to an Object s Properties When the parameters in the Properties dialog are satisfactory press ppl to apply the new parameters to the object and keep the Properties dialog open or press OK to apply the parameters and close the Properties dialog 1 4 3 7 Copying Data Item Properties Display properties and colour scales of data items can be copied and applied to other data items The steps are as follows To copy data item properties 1 Select the data item with the desired display style and colour scale 2 Select the Copy Display Style command from the Edit menu 3 Select the data item to which the display style and colour scale are to be applied 31 EnSim Core September 2010 4 Select the Paste Display Style command from the Edit menu All properties on the Display Style and Colour Scale tabs will be applied to the data item with the following exceptions e Style wireframe surface etc will not be copied if the objects are of different types and have differe
191. determined from the AttributeName keywords in the file header 303 EnSim Core September 2010 SUPPORTED FOREIGN FILE FORMATS ENSIM CORE EnSim supports several file types used by other applications Most are GIS related files used to import georeferenced data into EnSim For information on the organization of these files refer to the documentation from the parent application These files can be opened by selecting File Import from the menu bar in EnSim Foreign file types that are supported by EnSim include e ArcInfo ASCII grid files asc arc These files are read in as rectangular grids and can be saved as rectangular grids within EnSim See 2D Rectangular Grids r2s r2v on p 270 for more information e ArcView Shape Files shp Only the GIS features in point or line format 2D or 3D are supported by EnSim The legends and other view decorations cannot be imported Shape files are represented in the WorkSpace by the ArcView icon The data they contain lines or points are represented as children with an icon identifying the specific data type Each data type may have multiple attributes Shape files cannot possess multiple children When an ArcView Shape file is opened in EnSim it may be treated as a line set point set XYZ point set or parcel set depending on the type of data it contains Sample Arcview Shape Figure A 4 An ArcView Shape file containing line data in the WorkSpace e NRCan and U
192. ding the Canada option add stations to the CDCD object The CDCD object is a multi attribute point set which can be displayed in a 2D view 203 HYDAT Database September 2010 WorkSpace SEE Data Items fig COCO CSN Figure 3 13 The CDCD object appears in the WorkSpace 3 2 3 Accessing Station Details Once the CDCD object is in the WorkSpace you can access detailed information in several ways To access a selected station 1 Click on a station within a View as shown in Figure 3 3 All attributes of the selected station will be displayed me 7T Y CSH 1137 Name CAMPBELLFORD Airport Province Ontaria F District ID 615 District Name Lake Ontario Counties y Elevation 146 First Year 1915 Last Year 1997 StartHecNumb 4509 parli 800 44 300 Figure 3 14 The attributes of a station can be accessed in a view window 2 Right click on the selected object and select Load Selected from the shortcut menu or select File 3 Environmental Data Open CDCD Load Selected from the menu bar Station details as well as associated time series are then shown in the WorkSpace as children of the selected station WorkSpace Data Items Ef COCD CSN AAS CAMPBELLFORD a o Maximum Temperature ne Minimum Temperature e i Rainfall pa Snowfall nat a Precipitation ia fe SOWwOMGround Figure 3 15 Data from a specific station are shown as children of that station 204 Secti
193. dlock in the bottom right hand corner of the EnSim window turns red g e Xand Y These are the current extents of the view along the respective axes e Margins This controls the white space surrounding the graph as a percentage of the view window 1 5 5 The Polar View Window The polar view window can display either a velocity rose or a vector time series 1n a polar plot format The polar view display properties can be edited and objects can be manipulated in the polar view A new polar view window can be opened by pressing the FF button in the tool bar A typical polar view window is displayed below 37 EnSim Core September 2010 LK 2101 x tea Wind Data ag ms LI I 1 1 1 ay ta Hya A A 3 ip 7 i B i ra J p we ete eh ee ee ee 1 1 I i r LI LI ses Figure 1 19 A typical polar view window displaying probabilities of wind speed against direction 1 5 5 1 Coordinates in a Polar View Each point within the polar view is determined by a magnitude and an angle The magnitude is measured radially from the centre of the plot The direction spans clockwise from 0 to 360 degrees starting with O degrees on the upward vertical axis positive y axis 1 5 5 2 The Polar View Window Status Bar The bottom of the EnSim application window provides information on the current window For an active polar window with a time series the location of the cursor is displayed with
194. e 0 AA 99 e To extract a velocity rose aa 99 1 6 5 8 Extracting an Attribute Table 0 0 AA 100 e To Extract an Attribute Table 0 00 0 ec ee 100 1 6 5 9 Extracting Data From a Mesh 0 0 0 a 101 Table of ContentsSeptember 2010 1 6 5 9 1 Extracting a Subset ofa Mesh 005 101 e To extract a subset of a mesh 0 AA 101 1 6 5 9 2 Extracting the Edge of a Mesh 102 e To extract the edge of a mesh AA AA 102 1 6 5 9 3 Extracting Edge Lengths From a Mesh 102 e To extract the edge lengths of a mesh 102 1 6 5 10 Extracting Integrals 0 0 0 0 ee 103 e To extract an integral along a line 0 AA 103 1 6 5 11 Extracting XY Data From a Table 4 103 e To extract XY data from a table 0 0 ce eee 103 1 6 6 TimeSeries Tools 0 0 00 cee ee es 104 1 6 6 1 Editing Time Series es 104 1 6 6 2 Resampling Time Series 00 107 1 6 6 3 Computing Performance Statistics 109 e To compute performance statistics n 0 0 0 0 eee eee 109 1 6 6 4 Computing a Flow Duration Curve 0500 110 e To compute a flow duration curve aa 110 1 6 6 5 Computing a Cumulative Sum 0 Aa 110 e To compute a cumulative Sum
195. e LevelSourceName This is the name of the level or stage object used for the RCA Below the Source identifiers there is a description of the rating curve type used If the RCA was generated with the Power Curve function the following keywords are used e PowerCoeffLogC The Log C coefficient value e PowerCoeffN The slope of the rating curve coefficient 313 EnSim Hydrologic September 2010 e PowerCoeffHO The effective gauge height at zero flow Ifthe RCA was generated using the Polynomial function the following lines will replace those describing the Power Curve coefficients The rating curve has been fitted in the form Polynomial fit of the square root of the discharge t Sqrt O A FT BHE CHA DO F E H 4 Pen 4 CU so SqrtCoeffA 34 0 031 rSorcCoer Ts L20519 If the RCA was generated using the Polynomial function the following keywords are used e SqrtCoeff A B C D E F G This keyword defines the square root coefficient for the polynomial sqrtCoeffA and SqrtCoeffB are present for a line while additional keywords SqrtCoeffc through SqrtCoeffG are included for polynomials of greater order File Format rca ASCII All RCA objects are saved in ASCII format Only the flow and the corresponding discharge for each record used in the RCA are saved within the file The following is an example of three records from the file whose header is excerpted above 1963 07 20 00 00 00 000
196. e mouse downwards or by moving the mouse wheel down While the view is being manipulated a hand cursor W will appear The view can also be manipulated by adjusting the X and Y minimum and maximum extents in the Display tab of the view s Properties dialog box These will be the minimum and maximum values displayed on the X and Y axes An infinite number of moves can be undone by the Undo Move command in the shortcut menu of the view object The Default View command in the view s shortcut menu allows you to return to the default view which centres the entire object in the view window 1 5 4 4 Display Properties of the 1D View Window The display properties of the 1D window are changed in the Display tab of the view s Properties dialog box A sample Display tab for a 1D window is shown below Properties of 1D Yiew 7 l Display Recording Temporal Meta Data Options Background Colour W Automatic Colours Persistent Popups Extended Popup Info T Lock View Min Mar x U 26 y 1 58967 2 5 fh M Show Grid I Show Labels F Grid amp Label Colour 3 2 Label Size a Divizions Hint Cancel Figure 1 18 The Display Properties dialog of a 1D view e Background Colour The box is not a checkbox but a colour selector indicating the colour to be applied to the background of the 1D View window Upon selecting the box a colour selection dialog appears The box will display the colour sele
197. e Fora triangular mesh or xyz data with one data attribute both the data attribute value and the x and y coordinates at the node or point may be edited The Edit dialog that appears is nearly identical for the two objects The dialog for a T3 mesh 1s shown below The dialog for an xyz point set would ask you to specify the new values of the point instead of the Node Please specify new values for the Mode at Figure 1 49 This edit dialog is for a triangular mesh data item e Fora regular grid the position of the node is fixed and only the value of the current data attribute at the node may be edited The dialog for a regular grid object with only one data attribute is as follows Editing the Mode at s 42 r000 7 4 99568006 Please specify the new value Cancel Figure 1 50 This edit dialog is for a rectangular grid data item e The dialog for a line set object with only one data attribute is similar to that of the regular grid since only the value of the selected line can be edited Like the query dialog for the regular grid see Figure 1 41 on p 63 it has only one field e Objects with multiple attributes share a similar dialog window for editing An example is shown below Edit Attributes x p 453687 40 __ 5463344 000 Elevation 467 462 ID 1673 Type 0956 BSS 1 08 BSSC D14 BCDYM 035 NG bd Cancel Figure 1 51 This dialog box is used for objects with multiple attributes 74 S
198. e Series ts4 Represents a vector quantity with a varying time step Networks n3s A set of connected Segments polylines connected at Nodes Each Segment is made up of a series of 3D vertices and may have multiple attributes e g roads channels Nodes may have multiple attributes Tables tb0 A set of data values organized into rows and columns Columns represent the attributes and rows represent the values at each attribute index Velocity Roses vr1 Represents probabilities of vector quantities tabulated by magnitude and direction 1 4 1 2 Foreign Data Items Please refer to Supported Foreign File Formats EnSim Core on p 304 for further details 1 4 2 Saving and Exporting Data Items To save a data item to a file select the object in the WorkSpace To save the current object choose the Save command from the File menu or use the FH button A copy of the object may be saved with the Save Copy As command from the File menu When the Save Copy As command is used a copy of the current object is saved This command is used to save a back up copy of an object and then to continue to edit the original object or to export the object to another file format All data items regardless of their source can be saved in at least one of the native EnSim file formats The format in which the object may be saved depends on the type of data Click on the button or choose Save or Save Copy As option from the File menu Use
199. e Total Curvature a measure of the curvature of the surface in all directions Note a zero value may mean that a concave shape in one direction offsets a convex shape in another direction at that particular node Note There are no methods available for computing curvatures on a triangular meshes a 2D Yiew 1 Figure 1 73 Profile curvature shown in a 2Dview 94 Section 1 6 Tools September 2010 1 6 5 2 Extracting Residuals The extract residuals tool calculates the resultant or residual vector from all vectors occurring at a grid or mesh point over time for each node of a grid or mesh To extract residuals 1 Select the object for which the residuals are to be calculated The object must be a rectangular grid or triangular mesh and the data must be vector data Appropriate objects in the WorkSpace will have one of these two icons amp or Al 2 Select Tools Extract Residuals The residual vectors will be created as a child of the original grid or mesh and can be saved in the same format as the parent file 1 6 5 3 Extracting Isolines The extract isolines tool creates one or more lines connecting nodes of specific values To extract an isoline 1 Select the object in the WorkSpace for which the isolines are to be extracted 2 Select Tools Extract Isolines and then select Single Isoline or Multiple Isolines e For the Multiple Isolines option the isolines will be created using the levels speci
200. e between two adjacent points in a row e yDelta The distance between two adjacent points in a column e Angle The clockwise angle of rotation in degrees of the grid about the origin or bottom left corner There is one additional keyword that is not found in a 2D rectangular grid e SourceFile The name of the file from which the Depressionless DEM was generated Several keywords are used to describe the channels These keywords are enclosed by the Hydrochannels and EndHydroChannels keywords e DrainageAreaThreshold The minimum drainage area required to treat a flow path as a channel that is displayed in a view within EnSim Channels displayed in a view will have an upstream drainage area equal to or greater than this value 309 EnSim Hydrologic September 2010 e MinWaterShedArea The minimum upstream drainage area of a point along a channel for that point to be considered as the outlet of a watershed e MinAdjWaterShedArea Watersheds adjacent to the potential watershed outlets must have upstream drainage areas equal to or greater than this value e OutletsViewable Specifies whether the target watershed outlets are displayed within a view 1 indicates yes and 0 indicates no Target outlet nodes are based in the criteria specified by the MinWaterShedArea and MinAdjWaterShedArea keywords The following keywords are specific to the Basin portion of the watershed object and are enclosed by the Basin and EndBasi
201. e first part is an integer number It refers to the order of the attribute with respect to the other attributes in the file If there is one attribute the number is 1 If there are three attributes the first to be read is 1 the second is 2 and so on The second part of the keyword is a name used to identify the data attribute For example AttributeName 1 Elevation AttributeUnits Optional Together with AttributeName and AttributeType this keyword identifies data pertaining to data attributes associated with data points The data following this keyword is in two parts The first part is an integer number If there 1s a single attribute this number is 1 If there are three attributes the first to be read is numbered 1 the second 2 and so on The second part of this keyword is a text entry to identify the units of the data attribute such as m g L km 2 and so on For example AttributelUnits 1 m AttributeType Required or Optional depending on file type Together with AttributeName and AttributeUnits this keyword identifies data pertaining to data attributes associated with data points This keyword is followed by an integer and text The integer identifies the placement of the attribute with respect to the order of the other attributes The number 3 would mean that this attribute is the third in the list of attributes to be read from the data in the file The text following the integer identifies the type of attribute dat
202. e in both the get gfs pl and get inv pl files Scurl C NARR curl The main script get httpsubset pl is invoked with a number of parameters perl get httpsubset pl startDate endDate parameter level dir database For example the following script perl C t fnecpsupser p 1979010100 20061245171 IMP Am TMD 2 narra downloads the variable TMP temperature for 2m AGL between midnight Jan 1 1979 and 2100 hrs Dec 31 2006 into the local subdirectory TMP 2 The directory TMP 2 will be further subdivided into directories for every month named using the format YY YYMM e g directory ATMP 2m1197901 for January 1979 e g filename narr a 221 20061231 2100 000 sub grb for Dec 12 2006 at 2100 hours The downloaded files are in GRIB format 3 3 3 Accessing the NARR Variables Green Kenue provides an import tool for this dataset This tool allows you to create r2s or r2c files from a directory containing a single NARR variable To import the NARR data 1 Select File 5Environmental Data Import NARR Subset from the menu bar The following dialog will appear 210 Section 3 3 NARR DATABASE September 2010 Import NARR data variable 1979 0101 00 00 00 hd 1979 01 401 00 00 00 fa Figure 3 22 The Import NARR data variable dialog 2 Select the directory Path for the source NARR data by clicking on the E button to browse to the directory or by typing the path directly into the window Note When choosin
203. e of the current attribute at a particular point or section of an object see Data Probes under Tools on p 83 for information about pop ups By default the pop ups display only the current attribute The value associated with the current attribute is located to the right of the word Value in the popup window To view the value of all attributes for an object in the pop up windows choose Extended Popup Info from the Display tab of the Properties dialog of the view object An example of a view window displaying an ArcView shape file an extended popup window the properties dialog for the shape file data item and the properties dialog for the 2D View object 1s shown below 23 EnSim Core September 2010 a 2D View 1 iol x Properties of 2D Yiew 1 Display Recording Spatial Temporal Mata Data Options Background Colour Show Compass T Lock View Min blax E Persistent Popups na 78 4671 21 75 608248 Extended Popup Info Wal e Ki 43 8542225 46 7671 B7 FT Use Display Lists Grid Options I Labels Colour 3 1 4 Label Size Pt Divisions Hint f2 Show Grid Properties of OntarioDrainat l JID 39082 Display ColorScale Data Spatial Meta Data 8 75 P04 1 45 327 Lines 40120 Length 0 219 AL LATER Unclassified Line Feature FNODE 28736 a Attribute Name Min Ma p eee aa LAYER i _ a ARPOLY 12184 2 FNODEH 23551 Co LENGTH 0 218560104757 3 TNODE 29551 4 LPOLYH 12643 5 RPOL Y 1
204. e segment in order to create multiple copies of the segment within the Set These copies can then be assigned different values for example 4 Select Edit Line Set Paste from the menu bar or Paste from the shortcut menu 1 6 3 3 2 Editing Line Segments To append a line segment to another line segment 1 Within the View select the line segment that you d like to append and Cut or Copy the segment as described above 2 Select the line segment to which you d like to add the first segment This can be part of the same Line Set or a different Line Set in the same View or a different View 3 From the menu bar select Edit Line Set Append or select Append from the shortcut menu The line segments will be joined at their closest endpoints To turn a Closed Line into an Open Line 1 Within the View select the Closed Line that you d like to open e You can select the Closed Line itself by double clicking on the line between points or you can select a particular point by double clicking on it e If you ve selected the line only the first point will be highlighted if you ve selected a particular point both it and the first point will be highlighted 2 Select Edit Line Set Open Selected Line from the menu bar or Open Closed Line from the shortcut menu to turn the closed line into an open line e If you ve selected the line or the first point on the line the line segment connecting the first and last points on
205. e snowmelt while higher temperatures will discourage it CMIN This is the value of the melt factor on the winter solstice for open areas in millimetres per degree Celsius per day This represents the minimum value for the snow melt factor over the course of the year The default value is 2 DC This is the increase in melt factor between winter and summer solstices in millimetres per degree Celcius per day The default value is 2 The sum of CMIN DC gives the snowmelt factor on the summer solstice the high point for the year MRF This is the ratio between the melt factor in forest to the melt factor in open areas The default value is 0 7 At a value of 1 0 snow will melt as easily in a forst as on open ground Typically this value will range between 0 6 and 1 0 depending on the forest type coverage and the age of the forest CRFR This controls the rate at which liquid water refreezes in snowpack in millimetres per degree Celsius per day The default value is 2 This represents the opposite of the process controlled by CMIN and DC WHC This is the liquid water holding capacity of snowpack expressed as a fraction of snowpack water equivalent The default value is 0 05 which indicates that snowpack can consist of 5 liquid water before it begins to flow LWR This is the maximum amount of liquid water that can be retained by a snowpack in millimetres The default value is 2500 This value comes into play when the snowp
206. e the results of a simulation as input for another simulation This is particularly common with Run To Steady State simulations To extract a Hot Start from a GENID model run 1 After a simulation has completed right click on the GEN1D Parameter object in the WorkSpace 2 From the shortcut menu select Create Hot Start Network A dialog will appear 3 Enter the number of the frame that you would like to use as input to another simulation Note The first frame is numbered 0 235 The GEN1D Model September 2010 Hot Starts Create a Hot Start Network by extracting the relevant data from a user defined frame of the Output Network Frame Number z Figure 4 24 Use this dialog to create a Hot Start network 4 Click OK 5 Save the Out Network object by selecting File 3Save from the menu bar or by clicking HI When you create a new GENID Parameter object use the Hot Start network file as the Channel object This file contains the velocities discharge and surface elevation at the chosen frame These conditions are then used as the initial conditions for the new GENID model 236 5 THE HBV EC MODEL The HBV model is a conceptual watershed model developed by SMHI the Swedish Meteorological and Hydrological Institute The HBV EC model was adapted by Environment Canada and UBC to simulate watershed response in mountainous terrain as well as other environments Green Kenue provides the model with a two dimensi
207. e used for several subcomponents are described in that section For a detailed description of the parameters used to define the Watershed object see Watershed Objects wsd on p 308 Within the hbv file shown below the Watershed parameters appear between the HydroGrid and EndBasin keywords The keywords found in the Model section of the header are the same as the variable names used in the respective panels of the Simulation and Climate Zone panels of the HBV EC Parameter Set object See The Simulation Panel on p 250 and The Climate Zone Panel on p 253 for details on the meanings of the keywords File Format hbv HBV files are always stored in ASCII format The body of the file consists of a list of values for the parameters identified by the AttributeName keywords In general this will be the Elevation and Flow Direction of each node in the watershed starting in the bottom left corner and going from left to right top to bottom 326 Appendix E September 2010 The HBV EC HBM File The HBM file formerly known as the MET file is used to supply recorded meteorological data to the HBV EC simulation File Header hbm The header of an HBV EC HBM meteorological data file consists of a set of keywords that describe the structure of the subsequent data EHH HH Ht EH HH EE HH HH EH EE EH EH HH EH EE EH OE EH EEE EHO EE EEE EEE EE EEE EEE EE HEH FileType hbm ASCII EnSim 1 0 Canadian Hydraulics Centre National Rese
208. e view s Properties dialog box During rotation manipulations a hand with an arrow cursor W will appear During translation manipulations a hand cursor wW will appear Pa An infinite number of moves can be undone by the Undo Move command in the view s shortcut menu The Default View command in the view s shortcut menu allows you to return to the default view e Changing the view parameters in the display tab of the view s Properties dialog box There are several types of controls to the view parameters e X Y and Z Camera Camera indicates the location in 3D space from which you are viewing the scene e X Y and Z View Centre View centre refers to the location of the centre of the point of interest within a view It is the centre of the view window Note that the crosshair is always drawn at the centre of the view e Field of View Analogous to the field of view of a camera lens it is the angle that defines the limit of the size of area you see around the view centre It has a zoom effect decreasing the field of view 1s equivalent to zooming in and increasing the field of view is equivalent to zooming out Fr VIEW CENTRE Pa BE ig CAMERA FIELD OF VIEW Figure 1 25 The Field of View determines the scope of the image produced e Near and Far Near and far are clipping planes of the view Clipping planes are limits perpendicular to the line of sight between the camera and the view centre By default the clipping p
209. e views and the object view relationships This ASCII file should not be edited directly To Save a WorkSpace 1 On the menu bar select File gt Save WorkSpace 2 When the Save Current WorkSpace As dialog appears enter an appropriate name and click OK 3 The WorkSpace can only be saved 1f all objects have a file association Extracted isolines time series new Point Sets new Line Sets etc do not have such an association when first created If any of the objects within the WorkSpace need to be saved you will be prompted to do so Click Yes to save the objects or No to cancel the Save WorkSpace operation 1 Give each of the objects an appropriate name and click OK to save them If you click Cancel for any object the Save WorkSpace operation will be cancelled but any objects already saved will remain saved To Load a WorkSpace Note Loading an EnSim Workspace file will remove any existing objects or views from the EnSim environment If necessary make sure that you ve saved the current WorkSpace EnSim WorkSpace files created by a EnSim application can be loaded by that EnSim application only The files are not compatible in any other EnSim application 1 Select File Load WorkSpace from the menu bar 2 When prompted to continue select Yes or Ok The current WorkSpace will be cleared If No or Cancel is selected no changes will be made to the current WorkSpace 3 In the Load WorkSpace From dialog
210. ead off the block of points that represent the extraction line used to generate the file The keyword value represents the number of points in the extraction line e Point This keyword represents a point in the extraction line The values are the x and y coordinates of the point e EndLine This keyword is used in the ts5 time series file to end the block of points that represent the extraction line used to generate the file 289 EnSim Core September 2010 File Formats ts1 ts2 ts3 ts4 ts5 ASCII Time series files are always recorded in ASCII format In all four types the data for each time step is recorded on a new line Each file uses a slightly different format for the layout of data Type 1 ts1 Type 1 time series have the simplest organization of the four types of time series They contain scalar data that varies with a constant time step There is one column of data the values for each time step If more than one value is present on a line only the first will be read The time step is constant and is specified with the DeltaT keyword in the header If no time step is included in the file a dialog will appear when the file is opened in EnSim that asks you to supply a time step in seconds Type time series files without headers can be opened within EnSim If a headerless Type 1 time series file is saved within EnSim it will be given a header An excerpt from a Type 1 time series file is shown below A por
211. earad Po REAR tase SE 310 Figure B 1 Binary naaawa naa ma BAWA baer sete ee eee eee oe ee ead 310 FIGURE B 1 SUPPORTED FOREIGN FILE TYPES GREEN KENUE 311 APPENDIX C FILE TYPES OF THE RCA 313 Appendix C The Rating Curve Analysis File rca 313 Appendix C File Header rca 0 ee ee eee 313 e File Format rca nnana aaa 314 e ASG 3 a pes ake hwg a ee ee NAG ee ee a Ge 314 e SELA 314 APPENDIX D FILE TYPES OF GEN1D 315 Appendix D The GEN1D Parameter File 005 315 Appendix D File Header g1d 0 0 0 0 cee ee 315 Appendix D File Format gid 0 0 a 315 Appendix D Simulation Parameters 0 0 0 0 cece ee ee 316 Appendix D General Parameters 0 0 0 0 cee eee ee ee 316 e Simulation Parameters anaana eee eee eee 316 e COnstanlS a NG a bee dew sds GG KAG a Ka a 317 e lala NCS aan cane tae re APA 319 e Boundaries 46 2444365358 G08 G4 dew ed oe re See ee os 319 e OUTOUE se EE hea EE AA AA 321 APPENDIX E FILE TYPES OF HBV EC 323 Appendix E The HBV EC Parameter Set File 323 Appendix E File Header hby aa 323 Appendix E File Format hby aaa 326 XVIII Table of ContentsSeptember 2010 Appendix E The HBV EC HBM File 0 0 8 32 Appendix E File Header hbm aa 327 e File Format hbm
212. ectilinear Grid Fl study wtrshd shp Cg Watershed Outline WTRSHD_CD 3 pig ae Basin amp boundary 5 Vie CC a pro a ba ii T Figure 1 4 T he Green Kenue WorkSpace contains several types of Data Items Each object is a coherent collection of data The data contained within a particular type of object may come from a variety of sources Take a 2D line set object for example A 2D line set object consists of one or more 2 dimensional lines The geometry of each line is defined by two or more xy points Each line may also have a number of attributes associated with it For example if the line set 1s a set of isolines representing contour data each line will have an associated elevation The data that comprises a line set object may come from for instance an ArcInfo shape file a MapInfo interchange file or an EnSim native 12s 2D line set file The organization of data is quite different in each of these source files However the data from each are organized in EnSim as a line set object EnSim uses objects as a way of taking data in various formats and putting them in a uniform format All objects of the same type e g line sets 2D Rectangular scalar grids point sets etc can be used and displayed in the same way and they can all have the same functions applied to them For example all line set objects have the same options for display and can be used in performing the same functions The same display options and functions a
213. ection 1 6 Tools September 2010 The column at the left of the dialog lists the names of all the attributes the object possesses The column at the right lists the values of the attributes All attributes can be edited from this dialog not just the current attribute or the one being displayed in a view Multi data attribute objects in EnSim include parcel sets line sets r2c objects and networks You can select Edit 5T3 Mesh Undo Edit to reverse the previous edit Undo Edit can be used repeatedly 1 6 3 2 Editing Points To edit a point within a point set 1 Select the point or node to be edited and select Edit from the shortcut menu or Edit LineSet Edit from the menu bar The dialog box that appears is similar to the dialog box that appears when a triangular mesh or an xyz data item has been selected An example 1s shown below Edit Point Please specify new values for the point at ca Cancel Ka 1270 Y 2 043911 Value 0 Figure 1 52 This dialog box is used to edit points 2 The X and Y coordinates and the value of the selected point can be changed Once the new values have been entered click DE To add a point 1 Select the Point Set to which you d like to add points in the WorkSpace or select a point from the Point Set in the View 2 From the shortcut menu select Add Points The New PointSet button on the toolbar will be selected and the cursor will change accordingly 3 Within the
214. ed below e Extract Surface e Extract Residuals e Extract IsoLines e Extract Paths e Extract Points e Extract TimeSeries 89 EnSim Core September 2010 e Extract Velocity Rose e Extract an Attribute Table e Extract Data from a Mesh e Extract an Integral along a Line e Extract XY Data from a Table 1 6 5 1 Extracting Surfaces The extract surface tool can be used only with data that is in regular grid or triangular mesh format Some of the sub functions also require the data to vary with time This tool selects a specific value for each node of a grid The result is a 2D grid or mesh a surface identical to the parent grid or parent mesh but with a particular specified value at each node In EnSim core there are several options for the type of value that is to be extracted from each node of the parent grid or parent mesh 1 6 5 1 1 Extracting Temporal Statistics e Temporal Maximums This option requires time varying data It finds the maximum value that occurred over the time series for each node in the grid or mesh e Temporal Minimums This option requires time varying data It finds the minimum value that occurred over the time series for each node in the grid or mesh e Temporal Ranges This option requires time varying data It calculates the range of values that occurred over the time series for each node in the grid or mesh e Temporal Sums This option requires time varying data It calculates the sum of the va
215. egular grids have orthogonal evenly spaced data points connected by straight lines The grid may be georeferenced The surface created by the connected points lies in the xy plane of a Cartesian coordinate system The file extensions for 2D rectangular grids are r2s and r2v Their icons are gg and fi respectively The s in r2s indicates that the file contains scalar data and similarly the v in r2v indicates vector data Both r2s and r2v files may contain time varying data which is always stored in a binary format Non time varying files may be saved as ASCII or binary data The scalar rectangular grid r2s can have one or more data attributes R2s files may be saved as any of the following formats e ArcINFO ASCII Grid asc e Surfer Grid grd e 2D Triangular Mesh t3s or t3v see p 274 e XYZ Point Sets xyz see p 281 e 2D Rectangular Cell r2c e GeoTIFF Image tif if all values within the file are between 0 and 255 File Headers r2s r2v The contents of the header is similar for each type of rectangular grid A sample header from a non time varying grid is shown below tt HHH HH HT HH HH HE EE HH EH EE EH EH EH EEE EO OE EEE EE EE EE EEE EEO EEE EEE H FileType r2s ASCII EnSim 1 0 Canadian Hydraulics Centre National Research Council c 1998 2005 DataType 2D Rect Scalar Application GreenKenue Version o YG NG WrittenBy Username CreationDate Pri Apr 155 2005 11 20 AM it ma AO
216. elect File gt New Closed Line 5 A dialog will appear asking you to enter a name a value and units for the new closed line Hint Lock the view while drawing the line using the Display tab of the View s Properties dialog Otherwise a mouse click may pan the view instead of extending the Closed Line 69 EnSim Core September 2010 1 6 1 3 Creating a New Regular Grid To create a new Regular Grid 1 Create a new grid object by selecting File New gt Regular Grid The grid object that appears in the WorkSpace will be empty 2 Open the Properties dialog of the grid object and choose the GridGen tab The fields will be empty Properties of new Regular Grid x Gndben Display ColorScale Data Spatial Meta Data Speciicatian Source Data Pi Origin 0 U T Reset Initialize Compute Grid Apply Cancel Count 0 pot Figure 1 46 The GridGen tab of a Rectangular Grid with sample data th Delta Angle Def Value 3 If source data 1s being used drag the source object s into the empty grid object in the WorkSpace The source data can be one or more point set xyz parcel set pcl line set 12s triangular grid t3s or rectangular grid r2s objects Once they are added to the erid object they will appear as children of the grid object in the WorkSpace The source data will appear in the Source Data box of the open Properties dialog EnSim calculat
217. en the top and bottom colours e Levels This is the listing of colour levels Clicking on an individual level will allow you to edit its value Clicking on the Levels heading interpolates the levels based on the Scale Style Levels Max Min and Interval e Scale Parameters These parameters are used to define the colour levels 20 Section 1 4 Data Items September 2010 Colour Interpolation Determines the type of colour spectrum interpolation e RGB Linear Red Green and Blue interpolation e HSV Linear Hue Saturation and Value interpolation Style Determines the type of level interval e Linear sets a linear scale This style is the default e Nlog sets a natural logarithmic scale e Quadratic sets a quadratic scale e Levels Determines the number of levels The maximum number of levels available is 40 When more than 10 levels are used the additional levels will initially appear black They should be customized before bring used e Max Determines the value of the highest level When the style is Linear this value is shaded and cannot be edited It is calculated automatically from the Min and Interval parameters e Min Determines the value of the lowest level e Interval Determines the interval value between levels When Nlog or Quadratic styles are applied this value 1s shaded and cannot be edited Under those conditions it will be calculated based on the Max and Min parameters Reset This button will retur
218. ent area As aresult of this approach the total number of areas is equal to the number of climate zones multiplied by the number of elevation bands multiplied by the number of land use types appearing multiplied by the number of slope bands multiplied by the number of aspect bands Note though that Lake terrain is always considered to have a Slope and Aspect of 0 For example if we have one climate zone four elevation bands Open Forest and Lake terrain three slope bands and two aspect bands North and South the HBV EC model will have to be executed for each of 52 areas each of which must also be described 250 Section 5 2 The HBV EC Interface September 2010 Figure 5 16 Even a small number of groups in each category can result in a large number of areas to be modelled To activate this panel click the Generate Model from Spatial Basin Data button This will create a Climate Zone panel for each climate zone defined on the Basin panel Properties ofnew HBV EC Parameter Set Generate Model From ial Fast Reservoir Discharge ial Slow Reservoir Discharge 0 OK Apply Cancel Figure 5 17 This Simulation panel has not been activated and contains no information Note If you use the Basin panel to add or remove any areas later on you will need to regenerate the model This will overwrite any existing information on the Simulation panel Any of the variables on this panel can be edited by clicking on the value an
219. ent legend except the item list is populated with all objects currently displayed in the selected 1D view 57 EnSim Core September 2010 To create a Quick Legend select the 1D view displaying the data objects and then select Quick Legend from the 1D view s shortcut menu 1 5 10 2 The Compass The compass 1s a decoration object that illustrates the direction of a view with a four arrow direction indicator The red arrow indicates North O45 Figure 1 35 This compass indicates that the top of the view is Northeast The compass also shows the bearing or viewing direction in compass degrees At zero degrees rotation the north arrow points up at 90 degrees rotation the north arrow points to the left Compass properties include a border background colour and bearing appearance B Colour aes ei Italics Background Bald Colour F Underline M Show Bearing Cancel Figure 1 36 These compass properties can be customized 1 5 10 3 The Simulation Clock The simulation clock 1s a decoration object which illustrates the progression of time during an animation using a digital counter 2 Days 1 00 00 000 Figure 1 37 This simulation has been running for almost 3 days Clock properties include number format border background colour and font The properties are accessed in the Temporal tab of the view properties The Options button on the Temporal tab provides an additional dialog with properties cont
220. eptember 2010 e Rating Curve The two rating curve options are listed in the top list box Select E C H HOI N for the power curve or eqno func H for the polynomial curve The default option is the power curve e Poly degree This option is only available of the polynomial rating curve has been selected The highest polynomial order is 6 The default value is 1 to describe a line e Corr Coeff This is the correlation coefficient for the fitted curve The closer the coefficient is to 1 the better the fit of the curve to the raw data e The text box located below the Corr Coeff contains all of the coefficients for the selected rating curve To edit any of the coefficients click on the coefficient name The value will become highlighted and can then be edited When the any coefficient is changed the rating curves will be redrawn and the correlation coefficient recalculated e Display The data shown in the views can be examined in several colour schemes e Default All data points in all graphs are shown in red e By Month Each month of the year is shown in a different colour e By Year Each year is shown in a different colour e Subset This area is similar to the subset tab from the HYDAT Properties dialog It can be used to restrict the calculations performed in the RCA to a temporal subset of the data Any data not included in the subset will be shown in grey After you have made changes to the RCA criteria click App
221. equivalent 1s considered to be one tenth of the measured depth of fresh snow EndColumnMetaData Required This keyword marks the end of the metadata information StationName Optional This keyword 1s followed by the name of the weather station Elevation Required This keyword is followed by the elevation of the weather station at which the data was recorded in metres LocationX and Locationy Required These values give the location of the weather station in the units of the source material Since these values are not actually used by the HBV EC model they are included for reference purposes only to help you locate a weather station within or near a watershed If they are not included in the HBM file they re assumed to be 0 the default value MonthlyTemperature Required This keyword is followed by the average monthly temperatures recorded for the weather station for each month of the year in order in degrees Celsius MonthlyEvaporation Required This keyword is followed by the average monthly evaporation amount recorded for the weather station for each month of the year in order in millimetres StartTime Required This keyword 1s followed by the time of the first measurement listed in the body of the file in the format YYYY MM DD HH mm DeltaT Required This keyword is followed by the interval between the measurements listed in the body of the file in the format HH mm ss sss File Forma
222. er and Polynomial 2 2 2 1 1 Power Curve Fit The power curve is described by the following power equation O C H H 1 where Q discharge C discharge when H H 1 0 H stage Hy stage when discharge equals 0 0 and n slope of the rating curve 165 Green Kenue September 2010 2 2 2 1 2 Polynomial Curve Fit The polynomial curve 1s described by the following equation 1 O H C xH C _ xH C H 2 where Q discharge H stage C polynomial coefficient and n polynomial order 2 2 2 2 The Rating Curve Analysis Interface A rating curve analysis can be performed on any pair of level and discharge time series For the sake of convenience if a HYDAT station with both flow and level time series 1s selected an RCA can be created The HYDAT database contains discrete values daily weekly monthly and so on and EnSim does not interpolate between data records So a rating curve analysis can only be performed for time periods when both flow and discharge records exist Note If a time series has been restricted to a subset the RCA will only be performed on the data included in the subset If the subsets of the level and discharge time series have no dates in common the RCA cannot be performed for those time series It s a good idea to reset the subsets on both series before performing an RCA and then restrict the data of the RCA afterwards This process is explained in the section W
223. er the area values will be saved in the output file RESULT FILE Type text Valid Values the name of any existing network file Default none Description records the name of the output of the simulation If this field does not exist EnSim will create it when any output of the simulation is first generated 321 EnSim Hydrologic September 2010 322 Appendix E September 2010 APPENDIX E FILE TYPES OF HBV EC The HBV EC model has three unique filetypes hbv which contains all of the parameters required to run the simulation hbm which contains meteorological data and hbt the HBV EC output tableset The HBV EC Parameter Set File The hbv file type has two variants the default HBV EC Parameter Set ASCII as described below and the HBV EC Parameter Set ASCII Without Spatial Data which excludes the spatial data This allows for a substantially smaller file size and can be used to run the HBV EC model from the command line with the spatial data located in external files supplied as arguments Either file type can be selected from the Save as type drop down menu on the Save As dialog File Header hbv The header of an HBV EC Parameter Set file consists of a listing of the objects contained within the HBV EC Parameter Set object as well as the values used to define them HEE HH HH HH HH TEE EH HH EH EE EE EH HH EH EE EH HE EH aE EEE HE EE EEE EEE EE EEE EE EH EE HEH FileType hbv ASCII EnSim 1 0 C
224. erchange File Watflood Snw SRTM 1 or 3 Grid File Watflood Spl Pit Surfer Grid Watflood Str WMO GRIB Files a Watfood Tag C Wathood Tem GeoTIFF URP E C RADAR Meta File E T ONE D Results Figure 2 59 This menu is used to import a WATFLOOD file Once you have selected one of the file types the Open dialog will appear Locate and select the desired file and click Upen 2 3 2 1 Watflood Event File Properties Upon opening a Watflood Event file evt all associated data files will be loaded into the WorkSpace Currently an Event file can only be edited but not created within EnSim Unlike most data objects Event files have only one tab in their Properties dialog Data 188 Section 2 3 WATFLOOD September 2010 Properties of 9707 x Data Event Parameters Event Name 3707 evt Event Flags Date yy mm dd hh ar 07 01 true Hours of Rain Data 44 Sedflg false Hours of Flow Data 744 bai ina Fain Cony Factor 1 ih i Ramn Scale Factor 1 a ae Snow Scale Factor 1 a a Temperature Offset 0 a na Figure 2 60 This dialog allows you to edit the Watflood Event file Refer to your WATFLOOD User s Manual for details on the Event file The parameters Event Name Data Hours of Rain Hours of Flow Data Rain Conv Factor Rain Scale Factor Snow Scale Factor and Temperature Offset may be changed to reflect the desired values To change the state of the Event flags
225. es To show the T3 Mesh Toolbar select View gt T3 Mesh Toolbar from the menu bar e D Edit gt T3 Mesh Swap Edge This tool is available when an internal edge of a mesh is selected When used it rotates the selected edge so that it connects the two nodes adjacent to its previous nodes Edit 5T3 Mesh Split Edge This tool is available when an internal edge of a mesh is selected It places a node at the center of the selected edge and connects the node to its neighbours creating two new elements e amp Edit T3 Mesh Delete Edge This tool is available when an internal edge of a mesh is selected It removes and collapses the selected edge merging its source nodes and effectively deleting the two elements The number of the new node is that of the lower numbered source node Edit 5T3 Mesh Delete Element s This tool is available when any element or internal edge of a mesh is selected It removes the selected element or elements creating a hole in the mesh Al Edit gt T3 Mesh Split Element in 2 This tool is available when an element at the edge of the mesh is selected It places a node at the center of the exterior edge and connects it to its opposite neighbour 79 EnSim Core September 2010 A Edit 53T3 Mesh gt Split Element in 3 This tool is available when any element is selected It places a node at the center of the element and connects it to all three of its neighbours replacing t
226. es the Origin and Delta based on the default Count of 100 4 Click on the Initialize button to create a grid with the default parameters The icon of the grid object will change indicating that the new grid object now contains data 5 Drag the grid object and the source data item s into a 2D view Edit the Specification options of the grid until the grid has the desired location orientation and resolution The Specification options are as follows e Origin The location of the node in the Southwest bottom left hand corner of the grid e Count The number of nodes not elements in the x and y directions e Delta The interval between nodes in the x and y directions e Angle Rotates the grid at the angle specified in the clockwise direction The origin is the point of rotation and is thus not moved e Default Value Provides a value to be given to each node of the grid For example this value might represent the elevation at each node in the grid 70 Section 1 6 Tools September 2010 The Reset button will return these specifications to their default values and update the grid displayed in the view 6 To view the changes to the grid based on the edited specifications click on the Initialize button The grid displayed in the view will be updated 7 When the grid is satisfactory click on the Compute Grid button EnSim will initialize the grid and then interpolate onto the grid the node values from a triangulation
227. esent the physical location of files rather it represents the relationship between the objects and between objects and views The top of the tree is always the WorkSpace represented by the 2 icon The workspace can be toggled on or off using the WorkSpace command in the View menu WorkSpace a ga Data Items E Fi Capilano 07 lf KANA iN poba pe Al VELOCITY UY he FREE SURFACE ia COURANT NUMBER a Ay TRACER an 7 N 669 491525 3 5469206 0 z CELERITY ea VISCOSITY 8 TIEWS E B 2D View 1 3 Pj TRACER El H TO View 2 _ te M 669 497 525 3 5469406 0 E 3D View 3 al ae er XU in ae F pe o _ phi Figure 1 1 The EnSim ASE dies Data Items and Views The second branch of the hierarchical tree consists of categories which are organizational headings for objects There are two categories in the EnSim WorkSpace Data Items represented by the 5 icon is the first category It contains all the files or data items that have been opened or created during the EnSim session The second category is Views represented by the EF icon It contains all the view windows that are active during the session and the objects associated with each view The remaining branches of the hierarchical tree are objects Objects can represent files parts of a file or views An example of an object would be a model results file in the Data Items category Another example would be a view window in the Vie
228. ewly created HBV EC Parameter Set will contain five elevation bands each of equal elevation range 5 2 2 3 The Land Use Tab The Land Use tab allows you to examine the relative areas of each land use category There are four categories that are of significance to HBV EC e Lake This category is used for water other than that located within a channel Note Lakes are always considered to have a slope of 0 zero For classification purposes the Lake category is assigned a value of 3 Note Lakes are always considered to have a slope of 0 zero and to fall within a single elevation band e Glacier This category is used for terrain that is covered by snow or ice year round The Glacier category is assigned a value of 2 e Forest This category is used for terrain that is covered with trees including deciduous coniferous and mixed forest The Forest category is assigned a value of 1 e Open This category is used for terrain that has relatively little tree cover as compared to the Forest category This may include plains rocky areas or desert among others The Open category is assigned a value of 0 Climate Elevation Land Use Slope Aspect Regions Display Spatial Meta Data Show Legend Lake 3 25 2979 Glacier 2 4 605 Forest 1 93 97 Open 0 Figure 5 9 This watershed contains regions of all four terrain types but is largely forested To assign areas of the watershed to a different catego
229. extension of a point set file is xyz File Headers xyz An example of a point set file is shown below AA FileType xyz ASCII EnSim 1 0 Canadian Hydraulics Centre National Research Council c 1998 2004 DataType XYZ Point Set it Application BlueKenue Version 3 0 44 WrittenBy Username CreationDate Pei ADE 15 2005 11420 AM a AA AA AA AA AP AA AA AE EndHeader 394520000 84 539000 22 2780599000 57107000 14 25501000 2242 693000 1 96 883000 47 631000 48 753000 56 110000 624 s118000 71 322000 76933000 32 419000 33 791000 35 411000 31 297000 65 835000 65461000 32 369000 SAs 993000 2766681000 TI WO FRB NT WO Ul Point sets have no unique keywords Only general keywords are used See File Headers on p 264 for more information on general keywords File Format xyz Point sets have one of the simplest file formats of any EnSim file type Data is always stored in ASCII format The data in a point set file is organized into rows of coordinates that position individual points in space Each line holds the coordinates for a different point The first number on a particular line is the x coordinate of the point the second number is the y coordinate and the third is the z coordinate If no z coordinates are given in the file all z coordinates are considered to have a default value of 0 EnSim can also read files that do not contain a header but do contain properly formatted data that is files with
230. f any existing Type 1 time series file Default none Description records the name of the file containing varying water levels for some boundary types e UP BOUNDARY NODE ID Required Type integer Valid Values between 0 and the maximum number of nodes Default none Description records the node location of the upstream boundary e UP BOUNDARY TYPE Required Type text Valid Values LEVEL CONSTANT LEVEL SERIES DISCHARGE CONSTANT DISCHARGE SERIES REFLECTIVE Default LEVEL CONSTANT Description records the type of the upstream boundary node e UP BOUNDARY VALUE Required for LEVEL CONSTANT or DISCHARGE CONSTANT upstream boundary types Type floating point Valid Values any positive number Default none Description records the value of the upstream boundary level or discharge e UP BOUNDARY FILE Required for LEVEL SERIES Or DISCHARGE SERIES upstream boundary types 320 Type text Appendix D September 2010 Valid Values the name of any existing Type time series file Default none Description records the name of the file containing varying water levels for some boundary types Output e SAVE WIDTH Optional Type Boolean Valid values TRUE FALSE Default FALSE Description Records whether the width values will be saved in the output file e SAVE AREA Optional Type Boolean Valid values TRUE FALSE Default FALSE Description Records wheth
231. fic point within the animation by clicking the left mouse button on the bar and dragging the bar to the desired position To save an animation as an avi file see Recording under Saving and Copying Images on p 65 1 5 13 Flight Paths A flight path consists of a series of viewpoints within a 3D or Spherical view The flight path can be viewed and recorded as an animation allowing you to emphasize certain locations or perspectives within the view or to provide a visual summary of a data item To create a new flight path 1 On the menu bar select View New Flight Path A new flight path object called new Flight Path will appear in the Workspace and its Properties window will open Click and drag the flight path into the appropriate view Note that flight paths can only be added to 3D or Spherical views 2 Within the view window move the view into the perspective and location from which you would like to start the flight path 3 Click Add 4 Move the viewpoint within the view window to the next control point along the flight path Control points should be locations where the flight path curves Placing multiple control points along a straight line usually has the same effect as placing points at the beginning and end of that line As you add control points EnSim calculates the cubic spline between each providing a smoothly curving path that intersects each point 62 Section 1 5 Views September 2010 1 5 13 1
232. fied under the data item s Colour Scale tab in its Properties dialog e For the Single Isolines option a Query Dialog will appear Enter the value for which the isoline is to be extracted The range of possible values will be provided in the dialog FREE SURFACE has limits Min 144 26 Max 148 865 Please specify the desired Isolevel value Cancel Figure 1 74 The limits of the range of values for a single isoline are provided A single isoline can also be extracted using the shortcut menu of the data item The isolines are added to the WorkSpace as children of the original object and can be saved as an 12s 13s xyz shp or mif file 1 6 5 4 Extracting Paths The extract path tool can be used only with time varying parcel data A set of lines is created following the path of a selected parcel from the beginning to the end of the dataset 95 EnSim Core September 2010 To extract a path 1 Select the object in the WorkSpace for which the path is to be extracted 2 Select the parcel in the object for which the path 1s to be extracted 3 Select Tools Extract Path A new path file will appear added to the WorkSpace as a child of the object 1 6 5 5 Extracting Points A point set can be extracted from any object that is composed of point data with z or attribute data including grids meshes point data xyz and cross sections 3D lines To extract points from a data item 1 Select t
233. g the Source Path select the directory representing the variable e g TMP 2m not the subdirectory for a specific month e g 197901 211 HYDAT Database September 2010 Select directory containing a MARR variable Figure 3 23 Set the directory containing the NARR variable 3 The source data parameters are displayed in the upper part of the NARR import dialog These include the time span of the data 1 e 1979 to 2006 inclusive the DeltaT or timestep i e 3 hours and the indices of the source data grid 1 e 349 by 277 Source Path D Data NARAMTIMP_2m JD StartD ate 1979 01701 00 00 00 EndDate 2006 12 31 21 00 00 DetaT 020000 Indices sa A 349 ee 81 11 Figure 3 24 The source parameters of the NARR data 4 The NARR data can be subsetted both spatially and temporally for output The source grid ranges from indices 1 1 at the bottom left corner to 349 277 at the top right corner You can subset the grid spatially or choose the full extents by editing the X1 Y1 or X2 Y2 indices To subset data temporally for output you can edit the StartDate or EndDate fields 212 Section 3 3 NARR DATABASE September 2010 Spatial Subset para maf 277 payal fo 1 Temporal Subset StartD ate 1979701701 12 00 00 EndD ate 1973701 08 1 00 00 Figure 3 25 Subsetting the NARR data 5 Select the path and filename for the output grid clicking on the browse button Kal or by typ
234. ges the way a data item is represented There are many different display styles The availability of styles in the pull down menu depends on the type of object Not all styles are available for a data item type These style types may be applied to objects whose icon represents grid data such as a regular grid or triangular mesh These objects have the following icons E A IH H e Wireframe Shows the lines comprising the grid without shading e Surface Shaded surface representation of a grid object e Isolines Isolines are line contours in which the levels are determined by the object s colour scale Filled contours Filled contours are isolines or contours with the areas between the lines filled in with the colour of the contour level As with isolines filled contour levels are determined by the object s colour scale e Points Shows the nodes of a grid e Arrows Only applicable to vector objects arrows represent the vector at each node The size and colour of the arrow represent the magnitude of the vector These style types may be applied to objects whose icon represents a line set or time series Icons for these objects include 8 e Lines Shows only the lines or polylines of the object Points are hidden e Lines and Points Shows the lines or polylines and points of the object e Points Only Shows only the points or nodes of the lines or polylines Lines are hidden 18 Section 1 4 Data Items Septembe
235. grid or mesh 1 Select the grid or mesh object that represents the U component from the WorkSpace 112 Section 1 6 Tools September 2010 2 Select Tools gt Create Vector Field The following dialog will appear U Component f2 All Frames Figure 1 89 The Create Vector Field dialog The Create Vector Field dialog parameters are described below e U Component The name of the grid or mesh that was selected as the U Component data object e V Component The names of all data objects found in the workspace that have the same type and spatial geometry as that of the U Component object All Frames If the V Component object has the same number of frames as the U Component object the All Frames check box will be enabled Checking this box causes all frames of the scalar objects to be used in the creation of the Vector object If unchecked the current frames of each scalar object will be used By clicking on the DE button the vector grid or mesh object will be created and added to the WorkSpace 1 6 8 Mapping Objects The Map Objects tool maps the values scalar and vector or data attributes from one object to another object Values can be mapped from objects that are in the form of a grid or mesh or that enclose an area such as closed polylines or polygons Polygons and points can be used to map values to grids or meshes Mapping data from a mesh or rectangular grid to a line creates a3D Line Data can be mapped
236. hat order is maintained throughout the file rei ee x or or Pay orPi Y of Pal of Ai Vn of Al V1 of A in XorPi X oF Pa orPi Y oF Pa VI of AT VnoFAT VI of An e RH Record Header RHI indicates the header for time step 1 RHn indicates the header for the last time step recorded in the file e X X coordinate of a point e Y Y coordinate of a point 284 Appendix A September 2010 e P Point P1 indicates the first point in a file Pn indicates the last point P indicates the total number of points recorded e A Attribute Al indicates the first attribute in a file An indicates the last attribute 285 EnSim Core Point Sets pt2 Point sets like parcel sets contain point data possessing multiple attributes Their contents are displayed as a series of multi attribute points represented by the point set icon in the WorkSpace They use the file extension pt2 The data of a point set does not vary over time and is stored in ASCII Points are only referenced in two dimensions x and y However elevation may be added as an attribute Point sets may be saved as the following e MapInfo Interchange mif e ArcView Shape shp e XYZ point set xyz When the file is saved as a MapInfo Interchange or ArcView Shape file all attributes are retained When it is saved as an XYZ point set file only the attribute that 1s currently selected when the file is saved will be recorded
237. he 2D view This tab allows you to modify live stream line cursor settings see section The Live Stream Lines Cursor under Tools on p 86 for more information e Meta Data Provides information regarding the type of window By clicking in the title field you may change the title of the view in the WorkSpace and the title block of the view window s Properties dialog This also changes the title of the view when it 1s printed See the section Printing under Saving and Copying Images Press ppl to update changes made to the controls in the tabs and keep the Properties dialog box open Press OK pi update the changes and close the dialog Either selection will update changes made on all tabs 1 5 4 The 1D View Window The ID view window can display either time series XY data items or a 3D Line Set in a graph format The 1D view display properties can be edited and objects can be manipulated in the 1D view A new 1D view window can be opened by pressing the z button in the tool bar 34 Section 1 5 Views September 2010 A typical 1D view window is displayed below 1D View 2 O x 294 000 212 400 241 600 Figure 1 17 A typical 1D view window displays changes in value over time 1 5 4 1 Labels of Axes in a 1D View For a time series with an explicit date the date will appear on the axis See Time Series ts1 ts2 ts3 ts4 ts5 on p 288 for details concerning time step formatting For a 3D line set
238. he Channels and Basin objects enable or disable the Predefined Channels tab and change the watershed s metadata If you ve imported an existing WATFLOOD watershed this tab will be disabled except for the metadata area e DEM This tab contains the standard EnSim tabs for a rectangular grid e Channels This tab allows you to select the criteria used to identify the channel locations on the DEM It also contains the standard EnSim data item tabs e Basin There is one Basin tab for each basin contained within the watershed object named Basin 1 Basin 2 and so on This tab allows you to control the appearance of the basin object by means of the standard EnSim data item tabs The extent of the basin is determined by the algorithm selected on the Watershed tab If the Enable Predefined Channels option has been selected on the Watershed tab a fifth tab becomes available on the WaterShed panel e Channels def This tab allows you to enter information on pre existing channels within the watershed See Using Predefined Channels under Watershed Objects on p 145 for details on using this option 241 The HBV EC Model September 2010 5 2 2 The Basin Panel The Basin panel allows you to identify regions within the watershed These regions include the climate zones elevation bands land use classes and slope and aspect areas The selections made on this panel will determine the number of classes to be simulated by the HBV EC model
239. he appearance of the colour level labels 55 EnSim Core September 2010 e Use Range Labels If this is toggled off only the number representing the colour level is displayed When it is toggled on two numbers of a range representing each colour level are displayed e Separator The separator between the two numbers of the range The default separator is the word to e Above The label of the top colour level indicating a range greater than a certain number The default above label is the word above e Below The label of the lowest colour level indicating a range below a certain number The default below label is the word below e Font This determines the font of the title numbers and labels The Font Name and Colour can be edited The legend width 1s determined by the longest of the title subtitle or level fields 1 5 10 1 2 Independent Legends An independent legend may be displayed in any view window The legend can be both created and edited To create an independent legend With a view selected select View New Legend An empty legend will be drawn within the selected view window and a legend properties dialog will be automatically opened To edit an independent legend Select the legend within the view by double clicking on it The properties dialog can be launched by either double clicking again on the selected legend by selecting Edit Properties or by selecting Properties from the legend s shortc
240. he border as desired Note that the text within the label will resize automatically Label properties can be accessed through the shortcut menu or by selecting Edit Properties Label Options j x Decorations B Colour a Colour E wala Italics Background Bald Colour Underline Figure 1 40 The Properties dialog of a Label e Font Allows the font type Colour and style to be edited The three font styles available are Italics Bold and Underline e Justify Select left justified centred or right justified e Decorations Determines the appearance of the label s Border and Background The Colour and Width of the border and the Colour of the background can also be changed e Sample Text Box This shows a sample of text with the current settings 1 5 11 Displaying Base Maps Several Base Maps are included with Kenue These maps can be displayed in a Spherical 2D or 3D view and use the LatLong projection To Display a Base Map 1 On the Menu bar select File 3Base Maps Scale Map Name The selected Base Map will appear in the current View if the view can display the map Appropriate views include the 2D 3D and Spherical views If the view cannot display the Base Map the map will be loaded in the WorkSpace but not displayed You can display the map by dragging it to a 2D 3D or Spherical view The Base Maps are included in several scales 60 Section 1 5 Views September 2010 e 1 20 00
241. he data item in the WorkSpace from which the points are to be extracted 2 Draw a closed polyline around the region of the data item from which the points are to be extracted See Drawing Lines and Closed Polylines under Creating New Data Items on p 69 for more details 3 Select Tools Extract Points Choose the appropriate newly drawn polygon from the list A new point set will be added to the WorkSpace as a child of the data item 1 6 5 6 Extracting Time Series Time series can be extracted from any object in the WorkSpace having data that varies with time The resulting time series can be viewed in a ID window To extract a time series 1 Select the data item in the WorkSpace from which the time series is to be extracted If you will be extracting a time series at multiple points you must create a point set before continuing See Drawing Points under Creating New Data Items on p 68 for more details 2 Select Tools Extract TimeSeries 3 Select At Selected Point At Multiple Points Constrained By or Along a Line If At Selected Point is chosen a time series is extracted at the currently selected component s location Probe the data at one node See Probing Data under Tools on p 82 for more details If At Multiple Points is chosen a point set must have been created See Drawing Points under Creating New Data Items on p 68 for more details Once the new point set is created sele
242. he element with three smaller elements x Edit 5T3 Mesh Auto adjust Nodes This tool uses a Laplacian smoothing algorithm to adjust the positions of interior nodes in the mesh to minimize distortion and equalize edge lengths It can be used repeatedly to produce further adjustments Ex Edit 5T3 Mesh Delete Unused Nodes This tool removes all nodes that are not part of an element A Edit 5T3 Mesh Make All Elements CCW This tool renumbers nodes so that the nodes defining each element in the mesh increase in value when ordered counterclockwise Fil Edit 5T3 Mesh Analyze Mesh This tool produces a statistical summary and analysis of the mesh in a pop up window The contents of the analysis can be saved into a text file by selecting File Save from the pop up window s menu bar Hal Tools gt Compute Area This tool calculates the total area covered by the mesh If the mesh is displayed in the Lat Long coordinate system the result 1s given in square metres a Tools gt Compute Volume This tool calculates the total displacement of the mesh including the positive and negative volumes If the mesh is displayed in the Lat Long coordinate system the result is in cubic metres Jai Tools sIntegrate Along Line This tool allows you to integrate the values along a line within the mesh See Extracting Integrals on p 103 for more details 1 6 3 5 Resampling Data Several types of data objects can be resample
243. he explicit time the second is the corresponding magnitude or scalar data value and the third is the direction in compass degrees There are four formats that may be used to specify the time as explained in the description of Type 3 time series 291 EnSim Core September 2010 An except of a Type 4 time series is given below This time series does not follow a regular time step EndHeader 00 00 000 0 000000 YO 00 51 885 0 000000 120 03 03 427 120 877376 270 03 58 120 103 580318 66 04 51 955 89 223187 45 05 44 795 79 220052 30 06 36 791 75 832632 25 07 28 677 75 550902 15 08 20 610 77 772019 300 09 13 351 87 234322 87 10 06 818 100 143973 85 11 00 241 112 868333 210 11 53 614 125 383311 175 D DD O O O O O O O O O O Type 5 ts5 Type 5 time series files contain multiple scalar data that varies with an explicit time step Each line of data has an explicit time time value plus n values where n equals the point count of the extraction line Like the ts3 time series there are four formats that may be used to specify the date and time although only one format may be used in a particular file Hours minutes and seconds are always specified regardless of the format although the values may be zero The date and decimal seconds are optional If the date is omitted hours increment beyond 24 An example of each time format is shown below e 2005 04 15 14 42 27 003 e 2005 04 15 14 42 27 e 0062 42 27 003 e 0062
244. he full timespan Cubic Spline ts1 only A new time series is generated by the cubic spline method using the resample DeltaT The timespan of this splined time series is defined by the resample StartTime and EndTime values default to the full timespan Note the cubic spline method requires a source time series with a constant DeltaT Interval Sums ts amp ts3 only A new time series is generated by summing all values found within each resample DeltaT The timespan of this new time series is defined by the resample StartTime and EndTime values default to the full timespan Note the Interval Sums method is not applicable for vector time series i e directions Interval Means A new time series is generated by calculating the mean values found within each resample DeltaT The timespan of this new time series is defined by the resample StartTime and EndTime values default to the full timespan Daily Sums ts amp ts3 with calendar dates only A new time series is generated by summing all values found within each calendar day The timespan of this new time series 1s defined by 0 hours of the day identified by the resample StartTime and 24 hours of the day identified by resample EndTime Note the Daily Sums method is not applicable for vector time series 1 e directions and requires calendar dates only Daily Means calendar dates only A new time series is generated by calculating the mean values found within each calendar day T
245. he given number of years Drainage Area This field consists of a drop down list and a text box From the list select lt less than or equal to or gt greater than or equal to In the text box enter a number The filter will return all records for stations that have at most or at least the given drainage area Has Flow This checkbox allows you to show only records that contain flow data Has Level This checkbox allows you to show only records that contain level data Has Sed This checkbox allows you to show only records that contain sedimentation data Is Real Time This checkbox allows you to show only records that contain real time data as opposed to periodic measurements Is RHBN This checkbox allows you to show only records that are part of the reference hydrometric basin network 3 Click Apply Filter to restrict the displayed records to the selected criteria To undo the restriction clear all search fields and show all available records click Reset Filter Note You can sort the list of records within the attribute table by clicking on any of the column headers Clicking on a header again will reverse the sort order By default the records are sorted in ascending order by station number 3 1 5 Properties of a HYDAT Station The HYDAT station properties are e Details e HYDEX e Meta Data 3 1 5 1 Details The Details tab displays most of the pertinent data linked with this station There are three se
246. he temperature of the air for each altitude band in degrees Celsius over the simulated period Rainfall This attribute shows the rainfall in millimetres per simulation time step for each area over the simulated period Snowfall This attribute shows the snowfall in millimetres per simulation time step for each area over the simulated period Soil Moisture This attribute shows the soil moisture in millimetres for each area over the simulated period Soil Infiltration This attribute shows the soil infiltration in millimetres for each area over the simulated period Water Release This attribute shows the water release in millimetres for each area over the simulated period Evaporation This attribute shows the evaporation rate in millimetres per simulation time step for each area over the simulated period Snow Water Equivalent This attribute shows the snow water equivalent in millimetres for each area over the simulated period Glacier Ice Melt This attribute shows the ice melt from glaciers in millimetres for each area over the simulated period Glacier Water Storage This attribute shows water storage from glaciers in millimetres for each area over the simulated period 261 The HBV EC Model September 2010 262 Appendix A September 2010 APPENDIX A FILE TYPES OF ENSIM CORE General Information This appendix about file types supported by EnSim is included for two reasons e To allow
247. he timespan of this new time series 1s defined by 0 hours of the day identified by the resample StartTime and 24 hours of the day identified by the resample EndTime Monthly Sums ts1 amp ts3 with calendar dates only A new time series is generated by summing all values found within each calendar month The timespan of this new time series is defined by 0 hours of the first day of the month identified by the resample StartTime and 24 hours of the last day of the month identified by the resample EndTime Note the Monthly 108 Section 1 6 Tools September 2010 Sums method is not applicable for vector time series i e directions and requires calendar dates only e Monthly Means calendar dates only A new time series is generated by calculating the mean values found within each calendar day The timespan of this new time series is defined by 0 hours of the first day of the month identified by the resample StartTime and 24 hours of the last day of the month identified by the resample EndTime Once the resample options have been chosen click DE If the Create New TimeSeries box 1s checked a new time series will be created and added as a child under the source time series in the workspace The source time series will remain unmodified If the Create New TimeSeries box is unchecked the source time series will be overwritten with the changes 1 6 6 3 Computing Performance Statistics The Compute Performance Statistics tool can be used
248. hm to support classification of GeoTIFF images see Classification of a GeoTIFF Image on p 130 The theme file contains the categorization of pixel values to colours and class names The theme file 1s an EnSim file and can be loaded and saved from the Classes tab of the GeoTIFF Properties dialog These files are stored in the Application bin Templates GEOTIFF directory An example of an ASCII theme file is shown below CLASSIFICATION THEME FILE Original name EC INDEX COLOUR TEXT CLASS 21 0x2222b1 Impervious CLASS 22 Ox00fbff Deciduous CLASS 23 0x006400 Coniferous CLASS 24 Ox238d6c Agriculture CTASS 25 0x20a2d9 Pasture CLASS 26 0x254283 Wetland CLASS 27 Oxeeeeaf Water e CLASS Each class is defined by the pixel value or index the RGB colour value and the class name 305 EnSim Core September 2010 306 Appendix B September 2010 APPENDIX B FILE TYPES OF GREEN KENUE Green Kenue 1s capable of reading all of the file types that are either native to or supported by EnSim Core In addition Green Kenue has one additional native file type the watershed object and supports twelve more external file types This extra file type allows Green Kenue to be an effective integrated numerical modelling environment for hydrological models For EnSim conventions regarding file headers and common keywords see File Headers on p 264 307 EnSim Hydrologic September 2010 NATIVE FILE TYPES Watershed Objects ws
249. hp e GoogleEarth Keyhole Markup Language format kml LatLong only File Headers n3s An excerpt from an ASCII network file 1s shown below Hit HH HH HH HHH EE HH HH EH EE EE EH EE EEE EEE HE EE EEE EEE EO EEE EOE EO EEE EEE FileType n3s ASCII EnSim 1 0 Canadian Hydraulics Centre National Research Council c 1998 2007 DataType EnSim Network Application GreenKenue Version Sao WrittenBy Username CreationDate Fru Apr 20 2007 11 20 AM a a E a EE E A E EA E E E ER PAE Name Channels Title Network it Projection UTM Zone 17 Ellipsoid GRS80 it SegmentAttributeName 1 Velocity SegmentAttributeUnits 1 m s it SegmentAttributeName 2 Strickler Friction it NodeAttributeName 1 Surface Elevation 296 Appendix A September 2010 NodeAttributeUnits 1 m EndHeader Segment 1 4 1 034 20 544756 000000 4782662 000000 244 730000 544767 000000 4782623 000000 244 729000 544773 000000 4782603 000000 244 728000 544784 000000 4782564 000000 244 728000 EndSegment Segment 2 4 1 026 20 544784 000000 4782564 000000 244 728000 544783 000000 4782535 000000 244 525000 544782 000000 4782507 000000 244 322000 544781 000000 4782478 000000 244 120000 EndSegment Segment 10 3 1 347 15 544784 000000 4782564 000000 244 728000 544807 000000 4782515 000000 244 630000 544840 000000 4782503 000000 244 548000 EndSegment Node 1 1 1 246 760 Node 2 3 1 2 10 246 762 Node 3 2 2 3 8 246
250. hs sensies 141 importing from Topaz 136 OPEN A 136 CUNE ENGE pana 147 NAA 151 drainage area ratio analysis 161 computed flow 163 known flow 162 extracting basin flow path distances 160 basin network 159 depression fill 153 downstream reach 158 drainage area 152 drainage directions 151 hypsographic curve 159 relief potential 157 stream POWET u s 156 September 2010 upslope elevation 154 upslope slope 155 upstream network 157 wetness index 66 155 Slope analysis ceccceeeee 164 Watersheds MPIC CIRC aano 137 Ae NGANGA nna 139 MAIPLOOD anap nava 135 bankfull animation 190 VC IGS E 188 Importing files 0 ee eeeeeeeeeee 187 la sss scarce ecntoscoaaavarnencecseoee 175 CPC AMI A 175 data attributes 179 6G BL ETO 1A 182 description u s 179 displaying 182 SUII E E 183 land use CIE aeai 187 geo TIFFS waa 186 polygons 183 TESEI srs 187 multiple watersheds 178 OPENING spror nkr En Ne 175 SAVING uka 187 Bigas AA NA 189 supported files 311 WaveSim 1 2111 1 7 Wetness Index Uu 155 WorkSpace The c ce eeeeeeee 3 ACTIONS PR 5 load AA AA 6 S724 Ue 6 X XY Object AA 282 APA PEN 282 TR MCAGCE AA aLG 282
251. htforward The Watflood Map will have two or more separate watersheds based on the Basins defined in the Watershed Object In the following image each separate watershed or basin is outlined in black Black dots indicate the locations of each watershed outlet Also note that the map cells just downstream of each outlet are of the same colour showing that each watershed outlet has a similar elevation a 2D Yiew 1 S000 E 16000 NY Figure 2 50 Because they do not overlap or touch these watersheds are independent If the watersheds being modelled are nested with smaller watersheds lying within larger watersheds then they are not independent and will appear in the Watflood Map as a single watershed as shown in Figure 2 51 below 178 Section 2 3 WATFLOOD September 2010 a 2D Yiew 1 Figure 2 51 Because these watersheds are contiguous they are treated as a single watershed This is not a problem since WATFLOOD models the outflow runoff and other parameters for each cell within the grid Parameters should be edited for cells that are crossed by a watershed boundary shared between two basins See the Drainage Area parameter under Description of Data Attributes on p 179 for an example of this 2 3 1 4 Watflood Map Data Attributes WATFLOOD data attributes are listed in the Data tab of the Watflood Map s Properties dialog Once the Watflood Map file is associated with a watershed object see Creating a New
252. ie PAANAN 4 XYZ Point Set aaa 281 file format cc eeeeeeeeees 281 339 Green Kenue September 2010 file header c ccccscesceeceees 281 340
253. ied NoData value is set for that point An example of a NoData page is illustrated below Data Points MoData MoD ata Value 99 HoData Values Detected Count Replacement Method Leading 3 Extrapolate Interior f Interpolate Trailing 3 Enter Value 1 1 Total 1 3 Figure 1 83 The time series NoData page The NoData page allows for setting or the editing of the NoData value as well as the detection and tools for NoData value replacement The replacement tools are as follows Leading NoData values are NoData values found at the beginning of the time series Replacement methods for leading NoData values include e None Selected Do nothing e Extrapolate Extrapolate linearly from the first valid point values found e First Valid Value Replace with the first valid point value found e Enter Value Enter the replacement value This option is available for ts1 amp ts3 objects only e Enter Mag amp Dir Value Enter the replacement magnitude and direction values This option is available for ts2 amp ts4 objects only Interior NoData values are NoData values found anywhere in a time series as long as they follow and precede a valid values Replacement methods for interior NoData values include e None Selected Do nothing e Interpolate Interpolate linearly using the last and next valid point values found e Last Valid Value Replace with the last valid point value found e Next Valid Value Replace w
254. iendsostsetoiastacrnse 110 performance statistics 109 PESAMAD HOA APP 107 Green Kenue scalar ayie AA AYA 11 ie AA 4 MOO AR 11 101 6 enn A 104 vector gail AA 11 NC OM AA A 4 HOP UCE AA 11 TIDS ANA AA GRAN NA AA 122 Tool Bar aaa 8 aNImMAHON scrii 6l PEDOT VIEW magaan ren 50 Lool oee E ee 68 calcUlat rS a iaten 115 create vector field 0 0 eee 112 creating data items 68 data probes u cceceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 82 PX UACIING CALA sereen 89 mapping data items 113 HAGDAN 104 compute distribution 111 cumulative sum 110 flow duration curve 110 integral oo eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 110 performance statistics 109 Topaz watershed file 311 Triangular Mesh eee 274 CTA maa 71 0 10 ARARO 79 ABG LA AA PAR 101 file TOMIAG ama aah 273 ASCIL sarien 275 DINI aaa 276 MN NECAdET uinen aeae 274 SOCIAL AA 10 NC OM A E 4 VECLOL acisccddassnivantonsdndedtnesesasauntedeons 10 LA 4 TES seee E AS 122 338 September 2010 Upslope Slope c cece 155 Upstream Network 157 URP Metafiles Uu 312 y Vector Field C e O 112 Velocity Rose 1 295 DAE AA ee ane eee 99 file format anG AA 295 TING headet ccctascaciestecesceenccennenns 295 OWS acres AA AANO 33 1 dimensional 1 1 34 a AA 35 display properties
255. iew When toggled on the ability to pan the view or zoom in or out will be disabled View decoration objects can still be moved When the view is locked the green padlock in the bottom right hand corner of the EnSim window turns red g e Xand Y These are the current extents of the view along the respective axes 1 5 6 The 2D View Window The 2D view window displays grid and cartographic data in a plane view The default view shows the entire extent of the data within the view with an overlaying grid and coordinates The 2D view display properties can be edited and objects can be manipulated in the 2D view A new 2D View window can be opened by pressing the le button a 2D View 1 00 Figure 1 21 This 2D View window shows a watershed from Green Kenue 1 5 6 1 Coordinate Systems and Units in 2D Views The default coordinate system used in the 2D view is Cartesian but other systems may also be used For example if a data item is georeferenced in latitude and longitude coordinates these coordinates are displayed along the axes of the grid system If the data is georeferenced in a UTM projection the eastings and northings are the numbers displayed on the axes If the data is not georeferenced the units of measure used to make the grid may be anything e g feet metres miles kilometres etc You are advised to ensure that all data used during an EnSim 40 Section 1 5 Views September 2010 session are in units compatib
256. igitizing From an Imported Image for further details Points have a location as well as values or attributes Points can be saved in xyz shp and mif formats To create a point set 1 Open or select a 2D view 2 Select the button or select File New gt Points The button will appear depressed EI In the File New menu Points will appear with a checkmark 3 Click in the 2D View at a specific location to create the first point of the set Each click will create a new point 4 To end the point set reselect the a button or press lt Esc gt The Points button will appear raised Alternatively reselect File gt New Points 5 A dialog will appear Enter a name for the new point set If no name is entered it will be named newPointSet by default Units may also be entered as well 68 Section 1 6 Tools September 2010 Once the Point set has been created the x and y coordinates as well as the value or z coordinate can be adjusted Select the point and click on Edit on the shortcut menu Hint Lock the view while drawing points using the Display tab of the View s Properties dialog Otherwise a mouse click may pan the view instead of creating a point 1 6 1 2 Drawing Lines and Closed Polylines EnSim has the ability to define new Line Sets These lines may be used be used in conjunction with other tools such as Map Objects Points and Lines have a location as well as values or attributes
257. ill be loaded as a Report view with the same titles views and objects with which it was saved 3 Since all reports created from a template have the same titles it s a good idea to change the titles of the Report and its views on the Meta Data tab of the respective Properties dialogs 1 5 10 View Decorations Decoration objects are non data items that are added to the view window to enhance the presentation of the data Colour scale legends compasses simulation clocks and labels are all decoration objects A decoration object is selected by double clicking on it in the view window Once selected the corners of the object are highlighted with magenta squares and a dashed magenta line surrounds the object Once selected a decoration object can be moved by dragging it to another location in the view window The decoration object does not move when the data items in the view are moved or resized The selected decoration can be resized by clicking and dragging the mouse on one of the magenta squares The decoration object size 1s a percentage of the window size it 1s resized automatically when the window is resized A four arrow cursor for moving and a two arrow cursor for resizing differentiate moving and resizing 53 EnSim Core September 2010 Figure 1 32 The cursor on the left is moving the compass rose the cursor on the right is resizing it The properties of a selected decoration object are accessed by the Properties co
258. ill default to zero The average upslope elevations can be viewed in a 2D or 3D view Figure 2 23 These images depict an Average Upslope Elevation map shown in 2D left and 3D right view 154 Section 2 2 Hydrologic Tools September 2010 2 2 1 5 Extracting Average Upslope Slope The average slope of all upstream nodes flowing into each node of the Watershed DEM can be extracted as a surface In this case slopes are calculated using the 8 neighbour finite difference method Select the DEM or a basin in the WorkSpace and select Tools gt Watershed Extract Ave Upslope Slope from the menu bar Ifa basin is selected the upslope slope value of nodes outside the basin boundary will default to zero The average upslope slope can be viewed in a 2D or 3D view ie 2D Yiew 1 Figure 2 24 These images depict an Average Upslope slope map shown in 2D left and 3D right view 2 2 1 6 Extracting Wetness Index The topographic wetness index is a function of the drainage area and the slope Higher wetness indices may indicate regions of the DEM that are more likely to generate surface runoff These regions include both flat areas and areas with large contributing upstream drainage The wetness index of each node of the Watershed DEM can be extracted as a surface Select the DEM or a basin in the WorkSpace and select Tools Watershed gt Extract Wetness Index from the menu bar If a basin is selected the wetness index value of nodes o
259. illed Contours 125 1 7 6 Creating a Sloping Structure ina Rectangular Grid 126 1 7 7 Extracting a Spatial Subset From a Larger Grid 127 e To define a spatial subset from a rectangular grid 127 XI Green KenueSeptember 2010 1 7 8 Extracting a Temporal Subset of Time Varying Gridded Data 127 e To extract a temporal subset 0 0 0 00 ccc eee 128 1 7 9 Digitizing from an Imported Image 045 128 e To digitize from an imported image 0 00 eee ee eee 128 1 7 10 Georeferencing a non georeferenced GeoTIFF 129 e To georeference a non georeferenced tiff 129 1 7 11 Classification of a GeoTIFF Image 130 e To classify a GeoTIFF image 0 ccc ee 130 e To create a Custom Theme 20 0 0 cee eee 131 e To choose from a predefined theme 0 0000 c ee eee 131 e To reclassify a GeoTIFF a 132 2 GREEN KENUE 2am fee ee venee ees teens eee eset a as 135 2 1 WATERSHED OBJECTS cece ee ee ees 135 2 1 1 Opening an Existing Watershed Object 136 2 1 2 Importing a Watershed from Topaz 136 2 1 3 Creating a New Watershed Object 136 2 1 3 1 WatershedS 240625065 AWA Bk NG KAB NGA ELA MANG MAK WLA 137 2 1 3 1 1 Flow Algorithms aaa 138 2 1 3 1 2 Delineating a Watershed
260. ing the path and filename directly into the window You can save the output as a Rectangular grid r2s or a Rectangular Cell grid r2c Select the Apply button to estimate the output file size and display the output frame count Destination Filename D AData4NARRAT emperature_week1 Ts Es File Size 044 Kbytes Framez Hy Figure 3 26 Setting the output destination for NARR data 6 Click on the Ok button to save the output file 213 HYDAT Database September 2010 214 4 THE GEN1D MODEL The theoretical basis upon which GEN1D was formulated is described by Prandle and Crookshank 1972 Incorporated into the model are ideas that originated earlier with Kamphuis 1968 and Crookshank 1971 Briefly the one dimensional shallow water wave equations of motion and continuity are solved by an explicit finite difference scheme using central differences in a staggered grid system Water elevations and velocities are solved at alternating grid points in both the spatial and temporal domains A multi attribute EnSim Network object is used to carry all the information for the model The EnSim environment allows you to describe the location and type of each model boundary as well as the location of internal channel junctions The boundary types allowed in the model include constant or time varying water elevation boundaries constant or time varying discharge boundaries and reflective boundaries Internal junctions can be eithe
261. ion 2 3 WATFLOOD September 2010 Figure 2 53 Each cell is assigned a single drainage direction value e River class IBN This attribute defines the river roughness classes with each class having a different value for the three roughness parameters roughness of floodplain channel and overland flow defined in the WATFLOOD parameter file Green Kenue provides a default value of 1 A maximum of five river classes can be defined e Contour density IROUGH This gives an indication of the number of contours in a cell It is a relative description of the roughness within a cell The contour elevation interval is defined at the top of the Data tab The default interval is 1 The value of contour crossings in a cell has a minimum of and a maximum of 99 WATFLOOD cannot handle contour densities greater than 99 so all cells having a contour density equal to or greater than 99 will be assigned a value of 99 If multiple cells have a contour crossing value of 99 increase the contour elevation interval to ensure the roughness is appropriately described e Channel density ICHNL This is the number of main channels that cross a grid square The value must be between 1 and 5 If it is greater than 1 each channel is considered equal in SIZe e Routing reach number IREACH Values greater than zero will output channel inflows at those cells These inflows can be used for external routing which may be desirable in modelling tidal or backwater effect
262. ions 3 Select the projection from the Projection list box The projections available are LatLong UTM MTM Polar Stereographic Lambert Conformal Albers and Cartesian 4 If LatLong UTM MTM Polar Stereographic Lambert Conformal or Albers has been selected the central edit box will become active Enter the appropriate details e LatLong Select 180 to 180 or 0 to 360 degrees e UTM or MTM Enter the zone number e Polar Stereographic Enter the Centre Latitude and Centre Longitude e Lambert Conformal or Albers Enter the Central Meridian Latitude of Origin 1st Standard Parallel 2nd Standard Parallel False Easting and False Northing 5 Select an appropriate ellipsoid from the Ellipsoid Datum list box The available ellipsoids are WGS84 WGS72 GRS80 NAD83 Clark 1866 NAD 27 and Sphere See Ellipsoids on p 28 for more information 6 Select the OK button to confirm your selections 7 Ifa mistake has been made in assigning the coordinate system reselectthe Assign button on the Spatial tab 1 4 3 4 5 Ellipsoids EnSim lets you quickly and easily convert spatial data between projections e g from LatLong to UTM However to transform the coordinate data to the new projection it is essential the data object is assigned the correct ellipsoid The table below shows the ellipsoids supported by EnSim and their associated parameters WGS84 6 378 137 0 1 0 298 257223563 WGS72 6 378 135 0 1 0 298 26
263. isplay the modified regular grid in a 3D view to see the effect of the addition of the triangulation Es Slope Example Figure 1 101 A regular grid with a sloping structure as well as the point set and triangulation used to create the structure shown in a 3D view 1 7 7 Extracting a Spatial Subset From a Larger Grid It may be necessary for you to define a spatial subset of a larger grid To define a spatial subset from a rectangular grid 1 Open a 2D rectangular grid into the WorkSpace 2 Create a new regular grid by selecting File 5New See Creating a New Regular Grid under Creating New Data Items on p 70 for more details 3 Ensure that the spatial domain of the new rectangular grid is within the already opened rectangular grid 4 Map the original rectangular grid to the new rectangular grid See Mapping Objects under Tools on p 113 for more details 1 7 8 Extracting a Temporal Subset of Time Varying Gridded Data The calculator can be used to extract a temporal subset of time varying gridded data 127 EnSim Core September 2010 To extract a temporal subset 1 Open a time varying gridded data item in the WorkSpace Ensure that the object is highlighted 2 Select Tools Calculator When the Calculator appears click the list box for a variable 3 Select the time varying data items from the options available An edit box will appear below Start and End 4 Enter the range for the temporal sub
264. isplayed as an HBV EC Parameter Set object 238 Section 5 2 The HBV EC Interface September 2010 To create a new HBV EC parameter object select File New gt HBV EC Run from the menu bar A New HBV EC Parameter Set object will appear in the WorkSpace and the HBV EC dialog box will open WorkSpace Si 2 Data Items l New HBV EC Parameter Set New WaterShed ARB DEM AY Channels m A Basin 1 Si Basin Spatial pa GM Climate Zones a GM Elevation Bands 7 Land Use Regions GM Slope Bands a GM Aspect Bands z A HE HBV EC Model E an aga EE ie EeP Figure 5 1 The new HB V EC Parameter Set object contains several children objects This HBV EC Parameter Set dialog consists of three or more panels EnSim WaterShed This panel contains information on the watershed that is being modelled e Basin This panel contains spatial information derived from the watershed selected on the EnSim WaterShed panel e Simulation This panel contains the parameters for the model itself e Climate Zone This panel displays and allows you to edit variables that describe the conditions in a particular climate zone This panel 1s only displayed after the HBV EC Model has been configured and additional panels are displayed 1f more than one climate zone 1s used within the simulation See The Climate Tab on p 243 for more information on Climate Zones 5 2 1 The EnSim WaterShed Panel The WaterShed panel allows you
265. it file plt 4 Computed stream flow data Components are stored as time series data objects Watflood Str file str Stream flow data Components are stored as time series data objects Watflood Tag file tag 4 Temperature gauge data Components are stored as time series data objects Watflood Tem file tem Distributed temperature data Components are stored as r2c objects Environment Canada RPN Files fst A generic compressed data file format used to distribute Wind Energy data files among other data This is a native file type for the AnemoScope program available at http www anemoscope ca Further information on the fst file type can be found at http www windatlas ca en fst php Topaz watershed file See Topaz documentation for information on the format of these files Only Topaz output files in ArcInfo ASCII grid file arc format are supported Topaz watershed files cannot be created edited or saved with Green Kenue They may be loaded into Green Kenue and displayed in a 2D or 3D view or may be used to create a new EnSim watershed object 311 EnSim Hydrologic September 2010 e URP Metafile Unified Radar Processor is the weather radar format used by Environment Canada URP Metafiles are loaded into EnSim as triangular meshes In the WorkSpace they have the icon They may be treated as native t3s files 312 Appendix C September 2010 APPENDIX C FILE TYPES OF THE RC
266. it or Landscape The paper size depends on the capabilities of the active printer which you can select with the Printer button Snapping This area controls the snap to grid If the snap to grid is active objects being drawn or resized will automatically snap to the nearest point on the grid The value next to the checkbox determines the number of points on the grid The higher the number the finer the erid will be The snap to grid can also be turned on and off by using the report s shortcut menu or the button on the report tool bar 52 Section 1 5 Views September 2010 1 5 9 5 Report View Templates One of the unique abilities of the Report view 1s its ability to use templates to prepare reports If you need to prepare multiple reports or pages with a similar appearance this feature can save a great deal of time To create a report template 1 Create a new report and add objects and views that will be common to all of the reports you need to create Note that data items will not be saved with the template although legends based on data items will be saved 2 Under the Meta Data tab of the report s Properties window change the report s title to something indicative of its purpose 3 On the menu bar select Window gt Save Template To use a report template 1 On the menu bar select Window gt Load Template 2 From the dialog box select the template that you would like to use The template w
267. iteria tab determines which channels and outlets are displayed The extent to which flow paths are displayed depends on the parameter Channel headwater drainage area This parameter is the area upstream of a particular channel Only channels that conduct flow from areas greater than the specified channel headwater drainage area will be displayed These results will also be used in calculating the number of channels in each cell a parameter required by the Watflood Map file To help you with the selection of this drainage area parameter the maximum drainage area of the grid is displayed as a non editable parameter Maximum drainage area on grid As well the drainage areas for each node of the watershed can be extracted by selecting the DEM object in the WorkSpace and selecting Tools Watershed Drainage Areas from the menu bar The drainage area grid object can be viewed in a 2D or 3D view To view more or fewer channels 1 Ensure that the Channels object is being displayed in a view 2 Double click the Channels object The Properties dialog will appear Select the Criteria tab 3 In the Generate Channels area adjust the parameter Channel headwater drainage area Increasing this parameter will decrease the number of flow paths displayed and accordingly decreasing this parameter will increase the number of flow paths displayed Note Very small channel headwater drainage area values may slow down channel regeneration 144 Section 2
268. ith the next valid point value found e Enter Value ts1 amp ts3 only Enter the replacement value e Enter Mag amp Dir Value ts2 8 ts4 only Enter the replacement magnitude and direction values 106 Section 1 6 Tools September 2010 Trailing NoData values are NoData values found at the end of the time series Replacement methods for trailing NoData values include e None Selected Do nothing e Extrapolate Extrapolate linearly from the last valid point values found e Last Valid Value Replace with the last valid point value found e Enter Value Enter the replacement value This option is available for ts amp ts3 objects only Enter Mag amp Dir Value Enter the replacement magnitude and direction values This option is available for ts2 amp ts4 objects only Once the edits have been completed press DE If the Create New TimeSeries box is checked a new time series will be created and added as a child under the source time series in the workspace The source time series will remain unmodified If the Create New TimeSeries box is unchecked the source time series will be overwritten with the changes 1 6 6 2 Resampling Time Series Select a time series from within a view or a time series object from the workspace and select the Resample command from the shortcut menu The following resample dialog will appear Resample TimeSeries x Source imeSeres Name Example Time Series 0 00 00 000 EndT ime 64 00 00
269. ize is 20 1 4 3 1 2 Vertical Display Options Scale Controls the exaggeration of magnitude A small number reduces the exaggeration while a large number will increase it e Scalar Data In a 3D view the magnitude refers to the value of the z coordinate or data attribute such as elevation or concentration e Vector Data In either 2D or 3D the magnitude refers to the length of the vector arrows Shift Changes the vertical location of the object ina 3D view The default shift is always zero A positive shift moves the object in the positive z axis direction and a negative shift moves the object in the negative z axis direction 1 4 3 1 3 Other Display Options Grid Step This is an option only for regular grids The default display is 1 The means that every node of the grid is displayed If the grid file is very large EnSim may be slow in updating the view when it contains the grid The grid step can be increased to show fewer points and allow EnSim to update the display more quickly The usefulness of this feature is dependent on your machine s CPU and graphical capabilities Points This option is available to line sets When the Lines and Points or Points style is chosen under the Rendering option this option allows the display of the points to be 19 EnSim Core September 2010 changed For example the points can be displayed as an X as triangles as squares and so on e Show Node Labels This is an option for gridded
270. king for Errors and Editing the DEM on p 141 and Selecting Data Items under Tools on p 73 for more information 2 1 3 3 4 Using Predefined Channels Although the channel delineation algorithms used by Green Kenue are powerful there may be cases in which the predicted channel paths differ from the observed placement of the channels or simply watersheds for which you have accurate data available showing the path of an 145 Green Kenue September 2010 existing channel In these cases it s possible to use the Predefined Channels tab to include information about actual channel paths in the watershed object Note This option is not available when working with a Multi Tile Watershed object Properties of New WaterShed New WaterShed Water5hed Directory Filename Cancel Figure 2 13 The Enable Predefined Channels box makes the Channels def tab available The Predefined Channels tab abbreviated as Channels def within the dialog lists one or more lines that have been added to the Watershed object in the form of a 2D Line set object Properties of New WaterShed l x Watershed DEM Channels Channels def Basin 1 Channels Display Spatial Meta Data Main Channel Secondary Channel 1 True Secondary Channel 2 True Secondary Channel 3 True Figure 2 14 This dialog tab lists each of the predefined channels Once a channel has been added to this tab it cannot be removed although it can
271. l characteristics of the cross section Note You can recalculate the values shown by entering a new value for the Surface Elevation and clicking the Compute button 3 Click the X button to close the window 233 The GENID Model September 2010 4 2 2 Running the GEN1D Model To run a GENID simulation 1 Make sure that all mandatory fields on the Simulation Channel Down Boundary and Up Boundary tabs are complete 2 Select the GENID Parameter file object in the WorkSpace 3 Select Run gt Check Parameters from the menu bar e If any information is missing a dialog box will appear listing the missing parameters GENID 4 Downstream Boundary Elevation file must be defined Figure 4 21 This dialog box lists any missing parameters e If there are no missing parameters a confirmation dialog will appear Greenkeme eS i Parameter set validation completed al J NO errors were Found in GENID Figure 4 22 This dialog box appears if all parameters have been entered 4 Select Run Launch Simulation from the menu bar 4 2 3 Displaying Simulation Output GENID produces a single output file regardless of the type of simulation run The output file produced is a time varying network file which is displayed in the WorkSpace as a child of the parameter object The Out Network object has the same geometry as the channel object that was used as input to the simulation 234 Section 4 2 The GE
272. land class The Map Object tool described in the section Mapping Objects under Tools on p 113 can be used to apply one or more closed polygons defining land use to the Watflood map These polygons can be from a GIS source or can be created in Green Kenue using the polygon tool See Drawing Points on p 68 and Drawing Lines and Closed Polylines under Tools on p 69 for more information The Map Object tool is designed to apply a value to a grid node but for the Watflood Map the percentage of the grid cell occupied by the mapped polygon is applied to the grid cell instead 185 Green Kenue September 2010 Points to remember when applying land use data to a Watflood Map e The land use polygons must be closed Open polylines cannot be used e A data item that is being mapped to the Watflood Map may contain multiple polygons e Polygons can be applied to a land use class for which a polygon has already been applied The percentages will be added to the existing percentages Overlap of polygons between the first application and the second will not be accounted for e All of the polygons within a given GIS file must define the same land use For example all the polygons in the forest shp GIS file must define forest land use all the polygons in the urban shp GIS file must define urban land use and so on e Green Kenue cannot map complex polygons such as nested polygons or polygons with holes Using a GIS software package split any
273. lanes are located on either side of the view s data In the view s coordinate system s units near and far are defined by the distance of the clipping plane from the camera If while zooming in parts of the image begin to disappear the near parameter should be reduced in order to view all parts of the image 44 Section 1 5 Views September 2010 CAMERA F FIELD OF VIEW Figure 1 26 The Near and Far parameters determine the depth of the image Moves cannot be undone if changed in the Properties dialog box The Default View command in the view s shortcut menu allows you to return to the default view 1 5 7 3 Display Properties of the 3D View Window The display properties of the 3D window are changed in the Display tab of the view s Properties dialog box Properties of 3D Yiew 2 l Display Recording Spatial Temporal Meta Data Options Background Colour Show Compass Persistent Popups Extended Popup Info M Show Probes T Lock View Camera View Center 2 o Y 2 o Z 1 3556406 o Rotate Translate Near 0 1 3056 Field of View Far 13 5564 45 2 MW Show Crosshairs Apply Cancel Figure 1 27 The Display Properties dialog of a 3D view The display properties that can be edited include e Background Colour The box is not a checkbox but a colour selector indicating the colour to be applied to the background Upon selecting the box a colour selectio
274. le attribute such as discharge level width and so on EnSim is capable of reading files without a header as long as the data portion of the file 1s properly formatted that 1s with two values per line If the file is then saved from within EnSim a header will be added This format is particularly useful for illustrating the relationship between two attributes such as Discharge vs Level as found in a rating curve analysis 282 Appendix A September 2010 Parcel Sets pcl Parcel sets contain point data possessing multiple attributes Since their contents are displayed as points parcel sets are represented by the point set icon in the WorkSpace They use the file extension pcl The data of a parcel set may vary over time If the data does not vary over time the file is stored in ASCII If it does vary over time the file is in binary format Parcels are only referenced in two dimensions x and y However elevation may be added as one of the attributes Parcel sets may be saved in ASCII in the following formats e Multi frame MapInfo Interchange mif e Single frame MapInfo Interchange mif Single frame Parcel pcl With the multi frame mif option all frames are saved in a single time step When the data is displayed all frames appear simultaneously With single frame mif and parcel files only the frame that is being displayed when the file is created is saved File Headers pcl An example parcel set
275. le with other files used during the same session and with other software applications Refer to the section Coordinate Systems under Properties of Data Items on p 26 for additional information on coordinate systems 1 5 6 2 The 2D Window Status Bar The bottom of the EnSim window provides information on the open window For an active 2D window the view s current coordinate system and the location of the cursor is displayed Ready LLGRS80 0 360 123 119 49 376 um 4 1 5 6 3 Manipulating the 2D View e The view can be panned by dragging the cursor with the left mouse button held down Zoom in by pressing the lt Ctrl gt key while dragging the mouse upwards or by moving the mouse wheel up Zoom out by pressing the lt Ctrl gt key while dragging the mouse downwards or by moving the mouse wheel down While the view 1s being manipulated a hand cursor wW will appear The view can also be manipulated by adjusting the X and Y minimum and maximum extents in the Display tab of the view s Properties dialog box Moves can be undone by the Undo Move command in the view s shortcut menu The Default View command in the view s shortcut menu returns to the default view e Data items are drawn in the view in the reverse order in which they are added to the view window The last data item to be added to the view is the top layer of objects drawn in the view and the first in the list of objects contained in the view It will obscure all previousl
276. lected the cross section 4 2 1 5 5 Resampling a Cross Section If the data used to define a cross section is too detailed or not detailed enough the line can be resampled producing a cross section containing more or fewer points To resample a Cross section 1 Within the View window select the cross section that you d like to resample 2 From the shortcut menu select Resample followed by Max Distance to increase the number of points on the line or Equi Distance to decrease the number of points Resampling cross section length 79 092233 pointCount 308 Enter MASIMUM interpont spacing Value Cancel Figure 4 16 This dialog allows you to enter a Maximum interpoint spacing value e For a Max Distance resampling the number to be entered represents the maximum distance that will be allowed between any two points on the line If any points are further apart than this additional points will be inserted to decrease the distance between them 230 Section 4 2 The GENID Interface September 2010 Resampling cross section length 79 092233 pointCount 308 Enter EQUIDISTANT interpoint spacing Value Cancel Figure 4 17 This dialog allows you to enter an Equidistant interpoint spacing value e For an Equi Distance resampling the number to be entered represents the distance between each point If you enter a number greater than the existing value the cross section will contain fewer points while
277. lection of lines defined by two dimensional nodes Each line may have multiple associated attributes For example if the lines are contour lines it may include elevation data Attributes may be integer float text etc See Line Sets 12s 13s on p 279 for further details 3D Line Sets 13s Open or closed collection of lines defined by three dimensional nodes Each line may have multiple associated attributes For example if the lines are contour lines it may include elevation data Attributes may be integer float text etc See Line Sets 12s 13s on p 279 for further details 10 Section 1 4 Data Items September 2010 Point Sets pt2 Set of points each represented by an x and y coordinate Each point may have multiple associated attributes XYZ Point Sets xyz Set of points each represented by an x y and z coordinate Parcel Sets pcl Set of points each represented by an x y and z coordinate May have multiple attributes and may be time varying Location of points may move in time XY Data Sets xy Set of scalar pairs Each pair represents values from two attributes attribute X and attribute Y Scalar Implicit Time Series ts Represents a scalar quantity varying with a constant time step Vector Implicit Time Series ts2 Represents a vector quantity varying with a constant time step Scalar Explicit Time Series ts3 Represents a scalar quantity with a varying time step Vector Explicit Tim
278. left of the attribute you wish to clear 2 Click Clear The selected land class will now have a value of 0 for each cell 2 3 1 6 Saving the Watflood Map The Watflood Map can be saved as a map file oras a 12c file Select the Watflood Map object and choose File Save or File Save Copy As See Supported Foreign File Types Green Kenue on p 311 for information about the map file format Note The Watflood Map saved as an EnSim r2c file can be recognized as input by newer versions of the Watflood Model 2 3 2 Importing WATFLOOD Files WATFLOOD files other than the Watflood Map and the Watflood Output which are loaded through the open menu can be imported into Green Kenue With the exception of the Watflood Event file the files may be viewed but cannot be edited or saved in their native formats Refer to the section on Watflood Event File Properties on p 188 for details on the Event file Note Imported Watflood grid files such as tem and met files can be saved as EnSim r2c files which can be recognized by newer versions of the WATFLOOD model To add a Watflood file select File 3Import 5Watflood Files Another menu will appear showing the Watflood files structure 187 Green Kenue September 2010 Watfood Files Watflood Event e a a ArcView Shape File Watfood Rad Binary Raster AR C BIL GTOPO Watflood Rag CMC FST Files Watflood Rel DTED or CDED DEM Watfood Shd MapInfo Int
279. lief potential value of nodes outside the basin boundary will default to zero The relief potential surface can be viewed in a 2D or 3D view 2D view 1 ioi x GEO Figure 2 27 These images depict a Stream Power map shown in 2D left and 3D right view 2 2 1 9 Extracting Upstream Network The network upstream of a channel node can be extracted as an individual network Select a point on a channel and then select Tools Watershed gt Extract Upstream Network from the menu bar 157 Green Kenue September 2010 a 2D Yiew 1 lol x Figure 2 28 A network extracted upstream of a selected point on the channel network shown in 2D view 2 2110 Extracting Downstream Reach The reach downstream of a channel node can be extracted as an individual network Select a point on a channel and then select Tools Watershed gt Extract Downstream Reach from the menu bar lolx Figure 2 29 A reach extracted downstream of a selected point on the channel network shown in 2D view 158 Section 2 2 Hydrologic Tools September 2010 2 2 1 11 Extracting Basin Network The channel network within a basin can be extracted as an individual network Select the basin in the WorkSpace or a point on the basin boundary and then select Tools gt Watershed Extract Basin Network from the menu bar 2D Yiew 1 Figure 2 30 A network extracted from within a selected basin shown in 2D view 2 2 1 12 Extracting a Hypsogr
280. limetres over the simulated period e Slow Reservoir Storage This object shows the level of storage in the slow reservoir of the watershed in millimetres over the simulated period e Fast Reservoir Discharge This object shows the rate of discharge from the fast reservoir of the watershed in thousands of litres per second over the simulated period e Slow Reservoir Discharge This object shows the rate of discharge from the slow reservoir of the watershed in thousands of litres per second over the simulated period e Glacier Discharge This object shows the rate of discharge from glaciers within the watershed in thousands of litres per second over the simulated period e Glacier Ice Melt This object shows the ice melt from glaciers within the watershed in mm over the simulated period e Glacier Water Storage This object shows the water storage from glaciers within the watershed in mm over the simulated period The following results are shown as attributes of a time varying 2 dimensional triangular mesh These results are generated only when the Create Spatial Result checkbox on the Simulation panel of the HBV EC Model parameters dialog 1s active They are best examined in a 2D view 260 Section 5 3 The HBV EC Model September 2010 window and can be animated to see the changes of the data over time For more information on examining time varying data see Animation on p 61 Temperature This attribute shows t
281. lt value is 0 05 Initial Fast Reservoir Discharge This is the rate of discharge from the fast reservoir at the beginning of the simulation in thousands of litres per second The default value is 0 Initial Slow Reservoir Discharge This is the rate of discharge from the slow reservoir at the beginning of the simulation in thousands of litres per second The default value is 0 e Output Options These options determine what output will be generated by the Simulation when the model is run 252 Section 5 2 The HBV EC Interface September 2010 e Create Spatial Result If this option is checked the model will generate the various 2D output data as described under The Results of the HBV EC Model on p 260 e Generate Table File If this option is checked the simulation will generate an hbt HBV EC Output Tableset file when run This file is created with the same name and in the same location as the hbv file 5 2 4 The Climate Zone Panel The variables shown on this panel are specific to a particular climate zone In most cases an HBV EC simulation will contain only a single climate zone and so there will only be a single panel If the simulation contains multiple climate zones the variables for each will be shown on a separate tab named Climate Zone 1 Climate Zone 2 and so on Properties of New HB EC Parameter Set xX w aterShed Basin Simulation Climate one 1 Parameters blet Climate
282. lues over the time series for each node in the grid or mesh e Temporal Mean This option requires time varying data It calculates the mean of the values that occurred over the time series for each node in the grid or mesh e Temporal StdDev This option requires time varying data It calculates the standard deviation of the values that occurred over the time series for each node in the grid or mesh To extract temporal statistics as a surface 1 Select the data item from which the surface is to be extracted 2 Select Tools gt Extract Surface Then choose the option for the type of value to be extracted from each node Temporal Maximums Temporal Minimums Temporal Ranges Temporal Sums Temporal Mean or Temporal StdDev 3 A Range Query dialog will appear Enter the range of frames to be scanned for the specified values The default is the total number of frames in the time series 90 Section 1 6 Tools September 2010 Range Query x The object FREE SURFACE has 133 data frames Please select the START and END frames Lancel for this operation Start End 1 33 Figure 1 69 This dialog asks for the range of frames to be scanned The new surface will be created as a child of the original object and can be saved in the same format as the original grid or mesh file 1 6 5 1 2 Extracting Slopes The slope of a regular grid or triangular mesh can be extracted as a surface The slope value 1s
283. lues than grid points only the number of values equal to the number of grid points will be used and excess values will be ignored In the case of more than one attribute once the data for each node is read for the first attribute then the data for the next attribute is expected starting again at the first node 1 Each attribute will be read sequentially If the file has been saved by an EnSim application the values at each grid point will be written in a matrix format The number of columns in the file corresponds to the number of vertices in the x direction of the grid and the number of rows corresponds to the number of vertices in the y direction For scalar data r2s the first value listed in the matrix is the value at the bottom left corner of the rectangular grid The matrix of values 1s repeated for each successive attribute For vector data r2v files the matrix is the same except that all of the x components of each vector for a particular data attribute are listed first After the x components for each point are listed the y components of the vectors are listed A vector data set contains twice as many values as a single attribute scalar data set with the same number of grid points Binary Both time varying and non time varying data may be stored in binary format However the header of the binary file is stored as ASCII characters so that the file can be examined with a text editor For each time step new values must be
284. ly to adjust the data 2 2 2 2 1 Working With Rating Curves There are several ways to improve the fit of the rating curves These methods include creating a subset inactivating individual points or directly adjusting the rating curve coefficients To adjust the rating curve by creating a subset 1 Set the colour display so that the data is distinguished By Month or By Year 2 Select an appropriate temporal subset to be examined See Subset under HY DAT DATABASE on p 201 for more information on creating a subset of data 3 Click Apply The rating curve and correlation coefficient values will be updated and any data outside the subset will now be displayed in grey To inactivate an individual data point 1 Double click on a point to be removed from the view The selected point will appear highlighted in magenta in all four views A popup will appear showing the attributes of the selected point in the selected view 2 Right click on the point and select the checkmark next to Active on the shortcut menu The point will now be grey and the rating curve and correlation coefficient will be recalculated 3 Repeat steps 1 and 2 until you are satisfied with the resulting curve 169 Green Kenue September 2010 To adjust the rating curve directly 1 Choose either E C H HOy N or santo func H from the rating curve options e Ifthe function has been selected adjust the Poly Degree option as well 2 Click
285. ly The s in t3s indicates that the data in the file are scalar and the v in t3v indicates that the data in the file are vector Both t3s and t3v files may contain time varying data which is always stored in binary format Non time varying data may be stored in ASCII or binary format The scalar triangular mesh t3s can have one or more data attributes T3s files can be exported into the following formats e Trigrid Neigh ngh e Trigrid Node nod e GoogleEarth Keyhole Markup Language kml File Headers t3s t3v An example of an ASCII file for a simple mesh containing scalar data that does not vary over time 1s given below Hit HH HH HH HH EE HH HH EH EE EH EE EH EEE EH EE HE aE EEE EE HE EEE HAHAHAHAHAHAH FileType t3s ASCII EnSim 1 0 Canadian Hydraulics Centre National Research Council c 1998 2004 DataType 2D T3 Scalar Mesh it Application BlueKenue Version 3 0 44 WrittenBy UserName CreationDate Priy April 155 2005 11220 AM ye AN a ee E Projection Cartesian Ellipsoid Unknown it NodeCount 17 ElementCount 24 ElementType T3 it EndHeader Tag 95000 S7 10 7000 14 23 188315 39 900479 0 25 06 000 22 693000 31297000 657655000 335191000 35 411000 3022 1468 29 716530 39326000 84 539000 48 753000 56 110000 52993000 27 681000 ION OF OCF 274 Appendix A September 2010 UI U1 694222 19s 6000 39 718000 71 322000 461000 52 369000 609456 702452329 s194803 27
286. ly snow and above TT TTI will be entirely rain EPGRAD This is the fractional rate of decrease of potential evaporation with elevation per metre The default value is 0 0005 ETF This is the temperature anomaly correction of potential evapotranspiration The default value is 0 5 The model determines daily evaporation rates by looking at the monthly rate and taking into account the difference between the recorded daily temperature and the normal monthly temperature An increase in this value will increase the effect of a temperature variance on the evaporation rate The value must fall between 0 and 1 Forest variables e TFRAIN This is the fraction of rainfall reaching ground surface below the forest canopy This value must be between 0 and 1 and the default value is 0 8 Section 5 2 The HBV EC Interface September 2010 TFSNOW This is the fraction of snowfall reaching ground surface below the forest canopy This value must be between 0 and 1 and the default value is 0 8 Canopy Factor This is the proportion of sunlight blocked by the forest canopy This value must be between 0 and 1 The default value is 1 indicating that sunlight is completely blocked by the canopy e Snow variables AM This is the factor controlling the influence of the aspect on the melt factor The default value is 0 TM This is the threshold temperature for snowmelt in degrees Celcius The default value is 0 Lower temperatures will encourag
287. m Bi Below 50 Figure 1 28 The Earth is most accurately seen in a spherical view 46 Section 1 5 Views September 2010 Note Only data items containing LatLong coordinates may be viewed in a spherical view Viewing objects in other coordinate systems or changing a LatLong object to another system while it is being viewed in a spherical view can have unpredictable effects 1 5 8 1 The Spherical View Window Status Bar The bottom of the EnSim window provides information on the open window The status bar for the active spherical window is identical to the 3D view status bar the view s current coordinate system and the location of the crosshairs is displayed as well as the active type of view manipulation ROT for rotation TRN for translation Ready LL wesed 4 180 0 000 0 000 0 000 ROT A 1 5 8 2 Manipulating the Spherical View In EnSim spherical space there are two ways in which the view can be manipulated e By dragging with the mouse the view can be rotated or translated Rotation and translation occur from the surface of the object using the lt Ctrl gt key in conjunction with the mouse Using the mouse wheel rotation and translation can occur in the z or vertical direction The options of Rotate or Translate can be chosen using commands in the shortcut menu or in the display tab of the view s Properties dialog box During rotation manipulations a hand with an arrow cursor W will appear During translation
288. m Gridded Data under How To Hints and Tricks on p 123 or Line Sets 12s 13s on p 279 for more information on creating a 3D line object 2 Within the WorkSpace drag the 3D line object containing the cross section data onto the Channel object within the GENID container 3 With the Channel object visible in a 2D or 3D view window select the segment with which the cross section is to be associated 4 From the segment s shortcut menu select CrossSection Associate CrossSection at Segment ra Associate Cross section with selected segment ID 2 Please specify the cross section ID Cancel Figure 4 13 Use this dialog to select a cross section to associate with a segment 5 In the dialog box enter the ID of the cross section to be associated with the segment Lines within the file are numbered in the order in which they were created 6 Click Ok 228 Section 4 2 The GENID Interface September 2010 4 2 1 5 2 Scaling a Cross Section Scaling a cross section allows you to multiply the entire cross section by a single factor To scale a cross section 1 With the Channel object visible in a 2D or 3D view select the cross section to which you would like to apply the scaling factor 2 From the cross section s shortcut menu select Scale Que x Scaling the Selected Cross Section Please specify the scale value Cancel Figure 4 14 This dialog allows you to enter the scaling facto
289. may be saved as the following e Table tb0 e Comma delimited text csv Only column names and tabular data are saved File Headers tb0 An example header from a table file is shown below HEHE HH Ht HH HH TE EH HH EH EE EH EH HH EEE EH OH EO HE EEE EE HO EE EEE EEO EE EEE EEE HH FileType ts0 ASCII EnSim 1 0 Canadian Hydraulics Centre National Research Council c 1998 2007 DataType EnSim Table Data it Application Green Kenue Version Sada WrittenBy Username CreationDate Wed Feb 28 2007 11 20 AM ENEE PE E EE E E EE EE E E E EENES ENEE EE a a ENE EE E StartTime 20037 01701 12500 DeltaT 24 00 00 000 ColumnMetaData ColumnName Temperature Rainfall Snowfall ColumnUnits degC mm mm ColumnType float float float EndColumnMetaData EndHeader 2 2 0 24 4 220 1853 Mad NB Bao O 2 Laso 0 2x8 0 0 ad O Q Sell 0 0 Iso O 0 4 0 0 4 293 EnSim Core September 2010 lao U Dez e StartTime This keyword is only present if time is associated with the table data In this case the first row of table data is associated with the date 2003 01 01 and the time 12 00 The value may be written as date and time or just a time The times below are all valid formats 2003701701 12200 2005701701 14200200 24200200000 24200400 e DeltaT This keyword is only present if the StartTime keyword is present It represents the time step used and must be a time not a date
290. may be saved in ts format where ranges from 1 to 5 depending on the type of time series data See Time Series ts ts2 ts3 ts4 ts5 on p 288 for details on types of time series data 98 Section 1 6 Tools September 2010 1 6 5 7 Extracting a Velocity Rose A velocity rose can be extracted from any vector time series ts2 or ts4 in the WorkSpace The velocity rose 1s a statistical representation of the frequency of occurrence of speed and direction The velocity rose plot can be viewed in a Polar view see The Polar View Window on p 37 or a 1D view window To extract a velocity rose 1 Select the vector time series object from the WorkSpace for which the velocity rose 1s to be extracted 2 Select Tools TimeSeries Compute Velocity Rose The following dialog will appear Enter Yelocity Rose Parameters x Source TimeS eresz Example Wind Data Min 0 Max 15 7 Direction Sector Width 40 0 Speed Bing Min 2 6 Count pd Interval 25 Iw Constant Interval Figure 1 77 The Velocity Rose Parameters dialog The velocity rose dialog parameters are described below e Source TimeSeries The name of the source time series as well as the Min and Max values are shown e Direction Select a Sector Width 22 5 30 45 or 90 degrees This value defines the number of directional sectors For example a Sector Width of 90 degrees will define four 90 degree sectors for computing the
291. mber 2010 SUPPORTED FOREIGN FILE TYPES GREEN KENUE Green Kenue supports all of the file types supported by EnSim Core In addition to those files Green Kenue supports the following file types Watflood map file map Map files are displayed as r2c grids but the file format is quite different See your WATFLOOD documentation for the format of map files Map files may be created edited and saved with Green Kenue Watflood output file wfo Format designed for WATFLOOD by CHC This is the output file from a WATFLOOD hydrologic model The components of a Watflood output file are in binary r2c format Each component of the wfo file can be saved individually as either a single time frame ASCII r2c file or as a multiple time frame binary r2c file See the file format for 2D Rectangular Cell Grids r2c on p 300 for more information Watflood Met file met Distributed rain data Components are stored as r2c objects Watflood Rad file rad Radar data Components are stored as r2c objects Watflood Rag file rag Rain gauge data Components are stored as time series data objects Watflood Rel file rel Reservoir release data Components are stored as time series data objects Watflood Shd file shd WATFLOOD basin data Components are stored as r2c objects Watflood Snw file snw Snow data Components are stored as time series data objects Watflood Spl P
292. measuring station This value and PGRADH below must fall between 0 and 1 PGRADH This is the fractional increase in precipitation with elevation for elevations above EMID per metre This value can be used when there s a difference in orographic effects above and below a certain level The default value is 0 which indicates that elevations above EMID no longer experience an increase in precipitation EMID This is the mid point elevation separating precipitation gradients in metres The default value is 5000 Below this elevation PGRADL is used to determine the precipitation increase from elevation above it PGRADH applies TLAPSE This is the temperature lapse rate in degrees Celsius per metre The default value 1s 0 0065 This parameter takes into account the elevation of the MET file data when calculating the effective temperature at a particular elevation Typically this value should fall between the saturated and adiabatic temperature lapse rates so values from 0 006 to 0 010 can be expected TT This is the threshold air temperature for distinguishing rain from snow in degrees Celsius The default value is 0 This value represents the midpoint of the range determined by TTI below TTI This is the temperature interval for mixed rain and snow in degrees Celsius The default value is 2 Temperatures less than TTI degrees on either side of TT will experience mixed precipitation while temperatures below TT TTI will be entire
293. mesh scalar data A triangular mesh vector data 2 dimensional line set for example 1solines or GIS data 2 3 dimensional line set network file describes a network of segments and nodes xy data item time series scalar time series vector si point set i ceoTIFF image 7 table There are a few icon decorations that indicate the status of an object e a black square lt indicates that a data item is in a view window e a red square indicates that animation is activated on an object in a view window a red circle indicates an empty object which contains no data Section 1 2 The WorkSpace September 2010 e a yellow star in the bottom left hand corner of an icon indicates that the data item is in the process of being created For example a new regular grid will have a yellow star while a regular grid loaded into EnSim with the Open file command will not have a yellow star When an object is selected in the WorkSpace it is highlighted and becomes the current object All functions are then applied to that object Objects in the WorkSpace can be manipulated in the following ways e Adding an object to another object Data items can be added to the Data Items hierarchy by opening a file or creating a new data item such as a grid Files can be opened in the same manner New files can be created by choosing File New and selecting the item to be created or by creating the data item with an EnSim fun
294. mmand in the Edit menu or in the decoration object s shortcut menu Note To remove a decoration Object select it and press lt Delete gt or select Remove from the shortcut menu 1 5 10 1 Legends There are two types of legends that can be drawn in a view window The colour scale legend which is dependent on the selected attribute of an associated data object and an independent legend which can be constructed and modified but is not dependent on any one data attribute 1 5 10 1 1 Colour Scale Legends A colour scale legend 1s a colour scale drawn in a view window The colour scale describes one of the data items in the view The colour scale legend is a decoration object that is accessed through the Colour Scale tab of a data item s Properties menu See the Colour Scale under Properties of Data Items on p 20 for more details The colour scale legend can be toggled on or off using the Show check box The options dialog of a colour scale legend is accessed through the Options button 54 Section 1 5 Views September 2010 w2EnSimTelemac 2D Yiew 1 File Edit View Tools Window Help Dil S F amp lalz H Alaala O x Er WorkSpace 1 3 Data Items SHA Capilano2 07 alal fm i gt gt gt 2 Days 05 00 00 000 saa Da ipobo Hai FH VELOCITY Uy TRACER oR FREE SURFACE Above 0 12 O1 to 0 12 0 05 to 0 1 oR BOTTOM COURANT NUMBER E 0 06 to 0 08 ColourScale
295. modified when using EnSim s tools Each data attribute has its own colour scale When the colour scale 1s edited 1t modifies the colour scheme for the current attribute only When editing an object only the data of the current attribute is modified Tools used on a selected object like the Map Object or Extract Time Series tools only modify or use the current data attribute of the object If an object has multiple attributes the name of the current data attribute is shown in parentheses to the right of the object name in the WorkSpace as shown below WorkSpace ci Data Items El amp Example SE Bathumetry mao F Depth ven Currents fed Example State _ at sale a a UA na em Behn Figure 1 8 The current attribute of the Example object is State In the figure above the Point Set object entitled Example is the only object in the WorkSpace possessing multiple attributes The current data attribute State 1s shown beside the object s name in the WorkSpace To change the current attribute open the object s Properties dialog and select the Data tab Choose the desired attribute and click the Apply button Alternatively you can double 22 Section 1 4 Data Items September 2010 click on the attribute name in the list The attribute will be highlighted and there will be a green checkmark to the left of it This green checkmark identifies the current data attribute Pop up windows are used to display the valu
296. n e Extracting Average Upslope Slope e Extracting Wetness Index e Extracting Stream Power e Extracting Relief Potential e Extracting Upstream Network e Extracting Downstream Reach e Extracting Basin Network e Extracting a Hypsographic Curve e Extracting Basin Flow Path Distances e Drainage Area Ratio Analysis and e Slope Analysis 2 2 1 1 Extracting Drainage Directions The flow direction at each node or point of the DEM can be extracted as a surface Select the DEM in the WorkSpace and select Tools Watershed Extract Drainage Direction from the menu bar The drainage directions can be viewed in a 2D or 3D view 151 Green Kenue September 2010 ia 2D Yiew 1 iol x TURT Figure 2 19 Each node in this object shows the direction in which it drains The drainage direction values at each node correspond to the flow directions identified in the direction schematic shown below North is assigned a value of 6 Figure 2 20 Each value corresponds to a direction as shown above 2 2 1 2 Extracting Drainage Area The area of upstream drainage at each node or point of the DEM can be extracted as a surface Select the DEM or a basin in the WorkSpace and select Tools gt Watershed Extract Drainage Area from the menu bar If a basin is selected the drainage area value of nodes outside the basin boundary will default to zero The drainage areas can be viewed in a 2D or 3D view 152 Secti
297. n 1 Flow Algorithm AT Search DEM is required PAENG AGA Qu Enable Predefined Channels New Watershed Watershed Cancel Figure 2 5 This newly created watershed object does not yet contain a DEM 2 1 3 1 1 Flow Algorithms There are two algorithms available for delineating a watershed from a Digital Elevation Model DEM e At algorithm based on an algorithm used by Ehlschlaeger at the U S Army Construction Engineering Research Lab The At algorithm is a tree search algorithm The A algorithm does not modify the DEM which allows for more genuine channel delineation This algorithm is iterative and does not have to deal with deep recursion and the subsequent memory problems associated with large DEMs e Depressionless DEM algorithm developed by Susan Jenson The Jenson depressionless DEM algorithm delineates a watershed by lifting nodes within the DEM to remove all depressions A depressionless DEM allows for simple channel delineation as there is a down or zero slope at every node This algorithm has been implemented recursively which may lead to memory problems with very large DEMs The text box located below the flow algorithm options briefly describes the flow algorithm chosen If no DEM is linked to the watershed the box will inform you that a DEM is required 2 1 3 1 2 Delineating a Watershed To delineate a watershed 1 Select the desired flow algorithm from the Flow Algorithm list box
298. n all values in the dialog to their original defaults Show Legend Shows the object s colour scale as a legend in the current view window For more information see the section Legends under View Decorations on p 54 Options Opens a dialog box for colour scale legend options To apply a previously created colour scale See the section Copying Data Item Properties under Properties of Data Items on p 31 1 4 3 3 Data Attributes The Data tab provides information on the data contained in the object A data item may have multiple attributes A typical data tab is shown below 21 EnSim Core September 2010 Properties of Example Object x Display ColorScale Data Spatial Meta Data Modes 730 Frames 133 Elements 1266 TimeStep Variable KI Attribute Hame 1 Example Object 0 018573 Cancel Figure 1 7 The Data tab of the Properties dialog box The various data attributes associated with the object are listed under Attribute Name Attributes may be numeric values such as elevations or text such as the name of a river If the attribute is a number the minimum and maximum values are displayed If the attribute is text zero is entered under the Min and Max headings If there are units associated with an attribute and if they are appropriately specified in the data file they are displayed under Units The current attribute 1s the active attribute of an object It is the data that is displayed edited or
299. n dialog appears The box will display the colour selected e Show Compass The compass is a view decoration object and is described in the section The Compass under View Decorations on p 58 e Persistent Popups Extended Popup Info Show Probes These control the view s data probes See the section on Data Probes under Tools on p 83 e Show Crosshairs Crosshairs are the red green and blue axes defining the x y and z directions respectively 45 e Lock View When toggled on the ability to move data items in the view will be disabled View decoration objects can still be moved When the view is locked the green padlock 4 in the bottom right hand corner of the EnSim window turns red g e Rotate and Translate control the movement of the viewing area as described previously See Manipulating the 3D View on p 44 for more details e X Y and Z extents Near Far and Field of View behave as described previously in this section See Manipulating the 3D View on p 44 for more details 1 5 8 The Spherical View Window The spherical view window displays data in a spherical view as though one was looking at the earth from space The spherical view display properties can be edited and objects can be manipulated in the spherical view A new Spherical View window can be opened by pressing the button in the Tool bar just as in all other views or select New Sphere View from the Window menu ie nog Elevation i
300. n edited create a new watershed object This will ensure that the Channels and the Basin are compatible with the edited DEM For information on how to edit a grid see the section Selecting Data Items under Tools on p 73 2 1 3 3 Channels and Flow Paths The channels or flow paths of the watershed object delineate the drainage path of surface water through the watershed In nature channels are only formed if water flows over the land s surface for a relatively long distance Since Green Kenue refers to all paths of the flow of surface water through the watershed as channels regardless of their upstream drainage area the term channels does not necessarily refer to the delineation of existing streams rivers or waterways 141 Green Kenue September 2010 Properties of New Watershed x watershed DEM Channels Basin 1 Criteria Display ColorScale Data Spatial Meta Data Generate Channels Maximum drainage area on grid Channel headwater drainage area Outlet Node Search Criteria Minimum watershed area Minimum adjoining watershed area Cancel Figure 2 9 The Channels tab is found on the watershed Properties dialog Flow paths are represented by network segments and may be saved in n3s format see Networks n3s on p 296 for more information on file formats 2 1 3 3 1 Channel Attributes Green Kenue defines the channels of the watershed by connecting the nodes of
301. n keywords e Outlet x The x coordinate of the outlet of this watershed basin e Outlet y The y coordinate of the outlet of this watershed basin File Format wsd ASCII The watershed object file contains three different types of information e The Depressionless DEM in the form of a 2D rectangular grid e A flow direction grid also in the form of a 2D rectangular grid e Basin data which 1s written in the file header The data section of the file is divided into two section both similar to 2D rectangular grids For information on these sections see 2D Rectangular Grids 12s r2v on p 270 The values of the data in the first section of the watershed object are elevations derived from the DEM The second section pertains to the flow of water in the watershed For each vertex there is an integer between 1 and 8 The integer values correspond with a compass direction which indicates the direction of flow Figure B 1 These values are found in the second section of the watershed object Binary In a binary watershed all header information remains in ASCII format The data sections are written in binary format The first section the Depressionless DEM is stored as a series of 4 byte floating point values each representing an elevation The second section the flow directions 1s stored as a series of 1 byte characters Both sections use the same data order as the ASCII version of the file type 310 Appendix B Septe
302. n on the tool bar Map files have the file extension map The watershed map file will be listed in the Workspace under the Data Items category and with have this icon mm Note A basin shd file a WATFLOOD file that represents a processed map can also be opened and displayed in Green Kenue but it cannot be edited or saved All changes must be made directly to the map file and a new basin file must be generated by WATFLOOD Basin files have this icon s 2 3 1 2 Creating a New Watflood Map File To create a new map file select File New gt Watflood Map from the menu bar A Watflood Map object will be created and listed under the Data Items category Fa Data Items E1 new Watflood Map Channel Elevation ELY Figure 2 45 A new Watflood Map object The property dialog box will appear The Map Gen tab will appear with all the values in the Specification area set to zero The new map file does not need to be associated with a watershed The specifications can be set manually or automatically To set map file specifications manually 1 Enter Origin Count and Delta values for the cells of the grid 175 Green Kenue September 2010 Properties of Watilood Map x Map Gen Display ColorScale Data Spatial Meta Data Source Watershed Collect physiographical data from the watershed Specification ka Origin 43603775 1 49725111 Count PIG 23 Delta Jo 28653775 0563760000 Default Setting
303. n the 2D view This is the starting point or zero of the distance display As the cursor 1s moved the distance is updated and displayed next to the cursor A mouse click will create a fixed point A black dot will appear in the display and a yellow line connects this new point with the previous This can be used to display distances along polylines lines with multiple segments The distance displayed will be the total distance from the starting point along the defined line To turn off the ruler click the button or press the lt Esc gt key a 2D Yiew 2 Si OO Pie 7 k Figure FA 66 T TU ruler can a JU to measure a mn by creating fi ma xed 1 6 4 4 Computing Areas and Volumes Two additional tools that are available to examine meshes and grids are the Area and Volume calculators These tools can be used to determine the total area and displacement covered by grids and meshes To compute an area 1 Select the data object in the WorkSpace or the View 2 From the menu bar select Tools gt Compute Area The total area covered by the selected data object will be shown in a message window Note EnSim uses a spherical polygon algorithm Girards theorem for computing areas in Lat Long coordinate systems Areas of Lat Long polygons computed by EnSim will there fore differ from published areas which are typically computed in a projected coordinate sys tem such as Albers or Lambert Conformal 88 Section 1 6 Tools
304. n the WorkSpace 1 5 3 1 The Properties Dialog A view window s Properties dialog has as a minimum a Display and Meta Data tab Other tabs may or may not be available The Display tabs differ considerably for each view type and are discussed in the sections pertaining to the specific view type The other tabs are the same for each view type and are discussed briefly below in this section e Display This tab varies according to the type of view See the chapters specific to each view type e 1D View Window Display Properties p 36 e Polar View Window Display Properties p 39 e 2D View Window Display Properties p 42 e 3D View Window Display Properties p 45 e Spherical View Window Display Properties p 48 e Report View Window Page Setup Properties p 52 e Recording Interface for creating recordings of animated data For more information see the section Recording under Saving and Copying Images on p 65 e Spatial Displays the x y and z spatial extent of the window The extents are automatically determined from the data items currently in view e Temporal Allows you to create a clock decoration object and to adjust the target frame rate for interactive playback of an animation The frame rate 1s the number of frames per second fps See the section The Simulation Clock under View Decorations on p 58 and the section Animation under Views on p 61 for more information e Tools Currently only available for t
305. nSim Core September 2010 metres 1 to 1 0 Below 12 F Figure 1 100 A triangular mesh displayed in 3D as a surface of filled contours with multiple extracted isolines displayed in monochrome black 1 7 6 Creating a Sloping Structure in a Rectangular Grid When modelling hydrodynamics sometimes it is desirable to create a simple sloping structure in a regular grid to represent a physical object in the model domain To create a sloping structure in a regular grid 1 Open the regular grid file and display it in a 2D view Use this grid as a guideline when creating the structure 2 Create a new point set or open a saved set which outlines the shape of the lower and upper bounds of the sloping structure 3 Edit the points to set their values Double click on each point and then right click to open the shortcut menu Select Edit from the shortcut menu 4 Create a new Triangulation from the File menu Drag the point set into the new Triangulation object in the WorkSpace Click the Triangulate button on the Properties dialog of the new Triangulation which will have opened automatically when the new Triangulation was created Drag the new Triangulation into a 2D or 3D view to ensure that it is satisfactory in shape 126 Section 1 7 How To Hints and Tricks September 2010 1 Click on the regular grid object to highlight it in the WorkSpace Select Tools Map Object Choose the new Triangulation and click OK D
306. nce they are added to the table object they will appear as attributes on the Data tab Note The first time series added to the table object will define the start time the deltaT and the item count To successfully add subsequent time series to the table object they must have the same temporal attributes and item count as the first I2 Section 1 6 Tools September 2010 1 6 2 Selecting Data Items In order to edit probe or extract detailed data associated with individual points lines nodes cells etc the EnSim interface provides tools to select these individual items In general the user simply double clicks on a data object in a view and the item under the cursor is highlighted in magenta indicating its selected state The generic term item 1s used on the interface since its definition depends on the current data object ie point line node etc If the id of the item is known ie node number in a mesh the Edit Select Single Item menu command allows the user to enter the numeric item id to be selected Some data objects such as r2c grids support a multi select feature For these objects holding down the lt ctrl gt key while double clicking in a view toggles the selection state of the item under the cursor Items belonging to data objects supporting multi select may also be selected geometrically The Edit gt Select ltems Along Line menu command presents the user with a list of open and closed line
307. ndins 279 2A D PAA 10 OG OL a 4 OD AA 10 GOD AA ANAN 4 creating a 69 ih E 76 file format anG AA 280 PINAY eE 280 file headet aaa AN 279 IASA 0 111 eee ene ee eee ee 80 Lines see Line Set Livo GURONG am 85 Live Stream Lines Cursor 86 M MapInfo Interchange Format 304 SAV UO E nec saateorne 16 Mapping Objects 113 Menu Bar ul 7 Meteorological Data Files BODI poer NG 32 DOG aaen 328 CASE Naa a 321 Multi Tile Watersheds 137 AL al siropen rmon 139 N NARR 335 Green Kenue ACCES GIO socccsseaceommaenene es 209 210 National Water Data Archive 193 Networks u a 11 296 file format ASCII aa kae 297 DIDA aman 298 file header cccccceeceeceeceeees 296 ICON 072050 ab nika Nasa lakad kaaa 4 in GENID luma 215 O ihi estesero terese T Overview oo ccccccccccccccccccccccccescceccecceceues 1 P Parcel Set 11 283 file format ACU AA 284 pna aa GG 284 file header a 283 Performance Statistics 109 Point Set oo eee ce ees 11 286 CTC AMIN AA 68 file format yao AA AA 287 TUG NCAGET aa aaa 286 CON KAN EE 4 Points a a es enreneneueees 75 extracting cross sections from 124 Polar View Uulan 37 tor dit oere 215 Predefined Channels 145 Probability Distribution 111 Projections ASS Pa PA PAH ANIYA 27 CO CELING aa 2
308. nipulate a view that has been added to a report 51 e To change the order of objects in the report 51 e To change the border around an object in the report 51 1 5 9 4 Report View Window Page Setup Properties 52 1 5 9 5 Report View Templates aaa 53 e To create a report template 0 aa 53 e To use a report template a 53 1 5 10 View Decorations aa 53 Vill Table of ContentsSeptember 2010 1 5 10 1 Legends nnana ees 54 1 5 10 1 1Colour Scale Legends 00 Aa 54 1 5 10 1 2Independent Legends 0 0 cee ee 56 e To create an independent legend 0 00 eee ee 56 e To edit an independent legend a 56 e Creating a Quick Legend 0 0 eee 57 1 5 10 2 The Compass 0 0 aaa 58 1 5 10 3 The Simulation Clock 000 00 aaa 58 O Od LADES a aED WAG ob weg bao oe KNA MAA ARAL WA POLE ENE 5 59 e To create a label 2 0 0 eee 59 e To edit a label aaa 60 1 5 11 Displaying Base Maps 00 0a 60 e To Display a Base Map 2 aa 60 1 5 12 Animation on t2 50cenevice he ANG GN NAG Lan NG pn Ha 61 Ro To GAAN boob bague heesenne eee oes 62 e To create a new flight path ccc ee 62 1 5 13 1 Flight Path Properties aaa 63 1 5 14 Synchronizing Two Views eee eee 63 e To s
309. nt possible styles For example a 2D line set and a rectangular grid have no styles in common As a result styles cannot be copied from one to the other See Display Properties under Properties of Data Items on p 17 for more information e Animate checkbox settings see Animation on p 61 e Show and Options settings from the Legend section of the Colour Scale tab see Colour Scale on p 20 32 Section 1 5 Views September 2010 1 5 VIEWS Views are windows within EnSim where data items can be displayed There are six types of views I dimensional 1D Polar 2 dimensional 2D 3 dimensional 3D Spherical and the Report view each with unique display properties Within views animation of time varying data is controlled data can be recorded in movie avi format and various characteristics of the display can be altered including the background colour 2D grid display and extended popup information View windows are treated as objects in the WorkSpace View objects have properties much like data items that affect the environment in which data items are displayed Relationships between data items and view windows are generally handled in the workspace For example changing the display parameters of an object in a view re layering multiple objects in a 2D view and adding and removing objects to and from views are all performed from the WorkSpace 1 5 1 Creating a View Window New view windows are added to the W
310. ny number of data points can have the attributes and their value viewed in this window If the Extended Popup Info option is selected in the Display tab the extended information will appear for each selected item Clicking on the _34 o File button opens a dialog box asking for the name of a file to which the data in the Selection Info window should be saved The data will be saved as a simple text file 1 6 4 2 The Live Cursor The live cursor is a tool that displays attribute values on rectangular grids r2s r2v or r2c and triangular meshes t3s or t3v This value is interpolated at the position of the mouse cursor and is automatically updated as the cursor is moved over the select data object in a 2D view To use the live cursor first ensure that the desired data object is selected then click on the button in the tool bar Once the cursor is placed in the view a box will appear next to the pointer as shown in the image below As the cursor is moved the interpolated attribute value is updated and displayed next to the cursor To turn off the live cursor click the F button again or press the lt Esc gt key 85 EnSim Core September 2010 lol x 1 6 4 2 1 The Live Stream Lines Cursor The live stream lines cursor is a tool that calculates and displays the path of a particle in a flow field Stream lines are automatically enabled for rectangular vector grids r2v and triangular vector meshes t3v
311. ny of the minor channels as desired 3 Save the channels as an independent network file n3s 190 Section 2 3 WATFLOOD September 2010 4 Open the Watflood Output file wfo and save the grid outflow component as a binary multi frame file 5 Select File New Watflood Bankfull The New Bankfull Animation dialog will appear New Bankfull Animation x Network File Grid Outflow File Weattloaod SHO File a UE Cancel Figure 2 62 This dialog is used to set up a Bankfull animation 6 Specify the network grid outflow and shed files in the dialog Click fel to browse When you re finished click Ok 7 A Save As dialog will prompt you to save the bankfull animation file as a binary multi frame file 8 When you click Save the bankfull values will be calculated saved and loaded into the WorkSpace Bankfull animation files can be displayed and animated in Green Kenue in the same manner as other time varying data objects 191 Green Kenue September 2010 192 3 ENVIRONMENTAL DATABASES 3 1 HYDAT DATABASE 3 1 1 Introduction Surface water quality data has been collected and archived in Canada since the middle of the last century Beginning in 1908 this data has been published in a variety of printed formats Since 1991 the meteorological Service of Canada has published most of this data on CD ROM This National HY DAT CD ROM produced each year provides rapid access to a stan
312. ny two parameters can be examined to determine their relationship Note also that it s also possible to select the same series for both parameters Whatever the source of the parameters the RCA will appear in its own window as shown in Figure Figure 2 38 167 Green Kenue September 2010 Ex RatingCurveAnalysis O2KFO05 Name Discharge QO Flow02KF005 Level H Level02KF005 Frarctineinass IK mo Hating Curve E C H HO N Poli degree i Corr Coeff 0 9759 Logt 272 033 M mta fia a Fa H O sama Display Colour Default bot Subset M Jan M Jul M Feb fe Aug M Mar fw Sep Iw Aor M Oct Iw May Iw Nov W Jun ff Dec Start 1960707401 End 1996412421 Reset Figure 2 38 This RCA examines the flow vs discharge relationship of the Ottawa River at Britannia from 1960 to 1996 For each RCA four 1 dimensional views appear in the dialog 1 Discharge Q time series 2 Level H time series 3 Discharge vs Level 4 LOG Discharge vs LOG Level H for power curves or SQRT Level H for polynomial curves The panel on the left hand edge of the RCA window allows you to control the appearance and contents of the 1D views Changes made within this panel are reflected in the 1D views only after you click Apply e Name The name of the rating curve analysis The default name is RatingCurveAnalysis followed by the Station ID 168 Section 2 2 Hydrologic Tools S
313. o the type of file specified by the keyword FileType but written out in full for informational purposes The example below shows a file type keyword line and a data type comment line from the same file FileType 13s ASCII EnSim 1 0 DataType 3D Line Set Other header information varies depending on the type of file However all headers must end with the keyword EndHeader 267 EnSim Core September 2010 ASCII and Binary Files Files containing data that does not vary with time may be in either ASCII or binary format Files having data that does vary over time must be in binary format Both ASCII and binary files have ASCII headers This file attribute 1s specified in the file header with the keyword FileType After the three letter file extension the identifier ASCII or BINARY 1s written ASCIl Files The format of ASCII files is usually fairly simple and they can be edited and saved with any text editor The data delimiter in ASCII files 1s white space in most cases any number of spaces tabs or line returns may separate the data The formats of ASCII files vary and depend on the type of data The time related content of the file header may be in the form yyyy mm dd hh mm ss or the ISO standard format of yyyy mm dd hh mm ss A relative time stamp in an ASCII file must be in the format hhhhhh mm ss mm and may have a value of up to 2 147 483 647 hours Binary Files In binary files the values or attributes associated wi
314. oad Watershed From Topaz x DEM fildep relef or smooth E Boundary File bound as Drainage Directions File Howec A Upstream Drainage Area File uparea Lancel Figure 2 2 This dialog box loads a watershed from Topaz files Click px to browse for the files Once a file has been specified Green Kenue will look within the same directory for the associated files If any of the file suggestions are incorrect use the browse button to change any of the automatically specified files 2 1 3 Creating a New Watershed Object To create a new watershed object select File New Watershed from the menu bar or click on the DI button on the Tool bar A watershed object will be created and listed under the Data Items category with the component files empty 136 Section 2 1 Watershed Objects September 2010 WorkSpace E Data Items BS DEM Bees Channels ae P Basin 1 B ik ai ae ome an en m n Figure 2 3 A new watershed contains empty component files Load a regular grid of elevations or a DEM using the button The grid file may be in r2s format dem format or hgt format See Loading and Importing Data Items under Data Items on p 10 for more information You can load a DEM directly into the watershed by right clicking on the DEM child object of the New WaterShed object in the WorkSpace and selecting Load From File from the shortcut menu Ey Data Items
315. of all source data Isolines will be divided into sections based on the grid size and the vertices of the sectioned line will be used in the interpolation Note The Properties dialog of the grid contains all the tabs of a viewable object in addition to the GridGen tab See Properties of Data Items under Data Items on p 17 for more details 1 6 1 4 Creating a New Triangular Mesh This section explains how to create a triangular mesh from an existing set of points To create a new Triangular Mesh from existing data 1 Open the source data file This might be a point set xyz parcel set pcl line set 12s triangular mesh t3s or regular grid r2s 2 Create a new triangulation grid object by selecting File New Triangulation The triangulation object that appears in the WorkSpace will be empty The Properties dialog of the triangulation object will open automatically 3 In the WorkSpace drag the source data into the triangulation object The data points will be shown as children of the triangulation object More than one file or object can be used as source data for the triangulation The Source Data for the triangulation will be listed in the Properties dialog Properties of new Triangulation x T3 Mesh Display ColorScale Data Spatial Meta Data Triangulation Options Source Data a new PointSet Pa new ClosedLine new ClosedLine Triangulate Cancel Figure 1 47 The T3 Mesh
316. og allows you to create a simple cross section 232 Section 4 2 The GENID Interface September 2010 3 Enter the estimated values for the cross section of the segment 4 Click Ok 4 2 1 5 9 Removing a Cross Section This option is available in case you want to remove a cross section from the Channels object To remove a cross section 1 Within a View window select the cross section that you d like to remove 2 From the cross section s shortcut menu select Remove 3 You will be asked to confirm your selection Remember once you ve removed a cross section 1t cannot be recovered Click Yes to remove the cross section or NG to abort the removal 4 2 1 5 10 Cross Section Properties The Cross Section properties window can be used to examine the profile of a cross section and to see what the effects of varying water levels are on its parameters To view the properties of a cross section 1 Within a View window select the cross section whose properties you d like to examine 2 From the shortcut menu select Properties B8 Cross Section ID 1 Geometry Maximum Width 6 613 Max Elevation 64 115 Min Elevation bot br 415 Surface Elevation b2 31894 Conveying Parameters width rr 44 903 Mean Depth rm 2 592 Maximum Depth mj 4 904 Area m 2 116 407 Hydraulic Radius Mm 2 495 Wetted Perimeber m 46 65 Figure 4 20 The Cross Section Properties window shows the numerica
317. on 2 2 Hydrologic Tools September 2010 2320 view 1 210 x Figure 2 21 These images depict a Drainage Area map shown in 2D left and 3D right view 2 2 1 3 Extracting Depression Fill The modifications made to the original DEM or grid to create a Depressionless DEM can be viewed by extracting the depression fill This operation can only be performed if the watershed was delineated using the Jenson flow algorithm See Creating a New Watershed Object under Watershed Objects on p 136 for more information The depression fill shows the amount by which Green Kenue had to fill the depressions to bring them up to the level of the surrounding land The depression fill can be extracted as a surface and displayed in a 2D or 3D view Select the DEM or a basin in the WorkSpace and select Tools Watershed Extract Depression Fill from the menu bar If a basin is selected the fill value of nodes outside the basin boundary will default to zero 153 Green Kenue September 2010 Figure 2 22 These images show a Depression Fill map in 2D left and 3D right view 2 2 1 4 Extracting Average Upslope Elevation The average elevation of all upstream nodes flowing into each node of the Watershed DEM can be extracted as a surface Select the DEM or a basin in the WorkSpace and select Tools Watershed Extract Ave Upslope Elevation from the menu bar If a basin is selected the upslope elevation value of nodes outside the basin boundary w
318. on 3 2 CDCD DATABASE September 2010 To access a station by ID 1 Select File Environmental Data Open CDCD 5Search by ID from the menu bar Query es fo Search for which Station ID a ThelD isa combination of a 3 digit District ID and a 4 digit CSM Cancel 61 61137 Figure 3 16 This dialog allows you to search for a CDCD station by ID 2 Enter the CDCD ID number in the dialog and click OK Station details and associated time series will be shown in the WorkSpace as children of the selected station as shown in Figure 3 15 3 2 4 Properties of a CDCD Station The CDCD station properties are e Details e Meta Data 3 2 4 1 Details The Details tab displayed most of the pertinent data linked with this station There are two sections to this tab Properties of CAMPBELLFORD ki station MaxT emp MinT emp Fain SADM Precip 50G Details Meta Data a CAMPBELLFORD District 615 Lake Ontano Counties Province Ontario Airport Lat Long 443 o Elevation 146 Data Collection Pernod 1915 to 1997 Figure 3 17 The details of a CDCD station cannot be edited directly 205 HYDAT Database September 2010 e Identification This section details the location and ID number of the CDCD station e CSN This is the ID and name of the station e District This is the district ID and district name in which the station is situated e Province This is the province in which the stati
319. on any of the equation coefficients listed in the text box in the left hand panel 3 Adjust the coefficients until an appropriate curve is determined 4 Click Apply The rating curve and correlation coefficient will be updated The following examples illustrate how an improved rating curve can be obtained Example 1 ea RatingCurveAnalysis O2FEOO07 Name PatingCurweAnalusiz Hating Curve O C H HO N Poly decree 1 Cor Coeff 0 9913 Logt 328 5371 Pd 20 4539 HO O Discharge vs Level evel HO BO 22 22 ee ae To aa ue aaa H Display Colour Default as Subset I Jan Jul WwW Feb Aug MoMa P Sep fon te wW Aor TF Uct F May IT Noy M Jun F Dec Start 1998701701 End 1998704701 Heset l i l Figure 2 39 This RCA has not yet been adjusted The example in Figure Figure 2 39 contains four months of data The power rating curve is used As shown the correlation coefficient is 0 9813 This data set has a high density of low flow data To remove data used in the rating curve a subset of the data can be completed to remove a majority of the low flow data A majority of the low flow data occurred in the months of January and February Remove the data from the months by clicking on the check boxes 170 Section 2 2 Hydrologic Tools September 2010 adjacent to the months in the subset box Data points are not removed from the view but will a
320. on is situated e Lat Long This is the latitude and longitude of the station in decimal degrees e Airport This is the Airport ID applicable only if the station is an airport e Elevation This is the elevation of the station e Data Collection e Period This details the years during which data was collected at this station 3 2 4 2 Meta Data See Meta Data under Properties of Data Items on p 31 for more information Properties of CAMPBELLFORD ki station MaxT emp MinT emp Fain SADM Precip 50G Details Meta Data CAMPBELLFORD COCD Station Cancel Figure 3 18 The Meta Data tab of the CDCD station 3 2 5 Properties of Associated Time Series There are six possible time series that can be linked to a CDCD station These include MaxTemp MinTemp Rain Snow Precip and SOG snow on ground For each time series linked to the station a tab will appear in the properties dialog These time series are similar to other EnSim time series with the addition of the Subset tab 206 Section 3 2 CDCD DATABASE September 2010 Properties of CAMPBELLFORD Station MaxT emp MinT emp Rain Snow Precip SUG Display Data Subset Meta Data Include Records Stat 196670601 M anuani le July M Februam W August End 1997 1 oe W March M September W April W October Bad M May M November Gala W June jt December Figure 3 19 Each of the six time series has a Subset tab
321. on limit for the estimated Strickler value of the channel Steady State Discharge Accuracy See the Run to Steady State Run Type Courant See Run Type Run above Viscosity See Run Type Run above e Generate Rating Curve This type of simulation generates a list of results that can be used to produce a rating curve comparing water level to discharge Rating Curve Node ID This determines the node of the channel for which the table of results will be generated Discharge Start This is the initial discharge value used to generate the rating curve Discharge Delta This is the interval between discharge values when generating a rating curve Number of Trials This represents the number of simulations that are to be run in determining the list of results The greater this number is the smoother the curve will be but the longer the simulation will take Steady State Discharge Accuracy See Run Type Run to Steady State above Courant See Run Type Run above Viscosity See Run Type Run above The lower section Results determines how output from the simulation will be stored e Output Name This is the name that will be used for the generated output file e Attributes to Save to Output Network File This area determines which possible output will be saved in the network file Surface Elevation Velocity and Discharge will be automatically recorded while Conveying Width and Cross Sectional Area are optional Click on the
322. onal interface allowing you to relate the output of the model back to the maps from which it was derived 5 1 GENERAL BACKGROUND 5 1 1 Background and History of the Model HBV is a conceptual hydrological model designed for use in mountainous environments It was originally developed by Sten Bergstrom in the early 1970s while working at the Swedish Meteorological and Hydrological Institute SMHI Over the past 35 years the model has been used extensively for hydrological forecasting engineering design and climate change studies Bergstrom 1995 provides a complete description of the history and application of the model as well as details on the basic internal routines A comprehensive evaluation of current and proposed new routines within the HBV hydrological model was carried out by SMHI in the mid 1990s Lindstrom et al 1997 One of the primary tenets of developers of the HBV model is to add complexity to the model only when it shows an improvement in the simulation of hydrological process The review of the HBV model by Lindstrom et al 1997 updated routines for watershed runoff However several proposed new algorithms proved to provide little or no significant improvement in model performance A Canadian version of the HBV model has been maintained by Dr Dan Moore UBC since the mid 1980s Moore 1993 developed and tested a glacier routine for the model In 2000 Dr Moore provided the source code for the model then written in T
323. one Parameters Elevation Band Parameters Elevation Band 1 236 6m Land Class Parameters Open slope 22 1 aspect M Initial Snow Liquid Initial Soil Moisture OK Apply Cancel Figure 5 18 These variables are specific to a particular Climate Zone 5 2 4 1 The Parameters Tab The variables listed on this panel are specific to a single climate zone as defined on the Climate tab of the Basin panel and identified on the Climate Zones mesh e Climate Zone Parameters These variables apply to all land classes within a particular climate zone e Atmosphere variables 253 The HBV EC Model September 2010 254 RFCF This is the rainfall correction factor This parameter allows you to account for potential error in the recorded rainfall values due to gauge undercatch or known differences between the location of the measuring station and the location of the simulated area This must be a positive number and the default value is 1 SFCF This is the snowfall correction factor It s essentially the same as RFCF above but applies to snowfall measurements instead of rainfall The default value is 1 PGRADL This is the fractional increase in precipitation with elevation for elevations below EMID per metre This parameter allows for the orographic effects of altitude on precipitation levels The default value is 0 0001 which indicates a 0 01 increase in precipitation per metre of elevation above the
324. ools September 2010 1 6 5 10 Extracting Integrals The Integrate along Line tool allows you to extract the rates of change of a variable along a line within a view To extract an integral along a line 1 Using the New Open Line tool create a line within the View that indicates the line along which you d like to integrate See Drawing Lines and Closed Polylines on p 69 for more information 2 Select the line in the WorkSpace 3 From the menu bar select Tools lIntegrate alone Line or click the J button on the T3 Mesh Toolbar This will open the Integration dialog box Integration x Integrate data along the line new OpenLine Grdded data to be integrated Stark End Kilo Resulting Timeseres Name Integral Units mw ew Cancel Figure 1 80 This dialog box is used when integrating 4 In the drop down menu select the data object containing the data you d like to integrate This box will list all time variant objects that are currently loaded 5 Enter the numbers of the Start and End frames 6 Enter a Name and appropriate Units for the new data object These will be stored in the new ts3 Time Series 7 Click OK The new Time Series will be created and listed in the WorkSpace as a child object of the source data object 1 6 5 11 Extracting XY Data From a Table Any table can be used as the source of an XY Data object comparing any two columns from the table To extra
325. ords and the time step between records It also shows the variables that are contained within the file their maximum and minimum values their units of measure and which variable is currently active None of these values can be edited directly See Data Attributes under Properties of Data Items on p 21 for more details on this tab 258 Section 5 3 The HBV EC Model September 2010 Properties ofnew HBV EC Parameter Set x WaterShed Basin Simulation Climate Zone 1 Parameters Met Display Station Data Monthly Data Meta Data Ten perature dec L aporation ib a anuary 9 0 ebruary 4 7 O arch O O Ar 4 5 0 OK Apply Cancel Figure 5 22 These values show the monthly averages over several years e Monthly Data The average monthly values for temperature and evaporation are displayed on this tab and can be edited e Meta Data This tab shows any data located in the header of the HBM file that isn t displayed on one of the other tabs This includes the path and name of the file the version number of the software used to create the file and so on See Meta Data under Properties of Data Items on p 31 for more information on meta data 5 3 THE HBV EC MODEL When the HBV EC model is run the information supplied in the HBV EC dialog is used to calculate several results including both one and two dimensional data objects To run the HBV EC model 1 After you ve entered all of the required
326. orkSpace using one of the view window buttons or by using one of the New View menu commands in the Window menu 1D polar 2D 3D spherical or report The 1D button 1s z the polar button is FF the 2D button is e the 3D button is Fil the spherical button is KA and the report button is Fel Views are automatically numbered according to the order in which they are created The numbers are not related to view type and can be changed by editing the title or subtitle in the Meta Data tab of the view s Properties dialog box Multiple view windows may be opened and displayed simultaneously There are three options for fitting the windows automatically to the available space Cascade Tile Horizontally and Tile Vertically These are found in the Windows menu 1 5 2 Removing a View Window View windows are deleted from the screen by using the 3 button in the top right hand corner of the view window Data items can be removed from a view by selecting the data item and using the lt Delete gt key selecting Remove from its shortcut menu or by selecting Edit 5Remove from the menu bar 1 5 3 Properties Shared by all View Types The view window s Properties dialog box can be accessed in three ways e With the view window selected choose the Properties command from the Edit menu e With the view window selected choose the Properties command from the shortcut menu 33 EnSim Core September 2010 e Double click on the view window object i
327. orking With Rating Curves on p 169 To perform an RCA ona HYDAT station 1 Right click on a HYDAT station in the WorkSpace 2 Select Rating Curve Analysis from the shortcut menu The RCA will appear in its own view window A normal rating curve analysis cannot be performed on a HYDAT station which is missing either the level or flow time series Ifthe HY DAT station does not have any level and discharge time series with overlapping dates an RCA can be performed on any two concurrent time series even if they re from different stations To create an RCA from any two time series 1 Ensure that there is at least one Type 1 scalar implicit see Native Data Items on p 10 time series in the WorkSpace 2 Select Tools Rating Curve Analysis from the menu bar The Rating Curve Analysis dialog will appear 166 Section 2 2 Hydrologic Tools September 2010 Rating Curve Analysis To perform a rating curve analysis Select a TimeSenes for both water discharge and level Diechange mars FlowD EFO05 Level Mm Cancel Figure 2 37 Use this dialog to select two time series for an RCA 3 Select the discharge object from the available time series in the first list box 4 Select the level object from the available time series in the second list box 5 Click OK Note Although the time series in Figure Figure 2 37 are labelled as discharge and level any two time series can be used to perform the RCA So a
328. oss section will be extracted 2 Draw a line or polyline see Drawing Lines and Closed Polylines under Creating New Data Items on p 69 for more details or open a file containing a polyline which defines the xy location of the cross section Possible files include 12s 13s shp or mif 3 Select the line object in the WorkSpace e To increase the resolution of the polyline see the section Resampling Lines and LineSets under Selecting Data Items on p 80 4 Select Tools Map Object See Mapping Objects under Tools on p 113 for more details 5 Select the grid or mesh from which the cross section is to be taken and select the OK button The value applied to each point on the cross section is interpolated from the surface of the grid or mesh The cross section will appear in the WorkSpace as a child of the line and will have this icon 8 The cross section will have the name of the grid or mesh from which the cross section was taken followed by XSection new Openline Pain s24 DEMXSection Figure 1 97 This cross section was taken from a data item named DEM By default cross sections appear in the WorkSpace as 3D line objects 123 EnSim Core September 2010 2101 x eee 2 I igure 1 98 The view on the right is the cross section extracted from the black line in the view on lefi 1 7 3 Extracting Cross Sections from Points and Line Data Cross sections may be extracted from non gridded data
329. ound in the File menu or by clicking the E3 button Consult your Windows documentation for help in using Windows based applications EnSim documentation consists of a manual and an online help system The online help system is accessed through the EnSim Help menu The manual and the online help system of EnSim documentation are intended to be independent All information contained in the manual can also be found in the online help system Version and copyright information about EnSim can be obtained using the command About in the Help menu 1 1 3 1 Conventions in EnSim Help Bold designates the name of a menu menu choice dialog dialog option or workspace Category e g File Italics highlight a term or concept being defined or described e g Categories are elements defined by EnSim to organise the workspace Angle brackets gt indicate key presses e g lt Ctrl gt key An gt indicates a sequence of menu selections e g File Open Section 1 2 The WorkSpace September 2010 1 2 THE WORKSPACE The WorkSpace provides an organizational structure for the data files and view windows being used in EnSim In a window on the left hand side of the screen the WorkSpace 1s displayed as a tree consisting of a hierarchical display of categories organizational headings for objects and objects data or view objects similar to the file hierarchy structure of Windows Explorer Unlike Windows Explorer the hierarchy does not repr
330. oundary has a constant discharge enter the value in m s in the text box e Discharge Series If the upstream boundary has a discharge that varies over time click Ka to select and load a scalar time series ts1 file that describes the changes 22 The GENID Model September 2010 e Reflective This boundary type indicates that there is no discharge entering the channel from this node It effectively acts as a barrier to flow Node ID The upstream boundary is automatically defined as the highest node of the network opposite the downstream boundary Series Click a to select and load a scalar time series that describes the changes in the boundary conditions over time if you ve selected a Water Level Series or Discharge Series boundary type For more information on the property tabs for the time series see Properties of Data Items under Data Items on p 17 4 2 1 5 Cross Sections After the simulation parameters have been established but before the simulation can be run cross sectional data must be entered for each segment of the channel network There are several ways to accomplish this 4 2 1 5 1 Associating a Cross Section with a Segment If you have collected data about the bathymetry of the channel that data can be associated with the segment to which it applies To associate a cross section with a segment 1 Load the cross section into the WorkSpace as an 13s 3D line set file See Extracting Cross Sections fro
331. performed 2 Select Tools Calculator A dialog will open 115 EnSim Core September 2010 Calculator Hi Figure 1 93 The calculator applies an arithmetic operation to a data item 3 In the Function box select the operation you would like to carry out Plus Subtract Times Divide by from the pull down menu In the field beneath this menu enter the number factor or divisor by which the values of the data item should be changed The units for the data attribute can also be entered at this time Note The units entered are stored in the EnSim file header for the data item with the AttributeUnits keyword They may be displayed on the Data tab of an object s property dialog or in a popup window Note also that changing the units of an object will not perform a conversion this entry is for reference only If a data item cannot be modified with a calculator used with the calculator the icon on the tool bar and the menu option in the Tools menu will be unavailable 1 6 9 2 The Calculator for Gridded Objects A more sophisticated tool 1s available for gridded data Both scalar and vector or static and time varying gridded data items can be manipulated with this tool To use the calculator 1 Select a gridded data item in the WorkSpace This is an important step as only data item with the same geometry as the selected object will be available in the calculator 2 Choose Tools gt Calculator A dialog window will open
332. ping of a georeferenced GeoTIFF image over a rectangular grid or triangular mesh for visualization of a 3 dimensional image This capability allows you to e Locate structures roads waterways or other obstacles that might affect or be affected by the model e Observe the limitations of the model e More realistically visualize the spatial domain of the model To drape an image 1 Import a GeoTIFF tiff into the WorkSpace 2 Create or load a rectangular grid r2s with the identical spatial extent as that of the image The resolutions of the grid and the image do not have to be identical See the sections on Creating a New Regular Grid under Creating New Data Items on p 70 and Mapping Objects under Tools on p 113 for more details Alternatively load a triangular mesh t3s with a spatial extent that overlaps that of the image 3 Drag the rectangular grid or triangular mesh onto the image so that the grid or mesh becomes a child of the image 4 Drag the image into a 3D view 122 Section 1 7 How To Hints and Tricks September 2010 88 Draping Example l a r PA a sa re ee ere Figure 1 96 This image has been draped onto an elevation model to produce a landscape 1 7 2 Extracting Cross Sections from Gridded Data Cross sections may be extracted from data that is in the form of a grid or mesh To create a cross section or 3D polyline 1 Display in a 2D view the object from which the cr
333. play tab of the Channels object s Properties dialog uncheck the Target Outlets Visible box The circles surrounding the outlet nodes will disappear 2 Double click on the channel node Channel nodes are located at the endpoints of each channel line segment 148 Section 2 1 Watershed Objects September 2010 Figure 2 17 The arrows indicate nodes along this channel segment 2 1 3 4 Basin or Watershed Boundaries The watershed boundary is an isoline that defines the watershed The watershed or basin consists of all the nodes of the DEM that drain towards a watershed outlet node Watershed boundaries can be saved independently of the watershed object Properties of New Watershed x watershed DEM Channels Basin 1 Display ata Spatial Meta Data Outlet Basin 2 Coord 445400 Area 535 84000000 km Y Coord FO F600 Elevation 774097 Strahler Order 3 Figure 2 18 The properties of a basin object cannot be directly edited The following properties visible on the Data tab as read only fields cannot be edited without changing the watershed object e Outlet area e X Coord x coordinate of the outlet node e Y Coord y coordinate of the outlet node e Elevation elevation of the outlet node in m e Basin e Area Total drainage area at the outlet node in km 149 Green Kenue September 2010 e Strahler Order indicates the order of the highest order stream within the basin 2 1 3 4
334. ppear greyed out In this example January and February have been removed as shown in Figure Figure 2 40 CO RatingCurvesAnalysis O2FEOO F Name Discharge Q Flow02FE00 Level A Leveld2FE00 Ratinglurvesnalysis Na DO aY Rating Curve ee wen ne en ec enna ennne SE OC HHON 7 Pei decree 4 3 Corr Coeff 0 3842 ee PRE NAMA LT Loge 33 392 M 17 9356 HO O Display Colour Default Subzet Jan Jul Feb P sug Mar Sep wW p T Oct M Hay IT Nov O Jun l Dec Start 1998 01 01 End 1998704701 Figure 2 40 The data from the months of January and February have been removed from the calculations By removing the selected months a new rating curve has been calculated and the correlation coefficient has improved to 0 9842 As shown in Figure Figure 2 40 several low flow points are skewing the upper section of the curve An additional temporal subset can be created but the low flow points may be in the middle of the data set In that case creating a temporal subset would not solve the problem The remaining low flow data points can be removed by inactivating the points Removing the few remaining points by selecting them and making them inactive results in a rating curve with a correlation coefficient of 0 9966 as shown in Figure Figure 2 41 171 Green Kenue i RatingCurveAnalysis 02FE007 Name i Discharge 0 Flow02FE007 RabngCumehnaha Rating Curve F O CHH0O AN
335. quired if the Projection Is LambertConformal Or Albers The central meridian is the longitude of the centre of the projection It is also referred to as the Longitude of Origin 265 EnSim Core September 2010 266 LatitudeOfOrigin Required if the Projection 1S LambertConformal or Albers The latitude of origin is the latitude where the central meridian crosses the projection origin or base line FirstStandardParallel Required if the Projection 1S LambertConformal or Albers The first standard parallel is the latitude nearest the equator where the cone of the conic projection intersects the globe SecondStandardParallel Required if the Projection 1S LambertConformal or Albers The second standard parallel is the latitude nearest the pole where the cone of the conic projection intersects the globe FalseEasting Required if the Projection 1s LambertConformal or Albers The false easting is the value added to the x coordinate It is usually used to remove negative coordinate values FalseNorthing Required if the Projection 1s LambertConformal or Albers The false northing is the value added to the y coordinate It is usually used to remove negative coordinate values AttributeName Required or Optional depending on file type Together with AttributeUnits and AttributeType this keyword identifies data attributes associated with the data in the file The data following this keyword is in two parts Th
336. r 3 Enter the multiplier you would like to apply to the cross section and click OK 4 2 1 5 3 Copying a Cross section to a Segment If multiple segments have similar cross section data it is possible to copy the cross sections directly from one segment to another To copy a cross section to a segment 1 Select the segment to which you would like to copy the cross section Copy Cross Section x Figure 4 15 This dialog is used to copy cross section data directly from one segment of a channel to another 229 The GENID Model September 2010 2 From the shortcut menu select CrossSection Copy CrossSection to Segment 3 Select a scale if the segments are of different sizes and click Copy gt gt 4 2 1 5 4 Orthogonally Positioning a Cross Section If a created copied or otherwise associated cross section is not properly positioned with regards to its segment it can be automatically moved horizontally on the x y plane so that the cross section meets the midpoint of the segment at a right angle Note The x y position of the lowest point of the cross section 1s set to the midpoint of the segment To orthogonally position a cross section 1 Within a 2D or 3D view window select either the segment or the cross section that is not properly positioned 2 From the shortcut menu select CrossSection Orthogonally Position CrossSection at Segment if you selected the segment or Orthogonally Position if you se
337. r 2010 These style types may be applied to objects whose icon represents point data line sets s7 and time series displayed as lines and points or points only For the line sets and time series these styles are available in the lower right portion of the window e Line Styles Solid Dotted Short Dash Long Dash Dot Dash and Long Dot Dash e Point Styles Fill Square Half Fill Square Square Fill Triangle Half Fill Triangle Triangle Fill Marker Half Fill Marker Marker Fill Diamond Half Fill Diamond Diamond Fill Octagon Half Fill Octagon Octagon Fill Star Star X Plus and Asterisk Visible Indicates whether the object that has been dragged into a view is visible in a new window This option can also be selected from the shortcut menu Transparent Indicates whether the object is transparent to underlying objects in the view window Monochrome Changes the colour display of the object to one colour The colour can be changed by clicking on the adjacent colour box Clip Contours Only available for grid objects Only available when the display style is Filled Contours When this is toggled on areas lower than the lowest contour level are not displayed Animate Toggles the animation of time varying data The object is not in animation mode by default Line Width Adjusts the line size of lines in the image Maximum line width is 10 Point Size Adjusts the point size of points in the image Maximum point s
338. r diverging or converging as defined by the direction of the computation The network permits even complex river topographies to be schematized and modelled 4 1 GENERAL BACKGROUND 4 1 1 Basic Equations The basic equations used in GENID are the one dimensional shallow water equations Navier Stokes equations under the hydrostatic assumption for unsteady flow in open channels e The motion equation 2 BU BU 8H SU l ee Ot Ox Ox CR Sou e The continuity equation OU oH eee E psa ale ae Bai ta where e x longitudinal distance along the river 7n e time Ss e H elevation of water surface above a specific datum 7n e U mean cross sectional velocity in the channel direction m s e g z acceleration due to gravity m s e v viscosity coefficient 215 The GENID Model September 2010 e C Chezy friction coefficient e R hydraulic radius 7n e A channel area m B channel width m values between Bop and Bpr e dr tributary discharge per unit length m s In GENID the hydraulic radius R defined as the ratio between the channel area 4 and wetted perimeter is approximated to the ratio between the channel area 4 and the channel width B 4 1 2 Geometric Requirements The formulation of a model based on the finite difference method requires that discrete segments be used to represent physical topography or geomorphology The model consists of simulation parameters
339. re 1 104 Registering a GeoTIFF image at the corners 4 If the coordinate system is known it should be assigned see Coordinate Systems Assigning Projections on p 27 5 On saving the GeoTIFF image the origin and pixel size will be written to the file Only non rotated images in a rectangular space can be saved A rotated or stretched image may viewed only 1 7 11 Classification of a GeoTIFF Image The pixels of a GeoTIFF image may be categorized into classes by associating the pixel value to a colour and a class name In Ensim this is only possible with 8 bit and 16 bit images To classify a GeoTIFF image 1 Import the GeoTIFF image into the WorkSpace by selecting File Import 2 Open the Properties dialog and select the Classes tab 130 Section 1 7 How To Hints and Tricks September 2010 Properties of Example Image x Classes Image Spatial Meta Data Rainbow Custom Theme Save Cancel Figure 1 105 Classes tab for a GeoTIFF image 3 The colour value of each image pixel is associated with a class name In the figure above the image contains seven distinct values ranging from 21 to 27 The group of class colours names and values is defined as a theme and may be saved as an ASCII thm file see GeoTIFF Theme files thm on p 305 for more information You can create a Custom Theme or selecting from a list of predefined saved themes To create a Custom Theme 1 With Custom Theme
340. re no binary table file formats 294 Appendix A September 2010 Velocity Roses vr1 The Velocity Rose file object contains the probabilities of occurrence of velocities binned by magnitude and direction The global sum of the table is 1 The icon used to represent the velocity rose object in the WorkSpace is The file extension of a velocity rose object is vr1 File Headers vr1 An example velocity rose file is shown below HEE HH HH HH HH EE EH HH EH EE EH EH HH EH EEE EH EE HE EEE HOE EE EEE EEE EOE EEE EEE EE HH FileType vri ASCII EnSim 1 0 Canadian Hydraulics Centre National Research Council c 1998 2007 DataType Velocity Rose it Application GreenKenue Version Sie BANG WrittenBy Username CreationDate Thu Jul 05 2007 03 42 PM a IN ef er N SourceFile winddata ts2 it Name Example Velocity Rose Title Example Velocity Rose Velocity Rose LocationX 0 000000 LOCATI1ONY 0 000000 i SECCTOTNIOCN 45 000000 SpeedBinCount 8 Probabilities by sector Table sum should be 1 t 1120 0 Dire45 0 Direo0 0 Dir 135 0 Dir 180 0 DIE 2520 N102210 0 Dir L50 F 0 109489 0 113607 0 114917 0073367 032124143 0 195209 0 138873 0 129796 Table Sum 1 000000 EndHeader 0 000000 O 000000 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 0 000000 22500000 0027513 0 026483 0 026577 0 026670 0 030882 0 019745 0 028355 0 022366 5 000000 0 038181 0 030788 0 040988 0 034438 0 052218 0 050
341. re not necessarily applicable to an object of a different type say a 2D grid object or a point set All EnSim objects have a native file format See Native File Formats on p 270 for details There are different categories of objects spatial objects and container objects Spatial objects are those that have geometry and attributes They are the ones that can be displayed in a view edited manipulated etc Container objects do not have geometry They are containers or organizers for other objects and data They keep related objects together in one location A Green Kenue Watershed object is a container and so is a Blue Kenue SELAFIN slf object Time series are similar to spatial objects in that they may be displayed edited and manipulated but they are different in that they do not have geometry only attributes EnSim Core September 2010 1 4 1 Loading and Importing Data Items To load a data item into the WorkSpace there are two types of data items recognized by EnSim 1 For native EnSim data items choose the Open command from the File menu or use the S button When the Open dialog box appears select the file to be opened into the WorkSpace and choose the DE button The 8 files most recently opened in EnSim are shown at the bottom of the File menu 2 For foreign data items choose the Import command from the File menu When the Open dialog appears select the file and choose the OK button 1 4 1 1 Native Data Items
342. reached a steady state The smaller the value the more precise the determination The default value of 0 0001 represents a 0 01 variation Extremely small values such as le 07 are recommended e Courant See Run Type Run above e Viscosity See Run Type Run above e Calibrate Friction To Water Level This type of simulation is used to calibrate a friction coefficient for a channel if the surface elevation is known e Calibrate at Node ID This value represents the ID of the target node to which the calibration 1s to be applied e Calibrate to Water Level This value represents the target water level at the node specified above in metres e Minimum Strickler This is a lower calibration limit for the estimated Strickler value of the channel e Maximum Strickler This is the upper calibration limit for the estimated Strickler value of the channel e Steady State Discharge Accuracy See Run Type Run to Steady State above e Courant See Run Type Run above e Viscosity See Run Type Run above 221 The GENID Model September 2010 e Calibrate Friction To Discharge This type of simulation is used to determine the friction coefficient for a channel if only the discharge is known Calibrate to Discharge This value represents the discharge rate of the channel in m s Minimum Strickler This is a lower calibration limit for the estimated Strickler value of the channel Maximum Strickler This is the upper calibrati
343. rocessors spreadsheets and multimedia tools 1 1 2 Getting Started EnSim Core forms the basis of a variety of applications e g WaveSim Blue Kenue Green Kenue that comprise the EnSim family These applications all share fundamental functions which form the core of EnSim As a result this manual is set up in a modular fashion There is a section under the heading EnSim Core that details the functions common to all EnSim applications and a separate section under the title of the application that describes those functions that are particular to the specific application If you re a first time user it might be easier to begin with the section on EnSim Core to become familiar with the basics of EnSim before proceeding to the section specific to the EnSim application The sections of this manual that are specific to a particular application illustrate how to perform only the functions that are specific to that application e g Blue Kenue and assume that you are familiar with core EnSim functions EnSim Core September 2010 1 1 3 Getting Help with EnSim EnSim is a Windows based application All EnSim documentation assumes that you are familiar with Windows based applications That is it assumes you know how to use a mouse open a menu choose menu and dialog options and other Windows based functions EnSim documentation also assumes familiarity with standard Windows menus and buttons such as the Open document command which can be f
344. roduce a smaller file 85 is the recommended quality level Figure 1 45 This button is used to start recording 8 When you are ready to begin record click the Record button If you selected Advanced encoding the Video Compression dialog will appear next While recording the view window may not update to show the animation in progress 1 5 15 2 Copying to the Clipboard A bitmap image of a view may be copied to the clipboard and pasted into other applications NOTE The image stored in the clipboard will have twice the number of pixels in X and Y as the source view window To copy the image of a view window to the clipboard 1 Arrange the view as you wish to record the image Ensure that the view window is the currently selected view 2 Click on the Copy to Clipboard button 3 in the tool bar or select View gt Copy to Clipboard The image may then be pasted by using lt Ctrl v gt or selecting File Paste 1 5 15 3 Printing Selecting the Print command from the File menu will send the image in the currently selected view window to the printer destination designated in the Print dialog A title block will be given to the printed image displaying the view window title and the date and time at which the view was printed To change the title of the printed image open the Properties dialog of the View window Choose the Meta Data tab and edit the Title and Subtitle fields The Subtitle will be placed under the Title on the
345. roject by serving as beta testers and providing technical feedback constructive criticism and helpful comments Al Pietroniro National Hydrology Research Centre Environment Canada Saskatoon Saskatchewan Jean Guy Zakrevsky Water Survey Canada Environment Canada Ottawa Ontario Stuart Hamilton Pacific Yukon Region Meteorological Service of Canada Environment Canada Vancouver British Columbia David Hutchinson Pacific Yukon Region Meteorological Service of Canada Environment Canada Vancouver British Columbia Nicholas Kouwen Department of Civil Engineering University of Waterloo Waterloo Ontario David Morin Environmental Protection Services Environment Canada Gatineau Quebec Erika Klyszejko Water Survey Canada Environment Canada Ottawa Ontario Raymond Bourdages Technical Development Water Survey Branch Environment Canada Ottawa Ontario Maurice Sydor Data Integration Modelling and Analysis Environment Canada Gatineau Quebec Thanks are also given to the many users who have provided feedback and suggestions for other applications within the EnSim family 1 Table of Contents ENSIM CORE ide tetera mk es ote ana eaves bs 1 1 1 A QUICK OVERVIEW 2244200c00cb0deceu beter Gur KANAN cast 1 1 1 1 The EnSim Simulation Environment 04 1 Veli GEN Sand aNG wae alee Se otis Sw abi 1 1 1 3 Getting Help with EnSim aaa 2 1 1 3 1 Conventions in EnSim Help aaa
346. rols 58 Section 1 5 Views September 2010 Properties of 7D Yiew 1 X Display Recording Spatial Temporal Tools Meta Data Objects Frame Step Date Time Display W Show Clock Format 2 Days 17 00 00 000 Options Interactive View Playback Max FrameRate 20 Figure 1 38 The Properties tab for the Simulation Clock Clock Options a x Decorations Font Older Aral B Colour W Colour e HE ls Italics M Background Bald Colour Underline Figure 1 39 This dialog is accessed from the Options button shown in the above image 1 5 10 4 Labels Labels allow you to display text information within a view window They can be created and edited To create a label 1 With a view selected select the create labels button Pi or View New Label 2 Click the cursor in the view window A text window will appear at the cursor location 3 Type the text that you would like displayed Note that the label will extend horizontally according to the length of the text and vertically in response to the lt Enter gt key 4 Click the cursor outside the label to finish S9 EnSim Core September 2010 To edit a label 1 Double click on a label to select it e To edit the label s text select Edit from the label s shortcut menu e To delete the label select Remove from the shortcut menu or press Delete e To move or resize the label click on and drag t
347. rticular Elevation Band are considered to comprise a single area This value is obtained from the Basin panel and cannot be edited e Band Elevation By default this variable gives the median elevation for the Elevation Band All areas within the band are considered to have this elevation If this value isn t appropriate for example if the majority of terrain is near the top of the band and hence above the median enter the corrected value here 256 Section 5 2 The HBV EC Interface September 2010 e Area This variable shows the total area of the terrain contained within the Elevation Band in square kilometres This value is obtained from the Basin panel and cannot be edited e Land Class Parameters A Land Class consists of a specific combination of Land Use Region Slope Band and Aspect Band All of the Land Classes within the particular Elevation Band chosen in the previous area will be shown in the list displayed at the top of Figure 5 20 Note Because all Lake terrain is considered to have a Slope and Aspect of 0 with no snow no soil and no canopy the only variable listed for Lake terrain is Area Land Class Parameters Forest slope 22 1 aspeckS lo e125 spect 180 Slope fe Initial Snow Solid Initial Snow Liquid 0 Initial Soil Morsture 0 Figure 5 20 These variables apply to a specific Land Class e Area This variable displays the total area of the selected Land Class This value is
348. rties of aCDCD Station 0 205 32i Detalls 2775 s80566 6 eh44 Sab GG55 86 45 504 LG ONG NAGWALA NG 205 3 2 4 2 Meta DAA aaa wm BAGA NG a a NG BKA 206 3 2 5 Properties of Associated Time Series 206 XIV 87 Table of ContentsSeptember 2010 4 3 2 5 1 Subset cae aa ve tn dee dee ek deen en oad ae eae eed 207 3 3 NARR DATABASE 000 cee eee asa 209 Ol IMIKOQUCUON iccesee oa eee dae Ree eee ew Od oe oe 0 GN 209 3 3 2 Downloading the NARR Data 0 00005 209 3 3 3 Accessing the NARR Variables 005 210 e To import the NARR data 0 0 0 0 ce nee 210 THE GEN1D MODEL 0 ccc eee 215 4 1 GENERAL BACKGROUND 0c cece eee ees 215 4 1 1 Basic Equations es 215 4 1 2 Geometric Requirements 0 2000 cee eee 216 4 2 THE GEN1D INTERFACE 00 ee 219 4 2 1 Setting Up Simulation Parameters 219 Aila SIMUNO gin ow eed tee a Oe wee bee eee ee Ge oem age yo 219 4 2 1 2 CHANNE 26 codon ode Bw 4d ene See dnd eA Ee GWA de A 223 4 2 1 2 1 Creating a Channel Object 0 000000 0 8 223 e To create a new channel object 0 0 00 cc ee ee 223 4 2 1 2 2 Opening an Existing Channel Object 224 e To open an existing channel object 0 0 0 0 cee eae 224 4 2 1 2 3 Changing a Segment Attribute Value 224
349. ry see Identifying Zones Within HBV EC on p 248 By default all areas of a newly created HBV EC Parameter Set watershed are assigned to the Open region 245 The HBV EC Model September 2010 5 2 2 4 The Slope Tab The Slope tab lets you control the number of slope bands that will be used in the model as well as the criteria for each band Like the Elevation tab you can change the Min values by clicking on and editing the values the Max Area and Median values will change accordingly You can also change the colour values by clicking within the Colour column Climate Hevation Land Use Slope As EC Bands Display Spatial Meta Data Number of Bands 4 fv Show Legend Figure 5 10 This watershed has been divided into six slope bands of roughly equal area The numbers given for the Min Max and Median values refer to the percentage of slope ranging from 0 flat to 100 vertical Each slope category is referred to within HBV EC by its median value 246 Section 5 2 The HBV EC Interface September 2010 2D View 2 0 00 to 11 00 Figure 5 11 This triangular mesh corresponds to the Slope tab shown above 5 2 2 5 The Aspect Tab The Aspect tab shows the aspect or the direction that the slope faces of the terrain within the watershed This value combined with the elevation and slope values gives the position and orientation of each area of land within the watershed Climate Elevation Land U
350. s User Settings f Fit to User specified deltas E C Calculate FRAC from Contributing Areas Colect Cancel Figure 2 46 This Map Gen tab has had data entered manually 2 Click the ppe button To set map file specifications automatically Properties of Watflood Map x Map Gen Display ColorScale Data Spatial Meta Data Source Watershed i es Watershed Collect physiagraphical data from the watershed Specihicatian k Origin 414000 4963000 Count Tr 15 Delta 2000 2000 te Default Settings User Settings Fitto User specified deltas adi C Calculate FRAC from Contributing Areas Collect Figure 2 47 This Map Gen tab has been given values from a source watershed 1 Setting the specifications manually requires that a watershed be associated with the map file Select the f Default Settings option The specifications will be determined by fitting the basin to the associated watershed The map file will be created from all the watershed data contained within the Watflood Map specifications Selecting Collect will cause all of the watershed data contained within the WATFLOOD specifications to be extracted and applied to the Watflood Map object If the Calculate FRAC from Contributing Areas option is enabled the effective area of each cell is adjusted based on the amount of inflow from neighbouring cells Please see the WATFLOOD manual for further details
351. s The default value assigned by Green Kenue to all cells iS Zero e Land use The number of Land Cover Classes can be modified within the Data tab The land use data attributes may be added manually see Adding Land Use Data Using Closed Polygons on p 183 or automatically from preprocessed GeoTIFF files see Adding Land Use Data Using GeoTIFFs on p 186 e Bankfull capacities Bankfull capacity is the maximum flow in cubic metres per second the stream in a cell can handle before flooding It is used for animation of flooding The Include Bankfull Capacities checkbox adds a blank section to the map file Values need to be manually inputted for each cell If the Bankfull Capacities section is not included 181 Green Kenue September 2010 WATFLOOD calculates default capacities when the watershed file is generated If the Include Bankfull Capacities box is checked but the values are not changed from the default values of zero they are disregarded and WATFLOOD generates them automatically Note The outlet cell should exist in the cell immediately downstream of the last watershed cell The outlet cell should only have a value for channel invert elevation All other parameters for this cell should have a value of zero 2 3 1 4 2 Calculating the Default Data Attributes from the Watershed Object Most of the data attributes of the Watflood Map are automatically calculated from the DEM Exceptions include routing reach number land use and b
352. s the interval will be decreased if they are not varying at all it will be increased e Run Type This selection determines the type of simulation to be performed which in turn determines which coefficients will be involved There are five Run Types 220 Section 4 2 The GENID Interface September 2010 Hun to Steady Stabe Calibrate Friction To Water Level Calibrate Friction To Discharge Generate Hating Curve Figure 4 5 The Run Type menu indicates what type of simulation is being prepared e Run A standard simulation run which involves one or two coefficients e Courant The Courant number is the ratio of the physical speed of the model to the calculation speed Fora GENID model this value must be greater than 0 and less than or equal to 1 This parameter is only visible when the Allow the model to vary the timestep option has been activated e Viscosity The viscosity coefficient from the motion equation Water is assumed to have a viscosity value of 1 See Basic Equations under General Background on p 215 for more information e Run to Steady State This type of simulation generates a model of the channel under steady state conditions This model can then be used as a starting point in further simulations to establish behaviour under atypical conditions This type of simulation involves two or three parameters e Steady State Discharge Accuracy This parameter determines the point at which the model is assumed to have
353. s existing in the WorkSpace Once a line is chosen all items intersected by this line are selected The Edit Select ltems In Polygon menu command presents the user with a list of closed lines polygons existing in the WorkSpace Once a line is chosen all items whose centers fall within the closed line are selected 1 6 3 Editing Data Items This section covers the editing of data items including regular grids triangular meshes line sets point sets parcel sets networks and time series Components of foreign but supported files such as MapInfo Interchange or ArcView Shapefile cannot be edited directly However they may be saved in a native EnSim format which may then be edited Editing data items in EnSim consists of altering the value of the current data attribute of a displayed object In some cases the coordinates of nodes or points of the object can be edited as well For information on editing a Time Series Editing Time Series under TimeSeries Tools on p 104 1 6 3 1 Editing Attributes To edit an attribute of a data object 1 Select the component to be edited 1 e the node line segment point etc and select the Edit command from the shortcut menu A dialog box will appear which differs depending on the type of object and the number of data attributes it has 2 To edit an attribute value click on the value to highlight it Enter the new value and press Ok 73 EnSim Core September 2010
354. s how frequently a TimeSeries equals or exceeds a particular value as a percentage of time To compute a flow duration curve 1 In the WorkSpace select the TimeSeries to be examined 2 From the menu bar select Tools TimeSeries gt Compute Flow Duration Curve or select Compute Flow Duration Curve from the shortcut menu The Flow Duration Curve XY Data Object will be created and displayed in the WorkSpace as a child object of the parent TimeSeries with the icon and the suffix FDC The Flow Duration Curve object can be viewed in a 1D view and saved as a xy file 1 6 6 5 Computing a Cumulative Sum To compute a cumulative sum 1 In the WorkSpace select the TimeSeries whose sum you d like to compute 2 From the menu bar select Tools TimeSeries gt Compute Cumulative Sum The Cumulative Sum TimeSeries will be created and displayed in the WorkSpace as a child object of the parent TimeSeries with the icon and the suffix Sum The Cumulative Sum object can be viewed in a 1D View and saved as a t3s file 1 6 6 6 Computing an Integral The integral value of a TimeSeries represents the sum of the area under the curve 110 Section 1 6 Tools September 2010 To compute the integral of a TimeSeries 1 In the WorkSpace select the TimeSeries to be examined 2 From the menu bar select Tools TimeSeries Compute Integral The integral will be displayed in a message window The message window indic
355. s you select a bitmap image to insert into the report Like the shape objects you can move or resize the image by clicking and dragging On the Properties dialog you can give the image a border or unlock its aspect ratio to resize its height and width independently e Clicking this button creates a legend in the report If you have any data items loaded in the Workspace a dialog box will appear that allows you to select from which object the legend will be created If you choose an object as the source of the legend the Colour Scale properties will be used to determine the colours used If you choose to create a default legend a simple legend will be inserted 50 Section 1 5 Views September 2010 EI Clicking this button copies the selected object to the clipboard and removes it from the report Clicking this button copies the selected object to the clipboard but leaves the original behind Clicking this button pastes the object in the clipboard into the report If there is no object available to be pasted this button will be greyed out This button toggles the snap to grid on and off See Report View Window Page Setup Properties on p 52 for more details 1 5 9 3 Manipulating the Report View The EnSim Report view represents a sheet of paper on which the report is displayed Instead of manipulating the report itself you change its appearance and contents by manipulating the objects it contains To add
356. se Slope Aspect Bands Display Spatial Meta Data North East South West w W Show Legend Colour rection Bearing Area North 0 70 R96 Fast 90 61 3625 South 180 60 9275 West 270 54 2575 Figure 5 12 This Aspect tab divides the terrain into four aspect bands There are three options for the aspect category which can be selected on the menu at the top of the tab 247 The HBV EC Model September 2010 e None The aspect of the terrain is ignored for the simulation e North South The terrain is divided into north facing and south facing categories e North East South West The terrain is divided into north facing south facing east facing and west facing categories Figure 5 13 This watershed has been divided into north east south and west facing aspects 5 2 2 6 Identifying Zones Within HBV EC Two of the tabs within the HBV EC panel obtain their data from user supplied information instead of deriving it from the watershed object The Climate and Land Use tabs require you to provide information on their respective subjects This information must be mapped onto the triangular mesh corresponding to each data tab This can be done using polygons that outline each area by importing a GeoTIFF that describes the zones or for Climate Zones by using a point set to produce Thiessen polygons To identify a zone using polygons Note These instructions assume that you do
357. se Tab 0 0 a 245 5 2 2 4 The Slope Tab 00 a 246 5 2 2 5 The Aspect Tab 0 aaa 247 5 2 2 6 Identifying Zones Within HBV EC 00 248 e To identify a zone using polygons 0 00 ee ee 248 e To identify a zone using a GeoTIFF 0 00 00 0 eee 249 e To identify a climate zone using points 00000 250 5 2 3 The Simulation Panel 00 a 250 5 2 4 The Climate Zone Panel 0 0 00 0 ee 253 5 2 4 1 The Parameters Tab 0 0 0 a 253 5 2 4 2 TheMetTab 00 0 ee eee 257 5 3 THE HBV EC MODEL 0 0c e eee ee 259 e To run the HBV EC model 0 000000000 cece ee 259 5 3 1 The Results of the HBV EC Model 260 APPENDIX A FILE TYPES OF ENSIM CORE 263 Appendix A General Information aa 263 e File Headers 0 264 e ASCII and Binary Files nananana aa 268 e ASCII Files aaa 6 toe tk 6b oink uke a pin oe we oe 268 Binaty Files suceeeeeett aes raupa er AA 268 NATIVE FILE FORMATS s cd s0evnu nerep teen ea eens Rana 270 2D Rectangular Grids r2s r2v 0 0 00 ee 270 e File Headers r2s r2v ee es 270 e Data Organization r2s r2v es 271 Figure A 2 File Formats r2s r2v es 212 XV Table of ContentsSeptember 2010 Figure A 2 ASCIl 2 0 eee ee 212 FIGUIC AZ DINGY oe ma ah AG MAA NG nae eed KARERA ooh ee n
358. set Under Start enter the beginning frame for the subset and under End enter the last frame for the subset 5 Enter the variable letter as the expression in the Expression box For example if you selected the variable A in step 3 enter A in the Expression box See The Calculator for Gridded Objects under Calculators on p 116 for more information 6 Click on the Evaluate button to create the new temporal subset Ensure that the new subset has a name and units Calculator x Yarnables Start End FREE SURFACE Value 133 e foo c foo Result Mame Temporal Subset Unita Mm Cancel Figure 1 102 This calculator is being used to extract a temporal subset of time varying data 1 7 9 Digitizing from an Imported Image Digitizing from a georeferenced image is useful for creating or defining roads landmarks or contour lines that may affect a model or help in the visualization of a spatial domain To digitize from an imported image 1 Import a GeoTIFF image into the WorkSpace by selecting File Import 128 Section 1 7 How To Hints and Tricks 2 Drag the image into the 2D view September 2010 3 Create a new line set following the path of the viewed object in the image See Drawing Lines and Closed Polylines under Creating New Data Items on p 69 for more details For each line drawn define its value as something representative of the object viewed For example you
359. single line set Both 2D and 3D line sets may be saved in the following formats e 2D lines 12s e 3D lines 13s e Point data xyz e ArcView Shape shp e MapInfo Interchange mif e GoogleEarth Keyhole Markup Language kml LatLong only File Headers i2s i3s An example of a 2D line set file is shown below EHH HH Ht HH HH EE HH HH EH EE EE EH HH EH EE EH EE EH HE a EEE HE EOE EEE EEE EE EEE EEE EE FileType 12s ASCII EnSim 1 0 Canadian Hydraulics Centre National Research Council c 1998 2004 DataType 20 Ling Sert Application BlueKenue Version 3 0 44 WrittenBy Username CreationDate Pra Apr Lo 2005 11420 PM a a a Ge E EE E AA Wy ery Na gE AP E E PE nS a ae a a ey a a ee it Projection Cartesian Ellipsoid Unknown AttributeName 1 fracti AttributeType 1 float AttributeName 2 name AttributeType 2 text AttributeName 3 subname AttributeType 3 text AttributeName 4 fract2 279 EnSim Core September 2010 AttributeType 4 float AttributeName 5 whole AttributeType 5 integer EndHeader 4 0 3 Southern Ontario lakes Ontario 0 5 3 21 563981 84 360190 2 606635 49 289100 44 075829 24 170616 90 047393 45 023697 6 0 4 Southern Ontario Lakes Erie 0 75 2 8 x473834 94 596351 5163469154 19 145905 11 911023 144115879 058631607 236177043 Agad Dl 015 6 086778 79 506262 Line set files have no file specific keywords See File Headers on p 2
360. spe 206 POPE Aa 205 TUBING series PAA 206 NLA 207 BU NAA 141 attributes saske enii 142 displaying paa AA 143 CHUN saaan NANA 145 Outlet NOLES snc csscessnccwssdeedsanetsaices 147 BIKE 145 CHC Canadian Hydraulics Centre 1 Chezy coefficient 006 215 SLY AA 58 COMIDPASN sa AA ASANG 58 Contours displaying isoline outlined filled 125 Coordinate Systems 26 assigning projections 27 converting projections dl COLECT ca AA 29 Ga 28 a lie sirens 28 in 2 dimensional views 40 Crookshank 1 1111 a 215 Cross sections extracting from gridded data 123 from points and line data 124 Cumulative Sum ULA 110 Curvatures Ha aalma 93 D Dakila 9 adding other objects to 5 331 Green Kenue CLC ALS Nasa AA BANA 68 IANG SGU aan 69 POL Cana a AN 68 TECULAT CNO eop Gma 70 sloping structure 126 fable ODJECE specsserrgsuenceserans T2 triangular mesh 71 displaying two features 124 in AA AA 73 UE CID UNG S oie E 73 GS a AA 76 points u 75 resampling lines and linesets 80 resampling time series 107 shifting data objects 82 To meshes descise 79 HMO SOTOS sama 104 extracting spatial subset 127 temporal subset 127 TPO OP ING Apapap GA ana 10 NACHNA cates E E 10 MAPPING
361. specified for each point on the grid There will be a new data record for each time step The format given below is repeated for each time step The first numbers in the data record comprise a record header that specifies the time step data and time of the record See Figure A 1 on p 268 for more information on the record header PAO Appendix A September 2010 For Scalar data each record header is followed by a sequential collection of sub records representing the values for each node of the grid for each data attribute Each data attribute sub record stores n values where n is the total number of nodes in the grid Each value is a 4 byte floating point number The values for each node are listed in order beginning at zero index Vl of Al V2ofAl1 Vnof Al V1 of A2 V2 o0f A2 Vnof A2 VI of An V2 of An Vnof Ap Vl of Al V2o0fAl Vnof Al V1 of A2 V2ofA2 Vnof A2 V1 of An V2 of An Vn of Ap RHm VI of Al V2ofAl Vnof Al VI of A2 V2 of A2 Vnof A2 V1 of An V2 of An Vn of Ap e RH Record Header numbered from 1 to m Each frame has it s own record header e V Node value VI is the value of the first node and Vn is the value of the last node The order of these values corresponds to the order of the points of the grid See Data Organization r2s r2v on p 271 for more information on the ordering of points within a grid e A Attribute A1 is the first attribute Ap is the l
362. ss the E button again or the lt Esc gt key ali ie S Lr 3 sE UATE A Ay AA l ES ANAN Figure 1 64 The Live Stream Lines Cursor shows a projected flow Path Stream Lines can also be saved and added to 2D Line Sets 12s To save stream lines 1 While using the live stream lines cursor within the 2D view right click and select Save StreamLine from the shortcut menu A dialog will appear which allows you to choose a name for the 2D Line Set 2 Enter the name of the object to which the StreamLine will be added If you use an existing object the line will be added to the lineset The saved stream line will be added to the StreamLine set and the set is automatically added to the 2D view Further stream lines may be added to this set assuming the name is not changed by repeating the above process Query Ow x Enter name of object to which the new StreamLine iz to be added Cancel Figure 1 65 Select a Line Set name for adding the stream line 1 6 4 3 The Ruler The ruler is a simple tool that can be used to measure distances in a view The units of measurement are the same as those of the view For example if the distance being measured 87 EnSim Core September 2010 is on a 2D triangular mesh whose units are in metres the displayed value of the measurement will also be in metres The ruler tool can only be used in a 2D view To use the ruler click on the ian button in the tool bar Click anywhere i
363. t hbm HBM files are always stored in ASCII format The body of the file consists of columns of data The columns are as described by the columnMetaData keywords and each row represents a single measurement at a particular weather station seperated by the time interval given by the DeltaT keyword 328 Appendix E September 2010 The HBV EC HBT File The HBV EC HBT TableSet is an alternate form of output for the HBV EC model Its creation is triggered by activating the Generate Table File option in the Output Options section of the Simulation panel of the HBV EC Properties dialog It consists largely of a series of nested tables similar in format to the EnSim Core tb0 object which is detailed in Tables tb0 on p 293 File Header hbt EHH HH Ht EH HH EE HH HH EH EE EH EH HE EEE HE EE EE EEE EE HE EE EEE EEO EE EEE EEE HE EE FileType hbt ASCII EnSim 1 0 Canadian Hydraulics Centre National Research Council c 1998 2009 DataType HBVEC Output TableSet Application GreenKenue WrittenBy Username CreationDate Wed Apr 14 2010 03 23 PM AA AA AA AA AA EE AA AA Name Sample HBT File Table Name Sample HBT File Level Watershed StartTime 19837 12731 00700 EndTime 2000 12731 00 00 DeltaTimeHours 24 Area 273 735138 LandArea 263 175911 LakeArea 1 196895 GlacierArea Baso ColumnMetaData ColumnName TotalDischarge FastReservoirDischarge SlowReservoirDischarge GlacierReservoirDisch
364. t Average The aspect of each node of the mesh is computed as the average aspect of all elements connected to the node The aspect of each element is calculated using cross products a 2D Yiew 1 Figure 1 72 Aspects extracted using the eight neighbour finite difference option shown in a 2Dview 1 6 5 1 4 Extracting Curvatures The curvature of a regular grid can be extracted as a surface Curvature values are calculated based on the slope and aspect and it s units are expressed as radians per metre At the node a positive value indicates a convex shape a negative value indicates a concave shape and a zero value indicates a flat shape 93 EnSim Core September 2010 To extract curvature select the grid in the WorkSpace and then select Tools Extract Surface Curvatures from the menu bar There are four methods available for computing curvature on regular grid e Profile Curvature a measure of the rate of change of slope in the direction of the slope Profile curvature describes the shape of the surface in the direction of the slope e Plan Curvature a measure of the rate of change of aspect along an elevation contour Plan curvature describes the shape of the surface perpendicular to the direction of the slope e Tangential Curvature the product of the Plan Curvature and the sine of the slope Tangential curvature describes the shape of the surface in a vertical plane perpendicular to the direction of the slope
365. t Data Attributes in the Watflood Map 182 e To display the same data attributes for all cells 182 e To display all the data attributes for a single cell 183 2 3 1 5 Editing Watflood Map Data Attributes 183 2 3 1 5 1 Adding Land Use Data Using Closed Polygons 183 e To add land class data 0 0 Aa 184 e To map land use data eee 184 xiii Green KenueSeptember 2010 e Points to remember when applying land use data to a Watflood Map 186 2 3 1 5 2 Adding Land Use Data Using GeoTIFFs 186 e To map land use data a 186 e Points to remember when creating land use classes from GeoTIFF images 2 3 1 5 3 Editing Land Use Data 0 0 000008 187 2 3 1 5 4 Resetting a Land Use Class 187 e To reset a land use class 0 ees 187 2 3 1 6 Saving the Watflood Map aa 187 2 3 2 Importing WATFLOOD Files 000 00 187 2 3 2 1 Watflood Event File Properties 2 200000 0 e 188 e To save changes to the Event file 0 00 0000 ee 189 2 3 3 WAIFLOOD Output 70m cis deo eee eee eee ew eee eS 189 2 3 4 Bankfull Animation 2 aaa 190 e To create a bankfull animation cee ee 190 3 ENVIRONMENTAL DATABASES 193 3 1 HYDAT DATABASE 22 0 aaa 193 3 1 1 Introduction 2
366. t the appropriate GeoTIFF images and then select OK Each GeoTIFF image is examined and a unified list of land use classes 1s created Next a pixel mask is created for each cell and the number of pixels of each land use class falling within the cell are counted and the integer percentages are assigned to the new Watflood Map land use classes The resolution of the pixel mask is taken from the most detailed GeoTIFF image supplied 186 Section 2 3 WATFLOOD September 2010 Points to remember when creating land use classes from GeoTIFF images e When GeoTIFF images overlap the value at a pixel is taken from the first image in the list e All GeoTIFF images must be classified using the same theme However not all classes have to be represented in all images e The supplied GeoTIFF images must fully cover the Watershed basin s used to create the Watflood Map e The supplied GeoTIFF images may have differing resolutions Green Kenue uses the pixel size of the highest resolution image supplied when counting pixels 2 3 1 5 3 Editing Land Use Data Land use data can be edited in the same way as other data attributes of the Watflood Map file See Editing Watflood Map Data Attributes on p 183 for more information 2 3 1 5 4 Resetting a Land Use Class To reset a land use class 1 Select the land class attribute on the Data tab of the Watflood Map s properties dialog Click Apply and ensure that there 1s a green checkmark to the
367. t3v t3m t3c t4s t4v e Grids r2s r2v 12c To relocate a Data Object 1 Select the Data Object within the WorkSpace or the View In general the entire Data Object will be relocated To relocate individual points see Editing Points on p 75 Note If you ve selected a Line within a View only that Line will be relocated not the entire Line Set To relocate a Line Set you must select it in the WorkSpace 2 From the menu bar select Edit Shift in X Y x sl Shifting the object Closed ine Please enter the offset values Cancel Ka ha Cancel r fi Figure 1 58 The Line Set ClosedLinel is being shift in both X and Y 3 Enter the offsets for the X and Y values and click OK 1 6 4 Probing Data Preliminary interpretation of the data can be done with the use of dynamic or static data probes Static data probes display the data attributes associated with a specific component such as a particular line cell or node of the object Dynamic data probes such as the live cursor continually update the probe value as the cursor moves across the view 82 Section 1 6 Tools September 2010 1 6 4 1 Data Probes Data probes display the data attributes associated with the individual components of an object A component can be a node of a grid or mesh a point from an xyz set or a line segment from a shape file line set object or network For objects with time varying data time series can be ex
368. te System It is important to understand the connection between an object s coordinate system and the view in which the object has been placed All objects that have not had a coordinate system assigned to them are assumed to use the Cartesian coordinate system with an unknown ellipsoid Refer to the previous section on assigning a coordinate system to an object for further details The following section outlines the criteria for keeping track of a coordinate system for an object and a view e Data Item Coordinate System Unknown View Coordinate System Unknown The data item can be dragged onto the view e Data Item Coordinate System Known View Coordinate System Unknown If the data item has a known coordinate system once the object has been placed in the view the view will be assigned the coordinate system of the data item e Data Item Coordinate System Unknown View Coordinate System Known If a view already has a coordinate system from another object the view will give a warning when you attempt to view an object with an unknown coordinate system An error message similar to the dialog shown below will appear To avoid this problem assign a coordinate system to the object Refer to the previous section for further details x sp Warning Coordinate systems do not match tf Object Example Object CoordSys Cartesian Unknown LatLong GRS80 4 180 View anyway Figure 1 14 This error message is shown when viewing an object with
369. te zones to be identified See Drawing Points on p 68 for more information on creating a point set 2 In the WorkSpace right click on the Climate Zones object and select Map Climate Zones from points from the shortcut menu Available Objects x i Climate Points 3 Figure 5 15 The Climate Points point set can be selected from this dialog 3 From the Available Objects dialog select the point set that corresponds to the climate zones Click OK Fach point on the Climate Zones map will be assigned a value equal to that of the point to which it is closest The number of values assigned to the members of the point set determine the number of climate zones on the map You can identify the properties of each climate zone on the Simulation panel 5 2 3 The Simulation Panel The purpose of the Simulation panel is to provide information to detail the physical characteristics of each of the areas that have been identified on the Basin panel Because the HBV EC model is one dimensional the relative locations of the different types of terrain are not relevant Only the characteristics that have been described on the Basin and Simulation panels are considered For example one area might consist of all forested terrain located in Climate Zone 1 within Elevation Band 3 with a slope between 2 and 8 facing north A change in any of the five defining characteristics would result in a particular portion of terrain falling into a differ
370. th the object geometry may change at each time step Each step therefore follows a similar format that is repeated for the total number of steps The data at each time step is referred to as a record Each record has a header that specifies the time in the simulation at which the data was recorded All record headers have the same format regardless of the file type The record header consists of nine 4 byte integer variables defined as follows Time Stamp AA Record Header Figure A 1 The record header can record both placement within an animation and absolute time of a record 1 Frame number Increases sequentially with each record The first record must have a value of 1 the second a value of 2 and so on 2 Simulation time step number Increases sequentially with each record The values may increase at any increment and may vary by more than one increment through the file The remaining integer values contain the time stamp which records the simulation date and time 3 Year 268 Appendix A September 2010 Month Day Hour Minute Second Millisecond o OND mw A If the year and month are zero the time stamp is considered to be an arbitrary time If the year and month are non zero the time stamp 1s a date The remaining content of a binary file depends on the data type 269 EnSim Core September 2010 NATIVE FILE FORMATS 2D Rectangular Grids r2s r2v Two dimensional rectangular or r
371. the DEM that fall along the path of surface water flow Each channel or flow path has a stream order and a drainage area Stream order and drainage area are data attributes of a channel and can be found under the Data tab of the Channel object s Properties dialog or can be displayed in a popup window See Properties of Data Items under Data Items on p 17 and Data Probes under Probing Data on p 83 for more information Stream order or Strahler order is a measure of the relative size of a channel Headwater channels have an order of one When two channels of the same order meet the single downstream channel that 1s formed has an order that is one greater than its two upstream channels The drainage area of a channel is the land area upstream over which surface water drains to the most downstream node of a segment of a channel A channel segment is that part of a channel that lies between two of the channel s tributaries The most downstream node of a channel segment is its watershed outlet node See Watershed or Basin Outlet Nodes on p 147 for more information Since the channels are just lines delineating the flow path of water along the DEM and data attributes of channels are based on the information contained in the DEM information regarding the drainage area can be extracted from the DEM See Extracting Drainage Area under Hydrologic Tools on p 152 for more information 142 Section 2 1 Watershed Objects September 2010
372. the Save as type box at the bottom of the dialog window to view the various file formats in which the object may be saved See Appendix A for a complete description of the native file formats 11 EnSim Core September 2010 The data items and the file formats in which they may be saved are as follows ae ee SS Seana sp Ate View Shape Format pt ifs Mapinfo Interchange Format ok XYZ Point Set xyz ASCII EnSim format ipi Shape Roma pt i Map Interchange Poem Paroel Set pel Lagrangian parcel set nim format Pt tupi Shape Format fai Mapinfo Interchange Format po ifzufano Magi om Pa XY Data Items xy or dat ASCII EnSim format 8 2DRectangular Scalar Grid 28 ASCIT Single Frame EnSim format 8 iy Si ne in ama _ Binary ui Fra io tma P 8s ASCTT Single Frame EnSim format oo 8 Binary Multi Frame EnSim format pt age ASCE GnSion formes pt py ormat pf te Atif ASCE Grid Format 20 Red2DCelASCI Single Frame Pf Re ReaD Cell ASCH Multi Frame P 2oRect2D Cell BINARY Single Frame po 2 Ret Cell BINARY Muli Frame sit Geo TIA erm GF data range 0 255 Section 1 4 Data Items September 2010 v Binary Single Fiame Sim format O ee ee pT PASCI Magnitude EnSim format P s Binary Magnitude Si format E a Ata o 20 Thiongular Scalar Mesh 5a ASCTT asim format O pt 8 Binary Single Frame Sim format oo 8 Binary Muli Frame EnSim td pf xyzr Magnitude Ensim format
373. the Slope Analysis Dialog 1 Click on the channel object in the WorkSpace 2 Select Tools Watershed Slope Analysis from the menu bar This will launch the dialog Ensuring the channel object is in either a 2D or 3D view 1 In the view click on a point that represents either the upstream or downstream boundary of a channel section of interest 3 Select the Point 1 button 4 In the view click on the other boundary point of the channel section of interest Make sure this point is either downstream or upstream of point 1 5 Select the Point 2 button 6 Select the Apply button The average slope along the selected channel section will automatically be computed and displayed within the dialog An example is shown below 164 Section 2 2 Hydrologic Tools September 2010 a Slope Analysis X Select channel points for slope analysis Paa ki Point 434100 5001 000 Point 2 423200 4383600 Selected Point 1 4 Compute le NEAN ad ve ff Average Slope 0 0014150 mm E z Pi Figure 2 36 The Slope Analysis dialog and selected channel points within a view 2 2 2 Rating Curve Analysis RCA 2 2 2 1 Background and Theory A rating curve is a fitted curve that approximates a discharge or flow versus stage or level relationship at a location of a particular river or stream Green Kenue provides two curve fitting schemes for performing a rating curve analysis Pow
374. the Watershed object into the parameter set you can copy its data e Ifyou don t have a pregenerated watershed object you can load a DEM and use it to create a watershed by dragging it into the DEM child object of the New Watershed container within the HBV EC Parameter Set object 240 Section 5 2 The HBV EC Interface September 2010 WorkSpace a h Data Items i FA Watershed DEM E New HBV EC Parameter Set nA New WaterShed Figure 5 4 A DEM can also be added to the HBV EC Parameter Set object by itself Once the DEM has been added you can use it to create the Channels and Basin objects by clicking the Generate button When you generate the Basin and Channels for a new watershed the outlet node that is used represents the outlet of the entire DEM If the watershed that you re modelling is contained in a smaller portion of the map you ll have to designate the correct outlet node manually To identify an alternate basin object 1 In a view window locate the node of the Channels object that you would like to designate as the outlet node for the new watershed basin Select the node by double clicking it The node will be identified by a pink dot 2 Right click the node to show its shortcut menu and select Add Basin A new Basin object will be added to the WaterShed object Within the WaterShed panel there are four or more tabs e Watershed This tab lets you select the flow algorithm to be used to generate t
375. the current Medium See Report View Window Page Setup Properties on p 52 is Paper the status bar for the report view window shows the orientation of the current report as Letter Legal or Custom The bar also shows the position of the mouse cursor in inches measured from the top left corner of the sheet as well as the current zoom level Ready Letter 7 16 5 23 70 96 A YA If the current Medium is Image the status bar shows the resolution of the image being created and the current mouse position in pixels from the top left corner as well as the current zoom level Ready Image 640x480 443 347 70 o yA 49 EnSim Core September 2010 1 5 9 2 The Report View Window Tool Bar Each Report View window features a built in tool bar at the top These buttons allow access to drawing objects the zoom level of the view clipboard functions and the snap to grid F H S e 70 This menu lets you select the scale at which the report is displayed The minimum size is 10 1 10th of actual size and the maximum is 500 You can type in a value or select from the drop down box e A This button allows you to insert a text label on the report Through the Properties dialog each label can be customized for colour background border font weight and justification To change the text of a label double click on it twice See Labels under View Decorations on p 59 for more information e E This button allows
376. the icon on the tool bar and the menu option in the Tools menu will be unavailable 1 6 9 3 The Calculator for Time Series Objects A calculator is also available for time series The appearance and functionality of the time series calculator 1s almost identical to that of the gridded data calculators To use the calculator 1 Select a time series object in the WorkSpace This is an important step as only time series of the same type scalar or vector timestep or explicit times and same temporal parameters start time deltaT explicit times etc as the selected object will be available in the calculator 2 Choose Tools gt Calculator A dialog window will open 118 Section 1 6 Tools September 2010 xi Variables pf ceo fo 9 Expression SQRT A cancel Figure 1 95 The calculator for time series objects e Variable Use this box to assign variable names A B C or D to time series currently in the WorkSpace These variable names are then used to form the equation in the Expression box In the list box next to the variable name a list of the available objects which match the temporal geometry of the selected time series will appear For scalar time series the Value component is automatically selected For vector time series there are two components to choose from Mag and Dir If Mag is chosen the magnitude or value component of the selected time series will be used in the expression If Dir is
377. the model to be used to calculate The value for this variable can be either Parallel or Serial If the value is set to Parallel the Runoff FRAC variable will be available If it is set to Serial the Runoff Perc variable will be available The default value is Serial Runoff Perc This is the rate of percolation from the fast reservoir to the slow reservoir per day This simulates the effects of groundwater recharge on the slow reservoir This variable is only available if the Routing Model is set to Serial The default value is 5 Runoff FRAC This is the fraction of runoff directed to the fast reservoir Watersheds that respond quickly to precipitation will tend to have higher values while watersheds that show a delayed response will have lower values This variable is only available if the Routing Model is set to Parallel The default value is 0 7 Runoff KF This is the fast reservoir coefficient which determines what proportion of the fast reservoir is released per day Ata value of 0 the fast reservoir won t release any water while at a value of 1 it will empty itself each day The default value is 0 2 Runoff Alpha This is the fast reservoir exponent In conjunction with Runoff KF it determines the release rate of the fast reservoir The default value is 0 1 Runoff KS This is the slow reservoir coefficient Like Runoff KF it determines the amount of the slow reservoir released each day but for the slow reservoir The defau
378. the shortcut menu The following dialog will appear Segment Attributes x Cancel Figure 4 8 This dialog box allows you to edit a segment s attributes 224 Section 4 2 The GENID Interface September 2010 4 Click on an attribute keyword or value to edit as needed 5 Click OK 4 2 1 2 4 Changing a Node Attribute Value To change a node s attribute values 1 Double click on a node within a view to select it 2 Right click on the selected node 3 Select Edit from the shortcut menu The following dialog will appear Node Attributes x Surface Elevation 319 57 2039795 Tributary Discharge 0 Lancel Figure 4 9 This dialog box allows you to edit the attributes of a node 4 Click on an attribute keyword or value to edit as needed 5 Click Ok To change a node s location or value 1 Double click on a node within a view to select it 2 Right click on the selected node 3 Select Edit Selected Point from the shortcut menu The following dialog will appear Please specify new values for the location of the selected point Cancel Ka 652029163 T 50113545 101 Value Figure 4 10 This dialog box allows you to edit location or value of a node 4 Edit the values in the dialog box 5 Click DE 225 The GEN1D Model September 2010 4 2 1 3 Down Boundary The Down Boundary tab allows you to examine and edit the properties of the downstream boundary of the model
379. ting Average Upslope Elevation 154 2 2 1 5 Extracting Average Upslope Slope 155 2 2 1 6 Extracting Wetness Index 0 0 0 cc eee 155 2 2 1 7 Extracting Stream Power aa 156 xii Table of ContentsSeptember 2010 2 2 1 8 Extracting Relief Potential 0 0 0 00000 157 2 2 1 9 Extracting Upstream Network 00 000 157 2 2 1 10 Extracting Downstream Reach a 158 2 2 1 11 Extracting Basin Network 0 159 2 2 1 12 Extracting a Hypsographic Curve a 159 2 2 1 13 Extracting Basin Flow Path Distances 160 2 2 1 14 Drainage Area Ratio Analysis 0 0 0 161 e To launch the DAR Analysis 0 0 0000 cee eee 161 2 2 1 14 1Known PIOW cau a bade ea BAG KAB BKA see een dew beee eas 162 e To add a known flow station 0 0 0 0 cc eee 162 e To remove a known flow station 0 aaa 162 2 2 1 14 2Computed Flow ce ee ee 163 e To add a computed flow station 0 0 eee 163 e To remove a known flow station 0 aaa 164 2 2 1 15 Slope Analysis aa 164 e To launch the Slope Analysis Dialog AA 164 2 2 2 Rating Curve Analysis RCA nananana anaana 165 2 2 2 1 Background and Theory 0 0 00 cee ees 165 2 2 2 1 1 Power Curve Fit 2 cc ee 165 2 2 2 1 2 Polynomial Curve Fit a 166 2 2 2 2 The
380. tion are applied to the entire segment The terms used in Figure 4 2 may require some clarification e Area The cross sectional area of the channel 1 e the area encompassed by the water surface and the wetted perimeter e Wetted Perimeter The portion of the cross section that is in contact with the water e Water Elevation The average elevation between end nodes of the segment e Maximum Elevation The maximum elevation of the cross section If the elevation exceeds the maximum elevation the additional cross sectional area is assumed to be rectangular So the additional area is equal to the maximum channel width multiplied by the height above the maximum elevation e Minimum Elevation The minimum elevation of the cross section This is the point at which the cross sectional area is equal to zero e Conveying Channel Width The width of the channel at the current water elevation e Maximum Channel Width The width of the channel at the maximum water elevation Each segment of the network is linked to two attributes e Velocity The mean water velocity through the segment e Strickler Friction A coefficient used to describe the level of friction that applies within a segment 217 The GENID Model September 2010 Each node of the network is linked to two additional attributes e Surface Elevation The elevation of the water surface at the node e Tributary Discharge Any additional influx or source of water at the node such
381. tion of the header is included to show the time step or DeltaT value The time step for this data is one minute or 60 seconds DeltaT 020180000 EndHeader 900000 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 000000 Pon ADEO Type 2 ts2 Type 2 time series are only slightly more complex than Type 1 time series They contain vector data that varies with a constant time step There are two columns of data The first contains the magnitude or scalar value of the data for that time step and the second contains the direction of the vector in compass degrees Each row contains data about a different time step The time step is constant and is specified with the DeltaT keyword in the header If no time step is included in the file a dialog will appear when the file is opened in EnSim that asks you to supply a time step in seconds Type 2 time series files without headers can be opened within EnSim Ifa headerless Type 2 time series file is saved within EnSim it will be given a header An excerpt from a Type 2 time series file is shown below A portion of the header is included to show the DeltaT value The time step for this data is 10 seconds DeltaT 00 00 10 000 EndHeader 0 000000 0 000000 51 885268 0 000000 290 Appendix A September 2010 LES 2113 120 6677376 238s L20234 103 580318 ZI lg 9539243 8922245105 344 795983 792220052 Ios JILL Ta 632652 448 077744 75 550902 SUC eS L051 Tat TZ0L9 B03 SOLO
382. to compare two TimeSeries and produce statistics showing how closely the two series concur This can be used to compare measured and observed results for example To compute performance statistics 1 In the WorkSpace select one of the TimeSeries objects that you would like to compare 2 From the menu bar select Tools TimeSeries gt Compute Performance Statistics Select the two TimeSeries to Evaluate N 212 X 489686 6 5471010 0 Obs Modelled TimeSeries N 212 489686 6 Y5471010 0 Mod ae Figure 1 85 These Time Series will be compared statistically 3 From the drop down menus select the two TimeSeries objects that you d like to compare 4 Click OK The results of the analysis will be shown in a text window e Root Mean Squared e R Squared e Nash Sutcliffe Model Efficiency Coefficient e Relative Volume Error e Volumetric Efficiency e Mean Squared Log Error e Variance 109 EnSim Core September 2010 e Bias e Relative Bias e Mean Squared Error e Mean Absolute Error e Mean Absolute Relative Error e Mean Squared Relative Error e Monthly Peak Differences month by month e Monthly Percent Error in Peaks month by month e Monthly Relative Volume Error month by month 5 Save the contents of this window to a text file by selecting File 5Save from the text window s menu bar and providing a file name 1 6 6 4 Computing a Flow Duration Curve The Flow Duration Curve indicate
383. ton LA ie aram To extract a subset of a mesh 030M03 030M15 031H12 030M04 040114 082001 092603 092606 072107 030M11 031605 021114 021615 O11103 011012 001M 10 062H14 083H11 AMET Ad Extracting Data From a Mesh Extracting a Subset of a Mesh September 2010 1 Create or open a closed line set that encompasses the area that you wish to isolate The closed line must competely contain all nodes belonging to the elements to be extracted See Drawing Lines and Closed Polylines on p 69 for more information on creating a closed line 2 In the WorkSpace select the mesh that contains the elements to be extracted 3 From the menu bar select Tools gt T3 Mesh gt Extract Subset 4 In the Extract Mesh Subset From dialog select the closed line set from the Where Elements are within the Polygon drop down menu 5 Select the frames from which the subset will be extracted by selecting a choice from the Frame Option drop down menu Ifthe mesh doesn t contain multiple frames this option will be unavailable 101 EnSim Core September 2010 e Current Frame Selects only the frame which is currently visible as indicated in the Current Frame box To change the current frame use the animation toolbar See Animation on p 61 for more information e Range of Frames This option lets you choose a temporal subset of frames to extract from Enter the first and last frames in the Start Frame
384. tracted from a particular component See Extracting Time Series under Extracting Data on p 96 for more information To probe data 1 Select a data item in a view so that it is highlighted in the Workspace If no object is selected in the WorkSpace EnSim scans the list of objects in the view and selects and returns the data from the first object encountered under the mouse If only one object is displayed in the view it will be automatically selected 2 Double click on a component node point cell etc of an object in the view window The object component selected for the data probe will be highlighted in magenta and a popup window will appear The popup window will display information about the node such as the x and y coordinates and the node value The node value is the current data attribute see Data Attributes under Properties of Data Items on p 21 Note If you re examining a line or closed line and the current coordinate system is LatLong the Perimeter value will be given in metres and the Area value in square metres These are calculated using the Great Circle Route Algorithm k a AG a Ana fad wo Lo a on a 1 a mah RK o oe 4 i o A ove HZ ey uy Ti a at ika eo hi When a new object component is probed the previous popup window disappears unless Persistent Popups is specified in the view window s Properties All popup windows disappear when the view display is altered i e when the o
385. ts of the extracted slope The new slope surface will be created as a child of the original object and can be saved in the same format as the original grid le 2D Yiew 1 Figure 1 71 Slopes extracted using the eight neighbour finite difference option shown in a 2Dview 1 6 5 1 3 Extracting Aspects The aspect of a regular grid or triangular mesh can be extracted as a surface The slope value is calculated at each node based on the elevation of the node and that of its neighbours The units for aspect 1s degrees North facing aspect 1s zero degrees with aspect increasing from 0 to 360 degrees in the clockwise direction 1 e east facing is 90 degrees south facing is 180 degrees and west facing is 270 degrees 92 Section 1 6 Tools September 2010 To extract the aspects select the grid or mesh in the WorkSpace and then select Tools Extract Surface lt Aspects from the menu bar There are two methods available for computing aspect on regular grid They are as follows e Finite Difference 8 neighbour The aspect is computed at each node using the elevations of the node s eight neighbours A 3rd order finite difference method is used e Finite Difference 4 neighbour The aspect is computed at each node using the elevations of the node s neighbours in the four cardinal directions only A 2nd order finite difference method is used There is one method available for computing aspect on a triangular mesh T3 Elemen
386. uce a result that resembles cross section B The value must be between 0 identical to cross section A and 1 identical to cross section B 5 Click Apply 4 2 1 5 7 Vertically Offsetting a Cross Section Vertically offsetting a cross section can be used to adjust the elevation of an entire cross section at the same time When you enter the vertical offset value every point on the line has its elevation increased or decreased appropriately To vertically offset a cross section 1 Within a View window select the cross section you d like to offset 2 From the shortcut menu select Vertical Offset 3 Enter the value in metres by which the cross section should be elevated To lower the cross section 1 e to reduce its elevation enter a negative number 4 Click DE 4 2 1 5 8 Generating a Simple Cross Section If no data exists for a given segment s cross section and no other option is available a rough approximation of the possible cross section can be produced To generate a simple cross section 1 With the Channel object visible in a 2D or 3D view select the segment for which you would like to generate a simple cross section 2 From the segment s shortcut menu select CrossSection gt Generate CrossSection at Segment x Bank full Width m fi Ba Bankfull Height m 4 37 Bottom width m fo Include Floodplain Floodplain Width m Floodplain Height m Figure 4 19 This dial
387. ues greater than 0 Default 1 000000 Description Records the change in discharge between values of the rating curve e RATING CURVE STEP COUNT Optional Type integer Valid Values any integer equal to or greater than 1 Default 10 Description Records the number of generated values used to generate a rating curve in a RUN GEN RATING CURVE run Input Files e CHANNEL NETWORK FILE Required Type text Valid Values the name of any existing network file Default none Description the name of the n3s file that contains the channel network Boundaries e DOWN BOUNDARY NODE ID Required Type integer Valid Values between 0 and the maximum number of nodes Default none Description records the node location of the downstream boundary e DOWN BOUNDARY TYPE Required Type text Valid Values LEVEL CONSTANT LEVEL SERIES DISCHARGE CONSTANT DISCHARGE SERIES FREE FLOW Default LEVEL CONSTANT 319 EnSim Hydrologic September 2010 Description records the type of the downstream boundary node e DOWN BOUNDARY VALUE Required for LEVEL CONSTANT Or DISCHARGE CONSTANT downstream boundary types Type floating point Valid Values any positive number Default none Description records the value of the downstream boundary level or discharge e DOWN BOUNDARY FILE Required for LEVEL SERIES Or DISCHARGE SERIES downstream boundary types Type text Valid Values the name o
388. urbo Pascal to Environment Canada and current model development has since been co managed by Environment Canada and UBC The Canadian version 1s referred to as the HBV EC Environment Canada model 5 1 2 Algorithms Specific to the Model The HBV model was modified to match changes specified in the Lindstrom et al 1997 paper The HBV EC model represents the Canadian version of the HBV model There are slight differences between the Swedish and Canadian versions of the model which are discussed below The reader is directed to Bergstrom 1995 Lindstrom et al 1997 and Moore 1993 for descriptions of model routines This section describes the main components of HBV EC that are distinct from other available versions of the HBV model 234 The HBV EC Model September 2010 5 1 2 1 Climate Zones Climate zone representation was added to the HBV EC model to better represent the lateral climatic gradients which may occur across a basin Each climate zone 1s associated with a single climate station and unique parameter values for specifying the distribution of climate within the zone such as temperature and precipitation lapse rates Runoff from a climate zone is lumped through a series of fast and slow response reservoirs of similar configuration to those in the traditional HBV model Lindstrom et al 1997 5 1 2 2 Snow Melt Factor Variation with Terrain Aspect and Slope Within the traditional HBV model the snow melt factor does not v
389. used to identify the time at which the data was extracted in hours minutes seconds decimal seconds File Formats r2c ASCII The ASCII data in an r2c file is organized into a grid The number of columns corresponds to the number of cells in the x direction which is recorded as the value of the xCount keyword of the grid The number of rows corresponds to the number of cells in the y direction recorded as the value of the yCount keyword The first value of the data file corresponds to the bottom left cell of the grid Cell numbering begins at zero The next data value in the file found to the right of the first value in the same row is the value of the next cell in the r2c grid Each value in the grid is saved as a floating point number with up to 6 decimal places Kenue can also read files that are not properly formatted to some extent The values may be in free format with any number of spaces tabs or line returns between the values The values are read from left to right top to bottom and assigned to cells according to that order 301 EnSim Core September 2010 Multiframe ASCII The ASCH r2c file is capable of storing time varying data The ASCII data for each frame is organized exactly the same as for a single frame ASCII file except the data 1s blocked within Frame and EndFrame keywords EndHeader Frame 1 il 1993 01 01 1200200 000 020 O40 02 0 Oct 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 020 020 0 0 O00 00 00 O O 0 0 0 0 01 Ocal 0
390. ut menu 56 Section 1 5 Views September 2010 Hi Title f D View E Subtitle Decorations IM Border E Colour E l Colour z Width Ts Italics M Background Bold Colour M Underline Figure 1 34 The independent legend property dialog The independent legend properties that can be edited are as follows Title Subtitle Both titles are shown at the same font size with the subtitle appearing below the title The title text is not wrapped and the legend width is sized accordingly Decorations This determines the appearance of the colour scale legend Border and Background The Colour and Width of the border and the Colour of the background can be changed Font This determines the font of the title numbers and labels The Font Name and Colour can be edited Insert Clicking on this button will add an item to the legend Alternatively clicking below the last item in the list will also add an item Delete Clicking on this button will delete the selected item from the legend Item Window Each item in the legend may be selected and the item s individual properties modified Colour point style line style line width and name for each individual item can be modified by clicking on the required cell in the item window The figure above shows a drop down list of potential line style Creating a Quick Legend For data objects displayed in a 1D view a Quick Legend is available The Quick Legend is an independ
391. utside the basin boundary will default to zero The wetness index surface can be viewed ina 2D or 3D view 155 a a LL KA BINABOY ce oe X Figure 2 25 These images depict a Wetness Index map shown in 2D left and 3D right view r a j Bie 4 2 2 1 7 Extracting Stream Power The stream power index like the wetness index 1s a function of the drainage area and the slope Higher stream power values may indicate regions of the DEM that are more likely to generate surface runoff The stream power index of each node of the Watershed DEM can be extracted as a surface Select the DEM or a basin in the WorkSpace and select Tools Watershed Extract Stream Power from the menu bar Ifa basin is selected the stream power value of nodes outside the basin boundary will default to zero The stream power surface can be viewed in a 2D or 3D view viena Figure 2 26 These images depict a Stream Power map shown in 2D left and 3D right view 156 Section 2 2 Hydrologic Tools September 2010 2 2 1 8 Extracting Relief Potential Relief Potential is the difference between the average upslope elevation and the actual elevation Higher values may indicate higher potential flow velocities The relief potential of each node of the Watershed DEM can be extracted as a surface Select the DEM or a basin in the WorkSpace and select Tools Watershed gt Extract Relief Potential from the menu bar Ifa basin 1s selected the re
392. varying data can be animated by toggling on the fw Animate check box in the Display tab of the data item s Properties dialog box or through the object s shortcut menu Data that does not vary over time will not have this checkbox When the data item is toggled on to animate the animation tool bar appears The animation tool bar can also be removed or reinstated by selecting the view window and selecting View Animation Bar The position of the animation tool bar can be moved The default position of the animation bar is docked at the top of the view window Note that each view window has its own animation bar That is the animation bar from view window 1 is used to animate the data in view window 1 1t 1s not used to animate the data in view window 2 The animation tool bar looks like this da J ja mb b gt gt _1 Day 09 00 00 000 Day 09 00 00 000 The tool bar buttons from left to right are EKI jump to the first frame 6l EnSim Core September 2010 4d play in reverse Adl step backwards one frame m stop D step forwards one frame gt play bb jump to the last frame The animation tool bar has a text box 1n which the frame step or time counter can be displayed The counter can be switched from frame step or time counter by clicking on the time Below the text box is an animation progress meter The animation scroll feature displays the progress of the animation The progress meter can be moved to a speci
393. ver contain data that varies over time Consequently the data are always HH RH RH NM NM FN Gi O19 13E 006 si 208 96 006 48637e 005b 51945e 006 0968e 006 24 3049 Adi Ida 24s 25i 6394 0508 6362 6871 36 20398 Aba Iai 54 52 9069 1988 7903 9318 D OO O O nad 3049 s236394 320508 s246362 2000 1d September 2010 stored in ASCII format The data is organized into n 2 columns where n is the total number of data attributes possessed by each point The two extra columns are used to store the x and y coordinates of the points The information for each point begins on a new line The first value on a line is the x coordinate and the second is the y coordinate Data attributes follow on the same line in the same order as they appear in the header 287 EnSim Core September 2010 Time Series ts1 ts2 ts3 ts4 ts5 There are five types of time series supported by EnSim ts1 ts2 ts3 ts4 and ts5 The first four types cover the range of combinations of scalar and vector data with simple time steps or explicit date and time They have the icons m or 4 for time series containing scalar or vector data respectively e tsl scalar data with simple implicit time steps e ts2 vector data with simple time steps e ts3 scalar data with explicit time date hours minutes seconds e ts4 vector data with explicit time The fifth time series 1s a special type of time series
394. visseawcesesasseedennenet 101 edge lengths 2 dccecesscvcusebsncaness 102 COGS aaa 102 OSE asan 101 a een EA 95 DOO serrara NAA A 96 residuals maa AGA 95 BULLACON AEE 90 Index 215 8 amp 1 6 oe eee een 92 CULV AUUT CS aaa 93 J 0 AA AA 91 temporal statistics 90 LIE SCLICS anga GA 96 MCIOCIIY AO AA EERS 99 XY LA sarerea 103 Extracting data TPG ae E 103 F File Headers u 111111111 a 264 Pi NGA oee ER 2 File Types HIG GA yea oes 268 A EE 268 DI reer a EEN 268 MINE IG AG LG NAP 264 keywords cessstnavenareraccesesrveave 264 supported AA 263 Flight PAASA 62 POPE AGANE 63 Flow Duration Curve 110 POL Files ama AA 311 G GENID ama aha 135 215 creating hot start 235 CTOSS SECtHIONS sayesuedassresesctesseunerees 228 adjusting vertically 232 associating 228 CODY GANA 229 generating a 232 interpolating 231 POSITIONING u s 230 PLOPCIICS sc csovctieciesetonectosanetentss 233 TOVINE peran 233 resampling eee cee eeceeeeeeee 230 SCAU APP 229 displaying output 234 JUANS PERA 215 September 2010 files file format ees 315 file headers 315 323 327 AE E EE 219 geometric requirements 216 AA 217 boundaries ccccceee 217 e111 1S AP 217 CTOSS SECHION cs eeeeeeeeeeees 217 Ala oe een 217 HOLES ana Ya 217 Ad GA PAPA PAA 217
395. w Attribute Table or select Edit 5Show Attribute Table from the menu bar The attribute table will be created as a child object of the data object and will be displayed The attribute table can be saved by selecting it and clicking the GH button in the toolbar or selecting File 3Save from the menu bar The attribute table can be saved as either a tb0 or csv file See Tables tb0 on p 293 for more information on Table files Note After you ve extracted an Attribute Table the contents of the table will not be updated if the source data object changes To refresh the data in the table you must repeat the extraction process 100 Section 1 6 Tools ma Cities 7 5m Attributes 451 Ace Figure 1 78 This Attribute Table is from the 1 7 500 000 Cities Base Map 1 6 5 9 There are several tools that allow you to extract portions of a mesh 1 6 5 9 1 106 651 79 2869 78 8896 73 60629 79 9197 81 2912 79 5887 114 062 123 15 123 418 104 65 79 4193 7 7271 71 3375 3 1679 b3 6929 524 8081 97 2476 113 575 1730 rere 43 2007 43 9204 45 97 43 2681 43 0086 43 6555 31 0738 45 46 50 478 43 6738 45 9526 44 6157 47 6034 49 9067 53 5473 En TANI Windsor Kitchener St Catharines Oshawa Montr al Hamilton London Brampton Calgary Vancouver Victoria Regina Toronto Ottawa Quebec Fredericton Charlottetown Halifax 5t John s Winnipeg Edmon
396. will appear 97 EnSim Core September 2010 Rect DCell Analyser x Generate a 7 imesenes of From Grid Outflow To Grid Outtow Counts cells are within the polygon D of Grid Duflowy Cancel Figure 1 76 This dialog gathers criteria for the constraint A constrained time series allows the use of Boolean operators and Aggregation for extracting time series from parcel files Generate a Timeseries of This option must be chosen from Count Sum Min Max and Average The Count option counts the number of points defined by the Boolean operators in the And box below The Sum Min Max and Average options complete the specific operation on a specific attribute From This option shows the source object which contains the data to be examined To This option provides a name for the time series that is to be created Where cells are within the polygon This option lists any closed polylines within the data item which may be used to provide a spatial constraint The word cells in the title of this box may be different depending on the type of data item And Each of these three options lists the attributes within the data item and the available Boolean operators lt and gt The third column allows you to enter a value to define the criterion The time series data item will be created and displayed in the WorkSpace as a child of the originating data item The time series
397. work e Node Att The number of data attributes associated with nodes of the network e Seg The total number of segments in the network numbered 1 to n e Node The total number of nodes in the network numbered to n e A Attribute S Segment N Node 299 EnSim Core September 2010 2D Rectangular Cell Grids r2c A 2 dimensional rectangular cell grid is similar to an ordinary 2D rectangular grid The primary difference is that the cell grid contains information about the area enclosed by the lines and vertices of the grid as opposed to information at the vertices The ordering of the cells in a 2D rectangular cell grid begins at the bottom left corner of the grid and proceeds to the right along the bottom row When the end of a row is reached the numbering resumes at the left end of the next row up Figure A 3 The cells in this grid are numbered from I to 40 Keywords in the header of the r2c file are used to indicate the coordinates of the origin of the grid the height and width of each cell the number of cells in the x and y directions of the grid and the angle of the grid From this information the coordinates of each cell of the grid are determined File Headers r2c An example of a header from an r2c grid is shown below Hit HH HH HH HHH EE HH HH HH EEE EH EO EEE EE EOE aE EEE EO EEE OEE EE EEE EEE FileType r2c ASCII EnSim 1 0 Canadian Hydraulics Centre National Research Council c 1998 2005 Data
398. ws category 1 2 1 Managing Objects in the WorkSpace Objects sometimes contain other objects An example of an object containing another object is a Green Kenue watershed object shown below EnSim Core September 2010 WorkSpace ERs Data Items 8 Test Watershed aid H QEM 84 Channels Stream Order o Basin 1 ddl Basin 2 H 5 ae N r ih ote ee i e PAA nl eee eet aad Figure 1 2 A Green Kenue watershed object contains other objects The three objects under the Test Watershed object are considered children of the parent object Other examples of objects that are shown as children are extracted time series and 3D line sets The children or components of an object can be displayed or hidden in the workspace by clicking on the or signs respectively located to the left of the object In many cases only the children of an object can be dragged into a view If a child was created from a viewable parent object such as a time series extraction from a triangular mesh then both the child and parent can be displayed Objects in the WorkSpace are represented by icons which indicate the object s type and therefore some of the object s properties Icons for some common data items are detailed below Details concerning each type of data file can be found in the Appendices El a file usually a container file for other objects EJ rectangular grid scalar data rectangular grid vector data 4 triangular
399. y CHNL z H OF Apply Cancel Figure 2 54 This tab determines which data attributes are displayed 182 Section 2 3 WATFLOOD September 2010 4 The display and colour scale can be edited for each data attribute See the sections Properties of Data Items and Colour Scale in the Data Items section To display all the data attributes for a single cell 1 Select the Watflood Map 2 Double click on a cell of the Watflood Map The cell will be highlighted in magenta and a box will appear with all the data attribute information for that cell a 2D Yiew 1 Cell 216 Column 7 Rom 12 Channel Elevation EL 114 297 Drainage Area FRAC 62 Ka Drainage direction 5 South 4 River Class IB 1 Contour Density TROUGH 22 Channel Density ICHNL 1 Reach Number IREACH a Imperious Area Figure 2 55 The popup shows all of the data information for the highlighted cell 2 3 1 5 Editing Watflood Map Data Attributes The data attributes of a Watflood Map can be edited cell by cell To check and edit the cells the Watflood Map is best viewed by selecting the Surface style and viewing the map in a 2D view To edit a single cell select the cell and choose the Edit command from the shortcut menu A dialog will appear listing all of the data attributes Simply click on the desired attribute and its value will become highlighted Change the value and click DE or select another attribute to
400. y added objects if they overlap To move a data item already in the view to the top layer In the WorkSpace drag the data item back onto the view object as shown in the following figure WorkSpace Data Items 3 EB DEM200mJock27Hydro Eh Jocka0c Te H DEM Channels Stream Order Basin 1 iy Basin 1 a Channels Stream Order EU KY fp Ara ik el P Figure 1 22 To move an object to the top layer drag it back onto the view object 41 EnSim Core September 2010 1 5 6 4 Display Properties of the 2D Window The display properties of the 2D window are changed in the Display tab of the view s Properties dialog box Properties of 7D Yiew 1 X Display Recording Spatial Temporal Tools Meta Data Options Background Colour Show Compass Persistent Popups Extended Popup Info IY Show Probes T Lock View Min Mar x 25 2 125 2 yf of too Grid Options I Labels F Colour Label Size KAHERA Hint W Show Grid Cancel Figure 1 23 The Display Properties dialog ofa 2D view The display properties that can be edited include e Background Colour The box is not a checkbox but a colour selector indicating the colour to be applied to the background Upon selecting the box a colour selection dialog appears The box will display the colour selected e Show Compass The compass is a view decoration object and is described in the section
401. y Image from the menu bar or right click and select Reclassify Image from the shortcut menu x Source Name LandOlass Buffered Class Name Mew Yalue NoClass Barer ldForest YoungForest Agriculture Logged Glaciers Wetlands Waker oo 07 ee Lo Po oo Uptions M Create New Image New Name LandClass_E uttered Reclassitied Cancel Figure 1 107 Reclassifying a GeoTIFF allows you to combine similar categories This image has nine categories 132 Section 1 7 How To Hints and Tricks September 2010 2 In the New Value column select each value to be changed and enter the new value 3 To create a new object containing the changes without modifying the original leave the Create New Image checkbox checked and enter the new object name in the New Name box To save the changes to the original object clear the Create New Image checkbox Reclassify GeoTIFF x Source Name LandClass E uttered Reclassitied Class Name Wew Value Open U U Forest Glacier 2 2 Lake 3 3 Options M Create New Image New Name LandClass_B uttered R eclassihed Cancel Figure 1 108 The image has been reduced to four categories suitable for the HBV EC model 4 Click OK 133 EnSim Core September 2010 134 2 GREEN KENUE Green Kenue is an EnSim application that provides an integrated numerical modelling environment for hydrological models such as WATFLOOD HBV EC or GENID Green Kenue
402. ynchronize Views 0 0 eee 64 1 5 15 Saving and Copying Images 0 000 cee eee 65 1 0 10 1 Recording cine schectn gues hh dee bee NENA ABUEL 65 e TO create a MOVIE 3 06 NOD ont ee bee ee eed Sede Wand Seas oes 65 1 5 15 2 Copying to the Clipboard 0 0 0 eee 66 e To copy the image of a view window to the clipboard 66 Wed ore PINUNO Govan pa Gar eee tee BA GG he eA oa GLO NAD gee bared PG 66 1 5 16 Troubleshooting in Views 0 0 cee eee 66 WO Leo KPA saewe eee basses yee ee 68 1 6 1 Creating New Data Items 0 00 68 1 6 1 1 Drawing Points aa 68 e To create a point set aa 68 1 6 1 2 Drawing Lines and Closed Polylines 69 e To create a line or polyline aaa 69 e To create a closed line or polygon a 69 1 6 1 3 Creating a New Regular Grid 0 0 Aa 70 e To create a new Regular Grid a 70 1 6 1 4 Creating a New Triangular Mesh 0000005 71 e To create a new Triangular Mesh from existing data 71 1 6 1 5 Creating a New Table Object 2 0 00 00 cee ees 72 e To create a new Table Object from existing data 72 1 6 2 Selecting Data Items 0 0 a 73 1 6 3 Editing Data Items 0a 73 1 6 3 1 Editing Attributes s 652245 d0nen ou ehd dda tawh adie ds hada ha 73 e To edit an attribute of a d
403. you to create or edit files with external applications so that they may be used within EnSim e To allow you to become familiar with the file types used by EnSim There are a few basic object types native to EnSim Each is represented in the WorkSpace by a particular icon e 2D Rectangular Grid scalar gg and vector amp e 2D Triangular Mesh scalar 7 and vector 4 e Line Set 2D g7 and 3D 2 e XYZ Point Set Point Set or Parcel Set e XY Data Item e Time Series scalar and vector Table e Velocity Roses e Network e 2D Rectangular Cell Grid These icons help to identify an object s type Many objects can retrieve and save information from and to several file formats For example the source data of a 2D line set object might be an 12s a shp or an mif file Even though these files have different formats the underlying data once imported into EnSim is handled in the same way See Supported Foreign File Formats EnSim Core on p 304 for more information about file types from other software packages 263 EnSim Core September 2010 File Headers All EnSim native file formats have similar headers The first portion of the header is identical for all of these files An example from an xyz file 1s shown below Hit HH HH HH HHH EE HH HH HH EE OE HH EO EH EE EEE EOE EE EEE EHO EE EEE OE OE EE EEE EEE H FileType xyz ASCII EnSim 1 0 Copyright c Canadian Hydraulics Centre National Resear
404. you to draw an arrow on the report Click on the button then click on the report where you would like the tail of the arrow to be Click again to connect the two points with a line If you continue to click each point will extend the arrow To stop click on the button again or press lt Esc gt To turn an arrow into a line open up the Properties dialog of the arrow double click on it to select it and change the Head Style to none O Click on this button to create a rectangle in the top left corner of the report To move the rectangle click anywhere inside it and drag it to the new position To resize the rectangle click and drag on an edge or corner To change its appearance right click on it and open the Properties dialog E This button creates a rounded rectangle in the top left corner of the report To move the rounded rectangle click anywhere inside it and drag it to the new position To resize the rounded rectangle click and drag on an edge or corner To change its appearance right click on it and open the Properties dialog e O Much like the Rectangle and Rounded Rectangle buttons this button creates an ellipse in the top left corner of the report To move the ellipse click anywhere inside and drag it to the new position To reshape or resize the ellipse click and drag on an edge or corner To change its appearance right click on it and open its Properties dialog E This button opens a dialog box that let

Green Kenue

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents